PNA-X Service Manual N5242-90001

Service Guide
N5241A
(10 MHz–13.5 GHz)
and
N5242A
(10 MHz–26.5 GHz)
Agilent Technologies
2-Port and 4-Port PNA-X
Microwave Network Analyzers
Part Number N5242-90001

Printed in USA
May 2009
Supersedes Print Date: April 2009
© Agilent Technologies, Inc. 2007-2009

Warranty Statement
THE MATERIAL CONTAINED IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED “AS IS,” AND IS SUBJECT
TO BEING CHANGED, WITHOUT NOTICE, IN FUTURE EDITIONS. FURTHER, TO THE
MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, AGILENT DISCLAIMS ALL
WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WITH REGARD TO THIS MANUAL AND
ANY INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. AGILENT SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ERRORS OR FOR INCIDENTAL
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH THE FURNISHING, USE, OR
PERFORMANCE OF THIS DOCUMENT OR ANY INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN.
SHOULD AGILENT AND THE USER HAVE A SEPARATE WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH
WARRANTY TERMS COVERING THE MATERIAL IN THIS DOCUMENT THAT CONFLICT
WITH THESE TERMS, THE WARRANTY TERMS IN THE SEPARATE AGREEMENT WILL
CONTROL.
DFARS/Restricted Rights Notice

If software is for use in the performance of a U.S. Government prime contract or
subcontract, Software is delivered and licensed as “Commercial computer software” as
defined in DFAR 252.227-7014 (June 1995), or as a “commercial item” as defined in FAR
2.101(a) or as “Restricted computer software” as defined in FAR 52.227-19 (June 1987) or
any equivalent agency regulation or contract clause. Use, duplication or disclosure of
Software is subject to Agilent Technologies’ standard commercial license terms, and
non-DOD Departments and Agencies of the U.S. Government will receive no greater than
Restricted Rights as defined in FAR 52.227-19(c)(1-2) (June 1987). U.S. Government users
will receive no greater than Limited Rights as defined in FAR 52.227-14 (June 1987) or
DFAR 252.227-7015 (b)(2) (November 1995), as applicable in any technical data.
Certification
Agilent Technologies, Inc. certifies that this product met its published specifications at the
time of shipment from the factory. Agilent Technologies, Inc. further certifies that its
calibration measurements are traceable to the United States National Institute of
Standards and Technology, to the extent allowed by the Institute's calibration facility, and
to the calibration facilities of other International Standards Organization members.
ii Service Guide N5242-90001

Assistance
Product maintenance agreements and other customer assistance agreements are available
for Agilent Technologies, Inc. products. For information about these agreements and for
other assistance, contact Agilent. Refer to “Contacting Agilent” on page 2-13.
Safety and Regulatory Information

The safety and regulatory information pertaining to this product is located in Chapter 1,
“Safety and Regulatory Information.”
Safety Notes
The following safety notes are used throughout this manual. Familiarize yourself with
each of the notes and its meaning before operating this instrument. All pertinent safety
notes for using this product are located in Chapter 1, “Safety and Regulatory Information.”
WARNING Warning denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure which, if

not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in injury or loss
of life. Do not proceed beyond a warning note until the indicated
conditions are fully understood and met.
CAUTION Caution denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure that, if not

correctly performed or adhered to, could result in damage to or destruction of
the instrument. Do not proceed beyond a caution sign until the indicated
Service Guide N5242-90001 iii

Documentation Map
The online Help files are embedded in the analyzer, offering quick
reference to programming and user documentation. From the Help
drop-down menu, you can access the Help system in five different
languages. Also, you can view the Analyzer Product Overview
multimedia presentation and access the analyzer’s Web page.
The Installation and Quick Start Guide helps you to quickly

familiarize yourself with the analyzer. Procedures are provided for
installing, configuring, and verifying the operation of the analyzer.
Printing Copies of Documentation from the Web

To print copies of documentation from the Web, download the PDF file from the Agilent
web site:
• Go to http://www.agilent.com.
• Enter the document’s part number (located on the title page) in the Quick Search box.
• Click GO.
iv Service Guide N5242-90001

Contents
1 Safety and Regulatory Information

Information in This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Chapter One at-a-Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Safety Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3
General Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3
Safety Earth Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3
Before Applying Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3
Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
Electrostatic Discharge Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
Instrument Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
Lithium Battery Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8
2 General Product Information

Chapter Two at-a-Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
Physical Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
Electrical Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
Analyzer Options Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
Options as Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
Option H08, Pulsed RF Measurement Capability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
Option 010, Time Domain Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
Option 020, Add IF Inputs for Antenna and Millimeter-Wave. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Option 021, Add Pulse Modulator to 1st Internal Source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Option 022, Add Pulse Modulator to 2nd Internal Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Option 025, Add Four Internal Pulse Generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Option 029, Noise Figure Measurement Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Option 080, Frequency Offset Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Option 082, Scalar Calibrated Converter Measurements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Option 083, Vector and Scalar Calibrated Frequency Converter Measurements . . . . . . . .2-5
Option 1CM, Rack Mount Kit for Instruments without Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Option 1CP, Rack Mount Flange Kit for Instruments with Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Option 200, Standard 2-Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Option 219, 2-Port with Extended Power Range and Bias Tees. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Option 224, 2-Port with 2nd Source, Combiner, and Source Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Option 400, Standard 4-Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Option 419, 4-Port with Extended Power Range and Bias Tees. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Option 423, 4-Port with Combiner, and Source Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Option 551, N-Port Calibrated Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Option 897, Built-In Tests for Commercial Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Option 898 Built-In Tests for Standards Compliant Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Calibration Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Analyzer Upgrades Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
Analyzer Accessories Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
CD-RW Drive–N4688A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
USB Hub–N4689A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
Pulse I/O Adapter–N1966A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
Required Service Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Service Guide N5242-90001 Contents-1

Contents
Agilent Support, Services, and Assistance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

Service and Support Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Contacting Agilent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Shipping Your Analyzer to Agilent for Service or Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
3 Tests and Adjustments

Information in This Chapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Conventions Used for Hardkeys, Softkeys, and Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Chapter Three at-a-Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Verify the Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Protect Against Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Allow the Analyzer to Warm Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Review the Principles of Connector Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
About System Verification and Performance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
System Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Instrument Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
System Verification Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Performance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Certificate of Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
ANSI/NCSL Z540–1–1994 Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Non-ANSI/NCSL Z540–1–1994 Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Preliminary Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
The Operator’s Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
The Test Port Cable Checks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
System Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
What the System Verification Verifies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Measurement Uncertainty. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Measurement Traceability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Performing System Verification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Performance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Source Power Accuracy Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Source Maximum Power Output Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Source Power Linearity Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Frequency Accuracy Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Trace Noise Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Receiver Compression Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Noise Floor Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Calibration Coefficients Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Dynamic Accuracy Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
10 MHz Frequency Reference Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
IF Gain Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Synthesizer Bandwidth Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Source Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Receiver Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Receiver Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
EE Default Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Noise Figure Adjustment (Available Only with Option 029 Installed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Contents-2 Service Guide N5242-90001

Contents
4 Troubleshooting
Chapter Four at-a-Glance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2
Conventions Used for Hardkeys, Softkeys, and Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Operating the Analyzer With Covers Removed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Protect Against Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Assembly Replacement Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Getting Started with Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Check the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Troubleshooting Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Power Up Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
Power Supply Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Troubleshooting LCD Display Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12
Front Panel Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13
Front Panel Keypad and RPG Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13
A3 Display Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15
Checking the A2 USB Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16
A1 Front Panel Interface Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16
Rear Panel Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17
Checking the USB Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17
Checking the CONTROLLER Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17
LAN Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18
Measurement System Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23
Before you begin—consider: Where do you see a problem? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23
Verifying the A, B, C, D, and R Traces (Standard S-Parameter Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25
Where to Begin Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27
Checking the Source Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29
Checking the Signal Separation Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33
Checking the Receiver Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37
Instrument Block Diagrams Sheet 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-41
Microwave PNA, N5241A/42A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-41
Instrument Block Diagrams Sheet 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-43
Microwave PNA, N5241A/42A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-43
5 Theory of Operation
Chapter Five at-a-Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Network Analyzer System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
Functional Groups of the Network Analyzer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
Synthesized Source Group Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-7
Basic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-7
A4, A13, and A11 13.5 GHz Synthesizer Boards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
A5 and A8 26.5 GHz Source Boards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
A21 Multiplier/Amplifier 26.5 Board (HMA26.5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
A10 Frequency Reference Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
A19 Test Set Motherboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Signal Separation Group Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Configurable Test Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
A25–A28 Bridges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

Contents
A29–A32 Test Port Couplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

A34–A37 65-dB Source Step Attenuators and A38–A41 Bias Tees (Optional) . . . . . . . . . 5-20
A46–A49 Source Bypass Switches and A50 Combiner (Optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Receiver Group Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
A42–A45 35-dB Receiver Step Attenuators (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
A33 Reference Mixer Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
A23 and A24 Mixer Bricks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
A20 IF Multiplexer Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
A12 SPAM Board (Analog Description). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Noise Measurement Group Operation (Option 029) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
A52 and A53 Test Port 1 and 2 Option 029 Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
A54 Test Port 2 Option 029 Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
A55 Noise Downconverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
A7 Noise Receiver Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Digital Processing and Digital Control Group Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Front Panel Subgroup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Data Acquisition and Processing Subgroup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Power Supply Group Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
6 Replaceable Parts
Chapter Six at-a-Glance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Assembly Replacement Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Rebuilt-Exchange Assemblies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Replaceable Parts Listings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Front Panel Assembly, Front Side, All Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Front Panel Assembly, Back Side, All Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Top Assemblies, All Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Top Cables, All Cables—All Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Bottom Assemblies, Standard 2-Port Configuration, Option 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Bottom RF Cables, Standard 2-Port Configuration, Option 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Bottom Ribbon Cables and Wire Harnesses, Standard 2-Port Configuration,
Option 200. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Bottom Assemblies, 2-Port, Option 219 (including Option 029) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Bottom RF Cables, 2-Port, Option 219 without Option 029 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Bottom RF Cables, 2-Port, Option 219 with Option 029 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Bottom Ribbon Cables and Wire Harnesses, 2-Port, Option 219 (including Option 029) 6-30
Bottom RF Cables, 2-Port, Option 224 without Option 029 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
Bottom RF Cables, 2-Port, Option 224 with Option 029 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
Bottom Ribbon Cables and Wire Harnesses, 2-Port, Option 224 (including Option 029) 6-38
Bottom Assemblies, Standard 4-Port Configuration, Option 400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
Bottom RF Cables, Standard 4-Port Configuration, Option 400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
Bottom Ribbon Cables and Wire Harnesses, Standard 4-Port Configuration,
Option 400. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
Bottom RF Cables, 4-Port, Option 419 without Option 029 (Ports 1 and 2) . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Bottom RF Cables, 4-Port, Option 419 with Option 029 (Ports 1 and 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50

Contents
Bottom RF Cables, 4-Port, Option 419 without Option 029 (Ports 3 and 4) . . . . . . . . . . .6-52
Bottom RF Cables, 4-Port, Option 419 with Option 029 (Ports 3 and 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-54
Bottom Ribbon Cables and Wire Harnesses, 4-Port, Option 419 (including Option 029).6-56
Bottom Assemblies, 4-Port, Option 423 (including Option 029). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-58
Bottom Ribbon Cables and Wire Harnesses, 4-Port, Option 423 (including Option 029).6-68
Top Hardware and Miscellaneous Parts, All Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-70
Bottom Hardware and Miscellaneous Parts, All Options Except 029 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-72
Bottom Hardware and Miscellaneous Parts, Option 029 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-74
Internal Hardware and Miscellaneous Parts, All Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-76
External Hardware and Miscellaneous Parts, All Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-78
Rear Panel Assembly, All Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-80
Miscellaneous Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-82
7 Repair and Replacement Procedures

Chapter Seven at-a-Glance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
Personal Safety Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
Removal and Replacement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4
Removing the Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6
Removing and Replacing the Front Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-8
Removing and Replacing the A1–A3 and Other Front Panel Subassemblies. . . . . . . . . . . .7-10
Removing and Replacing the A4–A13 Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14
Removing and Replacing the A14 System Motherboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-16
Removing and Replacing the A15 Midplane Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18
Removing and Replacing the A16 Power Supply Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20
Removing and Replacing the A17 CPU Board Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-22
Removing and Replacing the A18 GPIB Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-24
Removing and Replacing the A19 Test Set Motherboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-26
Removing and Replacing the A20 IF Multiplexer Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-28
Removing and Replacing the A21 HMA26.5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-30
Removing and Replacing the A22 Splitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-32
Removing and Replacing the A23 and A24 Mixer Bricks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-34
Removing and Replacing the A25–A28 Bridges and Bridge Mounting Brackets. . . . . . . . .7-36
Removing and Replacing the A29–A32 Test Port Couplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-38
Removing and Replacing the A33 Reference Mixer Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-40
Removing and Replacing the A34–A37 Source Attenuators, the A38–A41 Bias Tees,
and the A42–A45 Receiver Attenuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-42
Removing and Replacing the A38–A41 Bias Tees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-44
Removing and Replacing the A46–A49 Bypass Switches and the A50 Combiner . . . . . . . .7-46
Removing and Replacing the A51 Hard Disk Drive (HDDA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-48
Removing and Replacing the A52 and A53 Option 029 Test Port Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-54
Removing and Replacing the A54 Option 029 Test Port 2 Bridge
and the A55 Option 029 Noise Downconverter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-56
Removing and Replacing the Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-58

Contents
Removing and Replacing the Front Panel LED Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-60

Removing and Replacing the Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-62
Removing and Replacing the Lithium Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-64
Post-Repair Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-68
8 General Purpose Maintenance Procedures

Chapter Eight at-a-Glance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Conventions Used for Hardkeys, Softkeys, and Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Error Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Using Error Terms as a Diagnostic Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Performing Measurement Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Using Flowgraphs to Identify Error Terms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Accessing Error Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Error Term Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Option Enable Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Accessing the Option Enable Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Option Entitlement Certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Enabling or Removing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Repairing and Recovering Option Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Installing or Changing a Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Firmware Upgrades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
How to Check the Current Firmware Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Downloading from the Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Operating System Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Recovering from Hard Disk Drive Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Correction Constants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Storing Correction Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19

1 Safety and Regulatory Information
Service Guide N5242-90001 1-1

Safety and Regulatory Information PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
Information in This Chapter N5241A/42A
Information in This Chapter

This chapter provides safety information that will help protect you and your network
analyzer. It also contains information that is required by various government regulatory
agencies.
Chapter One at-a-Glance
Section Title Summary of Content Start Page
Descriptions of CAUTION and WARNING

Safety Symbols Page 1-3
symbols used throughout this manual.
A list of safety points to consider when

General Safety Considerations Page 1-3
servicing your network analyzer.
A discussion of electrostatic discharge (ESD)

Electrostatic Discharge
and related recommendations and Page 1-6
Protection
requirements for ESD protection.
Definitions of instrument markings.

Regulatory Information Instructions for disposing of the analyzer’s Page 1-7
lithium battery.
1-2 Service Guide N5242-90001

PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers Safety and Regulatory Information
N5241A/42A Safety Symbols
Safety Symbols
The following safety symbols are used throughout this manual. Familiarize yourself with
each of the symbols and its meaning before operating this instrument.
CAUTION Caution denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure that, if not

correctly performed or adhered to, could result in damage to or destruction of
the instrument. Do not proceed beyond a caution note until the indicated
WARNING Warning denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure which, if

not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in injury or loss
of life. Do not proceed beyond a warning note until the indicated
General Safety Considerations
Safety Earth Ground
WARNING This is a Safety Class I product (provided with a protective earthing

ground incorporated in the power cord). The mains plug shall only
be inserted in a socket outlet provided with a protective earth
contact. Any interruption of the protective conductor, inside or
outside of the instrument, will make the instrument dangerous.
Intentional interruption is prohibited.
CAUTION Always use the three-prong AC power cord supplied with this product.
Failure to ensure adequate grounding by not using this cord may cause
product damage.
Before Applying Power
WARNING If this product is not used as specified, the protection provided by

the equipment could be impaired. This product must be used in a
normal condition (in which all means for protection are intact) only.
WARNING If an instrument handle is damaged, you should replace it

immediately. Damaged handles can break while you are moving or
lifting the instrument and cause personal injury or damage to the
instrument.

General Safety Considerations N5241A/42A
CAUTION This instrument has autoranging line voltage input. Be sure the supply
voltage is within the specified range.
WARNING Supply voltages which oscillate between the two normal input
ranges of the autoranging line voltage input will damage the power
supply. In rare cases, this damage has become a user safety concern.
If unstable power levels are expected, the analyzer input power must
be buffered by a line conditioner.
CAUTION This product is designed for use in Installation Category II and Pollution
Degree 2 per IEC 61010-1:2001 and 664 respectively.
CAUTION Do not operate the analyzer with the outer cover removed for more than
30 minutes, as this could cause the analyzer to overheat which could result in
costly damage.
CAUTION Ventilation Requirements: When installing the product in a cabinet, the

convection into and out of the product must not be restricted. The ambient
temperature (outside the cabinet) must be less than the maximum operating
temperature of the instrument by 4 ° C for every 100 watts dissipated in the
cabinet. If the total power dissipated in the cabinet is greater than 800 watts,
then forced convection must be used.
CAUTION The measuring terminals on this instrument are designed to be used with
external signals described in Measurement Category I, but NOT with
external signals described in Categories II, III, and IV. The input of this
instrument cannot be connected to the mains.
Servicing
WARNING These servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only.
To avoid electrical shock, do not perform any servicing unless you
are qualified to do so.
WARNING Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only

with the same or equivalent type recommended. Discard used
batteries according to local ordinances and/or manufacturer’s
instructions.
WARNING Procedures described in this document may be performed with

power supplied to the product while protective covers are removed.
Energy available at many points may, if contacted, result in personal
injury.

N5241A/42A General Safety Considerations
costly damage.
WARNING No operator serviceable parts inside. Refer servicing to qualified

personnel. To prevent electrical shock, do not remove covers.
WARNING The opening of covers or removal of parts may expose dangerous

voltages. Disconnect the instrument from all voltage sources while it
is being opened.
WARNING The detachable power cord is the instrument disconnecting device.

It disconnects the mains circuits from the mains supply before other
parts of the instrument. The front panel switch is only a standby
switch and is not a LINE switch (disconnecting device).
NOTE There are no replaceable fuses in the mains input or within the power supply
assembly.

Electrostatic Discharge Protection N5241A/42A
Electrostatic Discharge Protection

Protection against electrostatic discharge (ESD) is essential while removing assemblies
from or connecting cables to the network analyzer. Static electricity can build up on your
body and can easily damage sensitive internal circuit elements when discharged. Static
discharges too small to be felt can cause permanent damage. To prevent damage to the
instrument:
• always have a grounded, conductive table mat in front of your test equipment.
• always wear a grounded wrist strap, connected to a grounded conductive table mat,
having a 1 MΩ resistor in series with it, when handling components and assemblies or
when making connections.
• always wear a heel strap when working in an area with a conductive floor. If you are
uncertain about the conductivity of your floor, wear a heel strap.
• always ground yourself before you clean, inspect, or make a connection to a
static-sensitive device or test port. You can, for example, grasp the grounded outer shell
of the test port or cable connector briefly.
• always ground the center conductor of a test cable before making a connection to the
analyzer test port or other static-sensitive device. This can be done as follows:
1. Connect a short (from your calibration kit) to one end of the cable to short the center
conductor to the outer conductor.
2. While wearing a grounded wrist strap, grasp the outer shell of the cable connector.
3. Connect the other end of the cable to the test port and remove the short from the
cable.
Figure 1-1 shows a typical ESD protection setup using a grounded mat and wrist strap.
Refer to “ESD Supplies” on page 6-83 for part numbers.
Figure 1-1 ESD Protection Setup

N5241A/42A Regulatory Information
Regulatory Information
This section contains information that is required by various government regulatory
agencies.
Instrument Markings
Familiarize yourself with these instrument markings and their meanings before operating
the instrument.
The instruction documentation symbol. The product is marked with this symbol
when it is necessary for the user to refer to the instructions in the documentation.
This symbol indicates that the instrument requires alternating current (ac) input.
This symbol indicates separate collection for electrical and electronic equipment,
mandated under EU law as of August 13, 2005. All electric and electronic equipment
are required to be separated from normal waste for disposal (Reference WEEE
Directive, 2002/96/EC).
This symbol indicates that the power line switch is ON.
This symbol indicates that the power line switch is in the STANDBY position.
This symbol indicates that the power line switch is in the OFF position.
This symbol is used to identify a terminal which is internally connected to the

product frame or chassis.
The CE mark is a registered trademark of the European Community. (If

accompanied by a year, it is when the design was proven.)
The CSA mark is a registered trademark of the CSA International. This instrument
complies with Canada: CSA 22.2 No. 61010-1-04.
This is a symbol of an Industrial Scientific and Medical Group 1 Class A product.
This is a marking to indicate product compliance with the Canadian

ICES/NMB-001
Interference-Causing Equipment Standard (ICES-001).
Direct Current.
This is a required mark signifying compliance with an EMC requirement. The C-Tick
mark is a registered trademark of the Australian Spectrum Management Agency.
China RoHS regulations include requirements related to packaging, and require

compliance to China standard GB18455-2001.
This symbol indicates compliance with the China RoHS regulations for
paper/fiberboard packaging.

Regulatory Information N5241A/42A
Lithium Battery Disposal

If the battery on the A17 CPU board assembly needs to be disposed of, dispose of it in
accordance with your country’s requirements. If required, you may return the battery to
Agilent Technologies for disposal. Refer to “Contacting Agilent” on page 2-13 for
assistance.
For instructions on removing and replacing the battery on the A17 CPU board assembly,
refer to “Removing and Replacing the Lithium Battery” on page 7-64.

2 General Product Information

General Product Information PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
Chapter Two at-a-Glance
Cleaning instructions for the external surfaces of

your analyzer.
Maintenance Page 2-3
Information about electrical maintenance of your
analyzer.
A list of the options available for the microwave

Analyzer Options Available Page 2-3
network analyzers.
A list of accessories available for the microwave

Analyzer Accessories Available Page 2-9
network analyzers.
A list of the upgrades available for the microwave

Analyzer Upgrades Available Page 2-8
network analyzers.
A list of service equipment that is required to

Required Service Test Equipment perform system verification, performance tests, Page 2-10
adjustments, and troubleshooting.
The Internet address (URL) for on-line assistance.

Service and support options available.
Agilent Support, Services, and
Calibration options available. Page 2-13
Assistance
Important information about shipping your
analyzer to Agilent for service or repair.

PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers General Product Information
N5241A/42A Maintenance
Maintenance
Physical Maintenance
WARNING To prevent electrical shock, disconnect the analyzer from the mains
source before cleaning. Use a dry cloth or one slightly dampened with
water to clean the external case parts. Do not attempt to clean internally.
Electrical Maintenance
Refer to “Contacting Agilent” on page 2-13 and to Chapter 3, “Tests and Adjustments.”
Analyzer Options Available
Options as Upgrades
The options described in this section can be ordered as upgrades. Refer to “Analyzer
Upgrades Available” on page 2-8.
Refer also to “Upgrade Kits orderable by Model Number” on page 6-83 for a complete list of
available upgrade kits.
Option H08, Pulsed RF Measurement Capability

This option can be added to any other option combination.
This option provides software to set up and control pulsed-RF measurements with
point-in-pulse and pulse-profile capability. The software sets the coefficient of the
analyzer’s digital IF filters to null out unwanted spectral components, enables the receiver
IF gates on the rear panel, controls internal pulse generators (Option 025) or external
Agilent pulse generators, controls internal pulse modulators (Options 021 and 022) or
external pulse modulators, and optimizes for measurement sensitivity.
The N1966A pulse I/O adapter is recommended if using external pulse generators or
external pulse modulators. See “Analyzer Accessories Available” on page 2-9.
Option 010, Time Domain Operation

An Option 010 analyzer can display the time domain response of a network or test device
by calculating the inverse Fourier transform of the frequency domain response. This
calculation allows the Option 010 analyzer to show the response of a test device as a
function of time or distance. In time domain, the magnitude and location of a discontinuity
and the characteristics of individual transmission paths of a network or test device can be
determined. Time domain operation retains all the accuracy of active error correction.

Analyzer Options Available N5241A/42A
Option 020, Add IF Inputs for Antenna and Millimeter-Wave

This option enables external IF inputs on the rear panel of the analyzer for applications
such as antenna and millimeter-wave test.
Option 021, Add Pulse Modulator to 1st Internal Source

This option enables the internal pulse modulator on source 1. An external pulse generator
can be connected through the rear-panel PULSE I/O connector or one of the internal pulse
generators provided with Option 025 can be used. The N1966A pulse I/O adapter is
recommended if using an external pulse generator. See “Analyzer Accessories Available” on
page 2-9.
Option 022, Add Pulse Modulator to 2nd Internal Source

This option can be added to any analyzer with Option 224 or Option 400.
This option enables the internal pulse modulator on source 2. An external pulse generator
can be connected through the rear-panel PULSE I/O connector or one of the internal pulse
generators provided with Option 025 can be used. The N1966A pulse I/O adapter is
page 2-9.
Option 025, Add Four Internal Pulse Generators

This option enables four internal pulse generators. These pulse generators can be used to
control the internal pulse modulators (Options 021 and 022) and internal receiver IF gates.
These internal pulse generators are also available through the rear-panel PULSE I/O
connector to control external pulse modulators. The N1966A pulse I/O adapter is
page 2-9.
Option 029, Noise Figure Measurement Capability

This option can be added to Options 219, 224, 419, or 423.
This option provides the additional hardware and firmware necessary to add
high-accuracy noise figure measurement capability to your 2-port or 4-port analyzer.
Option 080, Frequency Offset Measurements

This option enables the additional firmware necessary to make frequency offset
measurements by enabling the analyzer to set the source frequency independently from
where the receivers are tuned. This ability is important for measuring amplifiers, mixers,
and frequency converters.

N5241A/42A Analyzer Options Available
Option 082, Scalar Calibrated Converter Measurements

This option can be added to any option combination that includes Option 080 but does not
include Option 083.
This option enables the additional firmware necessary to make scalar calibrated converter
measurements by providing an intuitive and easy-to-use user interface for setting up
mixer and converter measurements.
Option 083, Vector and Scalar Calibrated Frequency Converter Measurements

This option can be added to any option combination that includes Option 080 but does not
include Option 082.
This option enables the additional firmware necessary to make both vector and scalar
calibrated converter measurements by providing an intuitive and easy-to-use user interface
for setting up mixer and converter measurements. This option includes the
Scalar-Calibrated Converter Measurement (SMC) and the Vector-Mixer Calibration (VMC).
Option 1CM, Rack Mount Kit for Instruments without Handles

Option 1CM provides a rack mount kit that contains a pair of flanges, rack mount rails,
and the necessary hardware to mount the analyzer (not equipped with handles) in an
equipment rack with 482.6 mm (19 inches) horizontal spacing.
Additional kits may be ordered from Agilent. Refer to “Rack Mount Kits and Handle Kits”
on page 6-83 for the part numbers.
Option 1CP, Rack Mount Flange Kit for Instruments with Handles
Option 1CP provides a rack mount kit that contains a pair of flanges (cut to adapt to
handles), rack mount rails, and the necessary hardware to mount the analyzer in an
equipment rack with 482.6 mm (19 inches) horizontal spacing.
Additional kits may be ordered from Agilent. Refer to “Rack Mount Kits and Handle Kits”
on page 6-83 for the part numbers.
Option 200, Standard 2-Port Configuration

This is a 2-port network analyzer with an upper frequency limit of either 13.5 GHz
(N5241A) or 26.5 GHz (N5242A). This is the standard 2-port analyzer and contains:
• one internal source
• a reference mixer switch
• configurable test set
Option 219, 2-Port with Extended Power Range and Bias Tees
In addition to the Option 200 hardware, this 2-port analyzer contains:
• two source attenuators
• two receiver attenuators
• two bias tees

Analyzer Options Available N5241A/42A
Option 224, 2-Port with 2nd Source, Combiner, and Source Switches
In addition to the Options 200 and 219 hardware, this 2-port analyzer contains:
• another internal source with front-panel outputs (SRC 2 OUT1 and SRC 2 OUT 2)
• one source combiner
• three source bypass switches
Option 400, Standard 4-Port Configuration

This is a 4-port network analyzer with an upper frequency limit of either 13.5 GHz
(N5241A) or 26.5 GHz (N5242A). This is the standard 4-port analyzer and contains:
• two internal sources
• a reference mixer switch
• configurable test set
Option 419, 4-Port with Extended Power Range and Bias Tees
In addition to the Option 400 hardware, this 4-port analyzer contains:.
• four source attenuators
• four receiver attenuators
• four bias tees
Option 423, 4-Port with Combiner, and Source Switches

In addition to the Options 400 and 419 hardware, this 4-port analyzer contains:
• one source combiner
• four source bypass switches
Option 551, N-Port Calibrated Measurements

This option allows your analyzer to make calibrated measurements on any number (N) of
ports.
Option 897, Built-In Tests for Commercial Calibration

This option enables performance tests that are built into the analyzer that enable you to
perform ISO 9001 commercial calibration of your analyzer. Refer to “Calibration Options”
on page 2-7 for a description of the commercial calibration.
Option 898 Built-In Tests for Standards Compliant Calibration

This option enables performance tests that are built into the analyzer that enable you to
perform ISO 17025 and ANSI Z540 standards compliant calibration of your analyzer. Refer
to “Calibration Options” on page 2-7 for a description of the standards compliant
calibrations.

N5241A/42A Analyzer Options Available
Calibration Options
Option UK6, Commercial Calibration Certificate with Test Data

A complete set of measurements that test the analyzer to the manufacturer’s published
specifications. It includes a calibration label, a calibration certificate, and the
corresponding calibration data report. This calibration conforms to ISO 9001.
This calibration can be obtained by sending your analyzer to Agilent for calibration along
with an order for Option UK6. Refer to “Shipping Your Analyzer to Agilent for Service or
Repair”.
Option 1A7, ISO 17025 Standards Compliant Calibration

specifications. It includes a calibration label, an ISO 17025 calibration certificate, and the
corresponding calibration data, measurement uncertainties, and guardbands on all
customer specifications. This calibration conforms to ISO 17025 and ISO 9001.
with an order for Option 1A7. Refer to “Shipping Your Analyzer to Agilent for Service or
Repair”.
Option A6J, ANSI Z540 Standards Compliant Calibration

specifications. It includes both pre- and post-adjustment data with measurement
uncertainty information compliant to the ANSI/NCSL Z540 standard.
with an order for Option A6J. Refer to “Shipping Your Analyzer to Agilent for Service or
Repair”.

Analyzer Upgrades Available N5241A/42A
Analyzer Upgrades Available

The options described in this chapter can be ordered as upgrades. The following table lists
the Upgrades that are available for theN5241A and N5242A analyzers. Refer to the
previous section, “Analyzer Options Available” on page 2-3, for a complete description of
each option.
Refer also to Chapter 6, “Replaceable Parts” for a complete list of available upgrade kits
and information on how to order them.
Table 2-1 Analyzer Upgrades Available
Upgrade Order Number

Add Pulsed RF Measurement Capability (Option H08) N5241A/42AU-H08
Add Time Domain Operation (Option 010) N5241A/42AU-010
Add IF Inputs for Antenna and mm-Wave (Option 020) N5241A/42AU-020
Add Pulse Modulator to 1st Internal Source (Option 021) N5241A/42AU-021
Add Pulse Modulator to 2nd Internal Source (Option 022) N5241A/42AU-022
Add Four Internal Pulse Generators (Option 025) N5241A/42AU-025
Add Frequency Offset Mode (Option 080) N5241A/42AU-080
Add Scalar Calibrated Converter Measurements (Option 082) N5241A/42AU-082
Add Vector and Scalar Calibrated Converter Measurements (Option 083) N5241A/42AU-083
Bias Tees and Source and Receiver Attenuators for 2-Port Models
N5241A/42AU-921
(Option 200 to 219)
Second Internal Source, Combiner, and Source Switches for 2-Port Models
N5241A/42AU-922
(Option 219 to 224)
Add Option 029 (noise figure measurement capability) to 2-Port Models N5241A/42AU-924
Bias Tees and Source and Receiver Attenuators for 4-Port Models
N5241A/42AU-926
(Option 400 to 419)
Combiner and Source Switches for 4-Port Models
N5241A/42AU-927
Option 419 to 423)
Add Option 029 (noise figure measurement capability) to 4-Port Models N5241A/42AU-929
N-Port Calibrated Measurements (Option 551) N5241A/42AU-551
Add built-in performance test software for Agilent inclusive calibration perpetual
N5241A/42AU-897
license (Option897)
Add built-in performance test software for standards compliant calibration perpetual
N5241A/42AU-898
license (Option898)

N5241A/42A Analyzer Accessories Available
Analyzer Accessories Available
CD-RW Drive–N4688A
This accessory is an external read/write CD drive with a USB cable and can be ordered as
model number N4688A.
USB Hub–N4689A
This accessory is a 4-port USB hub for connecting additional USB peripheral devices and
can be ordered as model number N4689A.
Pulse I/O Adapter–N1966A

An adapter for connecting between the analyzer’s rear-panel PULSE I/O connector and the
coaxial inputs and outputs of external pulse generators and external pulse modulators.
The adapter contains 11 SMB-male coaxial connectors and a mating connector for the
rear-panel PULSE I/O connector.
This adapter can be ordered as model number N1966A.
Figure 2-1 N1966A Pulse I/O Adapter

Required Service Test Equipment N5241A/42A
Required Service Test Equipment

Recommended Alternate
Model or Part Model or Part
Equipment Critical Specifications Number Number Usea
Test Instruments and Software

Freq: 10 MHz to 10.5 GHz 53151A
Frequency counter None P, A, T
Accuracy : ±0.5 ppm Opt 001
Min Freq: 1 MHz
Spectrum analyzer Max Freq: > 4 GHz 8565E 856xE A, T
Resolution BW: 300 Hz
Power meter Accuracy: ±0.0068 dB E4418B/19B E4418A/19Ab P, A, T
Freq: 300 kHz to 3.0 GHz
Power sensor 8482A None P, A, T
Range: –30 to +20 dBm
Freq: 3.0 GHz to 26.5 GHz
Power sensor E4413A 8485A P, A, T
Range: –30 to +20 dBm
Dynamic accuracy Z5623A
None specified None P
test set Opt H01
Receiver compression test None specified Z5623A None P
set Opt K01
Signal generator CW Freq: 1.185 GHz N5181A E8257D P, A, T
Opt 503 Opt 520
Noise source 10 MHz to 26.5 GHz 346C None P, A, T
Voltage and resistance
Digital multi-meter measurement capability Any Any T
Voltage resolution: 10 mV
Any printer with Microsoft®
Printer N/A P
Windows® XP driver
Internal test softwarec N/A Option 897/898 None P
a. P = Performance tests, A = Adjustments, T = Troubleshooting, V = System verification

b. If an accurate measurement of the dynamic accuracy specification is not required, the E4418A or E4419A can
be used.
c. The recommended model or part number for all equipment listed with a “P” in the Use column is required for
proper operation of the analyzer’s internal test software.
Microsoft® and Windows® are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

N5241A/42A Required Service Test Equipment
Required Service Test Equipment (Cont’d)

Recommended
a Alternate Model
Equipment Critical Specifications Model or Part
or Part Number Useb
Number
Calibration and Verification Kits

3.5 mm calibration kit Freq: 10 MHz to 26.5 GHz 85052B 85052D P,T,V
3.5 mm verification kit Freq: 10 MHz to 26.5 GHz 85053B None V
Cables
BNC cable (2 required) 50Ω, length ≥ 60 cm 8120-1839 None A
3.5 mm RF cable (Qty 2) 50Ω, length ≥ 60 cm 85131C 85131E P,A,V
GPIB cable N/A 10833A/B/C/D None P,A
Adapters
3.5 mm (f) to 3.5 mm (f) Return Loss: ≥ 32 dB 83059B 85052-60012c P,A,T
3.5 mm (f) to type-N (m) Return Loss: ≥ 28 dB 1250-1743 None P,A,T
Attenuators
3.5 mm (m,f), 10-dB fixed Accuracy: ± 0.5 dB 8493C
None P
attenuator Freq: 10 MHz to 26.5 GHz Option 010
3.5 mm (m,f), 20-dB fixed Accuracy: ± 0.5 dB 8493C
None P
attenuator Freq: 10 MHz to 26.5 GHz Option 020
a. Unless specified otherwise, equipment listed is required for all analyzer models.
b. P = Performance tests, A = Adjustments, T = Troubleshooting, R = Repair, V = System verification
c. Included in the 85052B/D calibration kits.

Required Service Test Equipment N5241A/42A
Required Service Test Equipment (Cont’d)

Recommended Alternate
Model or Part Model
Equipmenta Critical Specifications Number Number Useb
Tools
T-8 TORX driver 0.6 N-m (5 in-lb) setting N/A N/A R
0.5, 0.8, and 1.0 N-m
T-10 TORX driver N/A N/A T, R
(4, 7, and 9 in-lb) settings
T-15 TORX driver 1.5 N-m (14 in-lb) setting N/A N/A T, R
T-20 TORX driver 2.4 N-m (21 in-lb) setting N/A N/A T, R
1/4 inch and 5/16 inch open-end
Thin profile 8710-0510 N/A A, R
wrench
1.1 and 2.4 N-m (10 and 21
5/16 inch, open-end torque wrench
in-lb) settings (for semi-rigid N/A N/A T, R
(metric equivalent is 8 mm)
cables)
8.1 N-m (72 in-lb) setting (for
1 inch, open-end torque wrench
Port 1 and Port 2 connector N/A N/A R
(metric equivalent is 26 mm)
nuts)
0.9 N-m (8 in-lb) setting (for
20 mm, open-end torque wrench measurement port 8710-1764 N/A P, A, T
connections)
Static Safety Parts
Adjustable antistatic wrist strap N/A 9300-1367 None P, A, T
Antistatic wrist strap grounding
N/A 9300-0980 None P, A, T
cord (5 foot)
Static control table mat and earth
N/A 9300-0797 None P, A, T
ground wire
Miscellaneous
USB flash ROM drive N/A Any None P, A, R
a. Unless specified otherwise, equipment listed is required for all analyzer models.
b. P = Performance tests, A = Adjustments, T = Troubleshooting, R = Repair, V = System verification

N5241A/42A Agilent Support, Services, and Assistance
Agilent Support, Services, and Assistance

Information on the following topics is included in this section.
• “Service and Support Options”
• “Contacting Agilent”
• “Shipping Your Analyzer to Agilent for Service or Repair”
Service and Support Options

The analyzer’s standard warranty is a one-year return to Agilent Technologies service warranty.
NOTE There are many other repair and calibration options available from the
Agilent Technologies support organization. These options cover a range of
service agreements with varying response times. Contact Agilent for
additional information on available service agreements for this product. Refer
to “Contacting Agilent” on page 2-13.
Contacting Agilent
Assistance with test and measurements needs and information or finding a local Agilent
office are available on the Web at: http://www.agilent.com/find/assist
If you do not have access to the Internet, please contact your Agilent field engineer.
NOTE In any correspondence or telephone conversation, refer to the Agilent product

by its model number and full serial number. With this information, the
Agilent representative can determine whether your product is still within its
warranty period.
Shipping Your Analyzer to Agilent for Service or Repair
IMPORTANT Agilent Technologies reserves the right to reformat or replace the internal
hard disk drive in your analyzer as part of its repair. This will erase all user
information stored on the hard disk. It is imperative, therefore, that you
make a backup copy of your critical test data located on the analyzer’s hard
disk before shipping it to Agilent for repair.
If you wish to send your network analyzer to Agilent Technologies for service or repair:
• Include a complete description of the service requested or of the failure and a
description of any failed test and any error message.
• Remove and retain the front handles and all rack mount hardware. The analyzer
should be sent to Agilent in the same configuration as it was originally shipped.
• Ship the analyzer using the original or comparable antistatic packaging materials.
• Contact Agilent for instructions on where to ship your analyzer.

Agilent Support, Services, and Assistance N5241A/42A

3 Tests and Adjustments

Tests and Adjustments PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers

This chapter contains procedures to help you check, verify, and adjust your PNA.
• The checks verify the operation of the assemblies in your analyzer.
• The verification compares the operation of your analyzer to a gold standard.
• The adjustments allow you to tune your analyzer for maximum response.
Conventions Used for Hardkeys, Softkeys, and Menu Items

The following conventions are used in this document:
This represents a “hardkey”, a key that is physically located

Hardkey
on the instrument.
This represents a “softkey”, a key whose label is determined
Softkey by the instrument firmware.
Menu Item This represents an item in a drop-down or pop-up menu.
Chapter Three at-a-Glance
Items to consider or procedures to perform before

testing is begun:
• Verify the Operating Environment
Before You Begin Page 3-4
• Protect Against Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
• Allow the Analyzer to Warm Up
• Review the Principles of Connector Care
Descriptions of:
• System Specifications
About System • Instrument Specifications
Verification and Page 3-6
Performance Tests • System Verification Procedure
• Performance Tests
• Certificate of Calibration
ANSI/NCSL
The ANSI/NCSL Z540-1-1994 process of verifying your
Z540–1–1994 Page 3-9
analyzer.
Verification
Non-ANSI/NCSL
The non-ANSI/NCSL Z540-1-1994 process of verifying
Z540–1–1994 Page 3-10
your analyzer.
Verification

PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers Tests and Adjustments
N5241A/42A Information in This Chapter
Performing the operator’s check.

Checking your test cables.
Preliminary Checks Page 3-11
Perform these checks before performing system
verification.
What the system verification does.

System Verification How to perform the verification test. Page 3-20
How to interpret the results.
A brief summary of each performance test:

• Source Maximum Power Output Test
• Source Power Linearity Test
• Frequency Accuracy Test
Performance Testsa • Trace Noise Test Page 3-29
• Receiver Compression Test
• Noise Floor Test
• Calibration Coefficients Test
• Dynamic Accuracy Test
Setups and procedures for adjusting your analyzer:
• 10 MHz Frequency Reference Adjustment

• IF Gain Adjustment
• Synthesizer Bandwidth Adjustment
Adjustmentsb Page 3-36
• Source Adjustment
• Receiver Adjustment
• Receiver Characterization
• EE Default Adjustment
a. These performance tests are included in the analyzer’s firmware for Options 897 and
898.
b. These adjustments are included in the analyzer’s firmware on all models and options.

Before You Begin N5241A/42A
Before You Begin

Before checking, verifying, or adjusting the analyzer, refer to the following paragraphs to:
• make sure the operating environment is within its requirements
• make sure that proper electrostatic discharge (ESD) protection is provided
• make sure the analyzer has warmed up properly to achieve system stability
• review the principles of connector care
Verify the Operating Environment

Due to their operating specifications, the verification and calibration kit devices determine
your operating environment conditions. Open the calibration and verification kits and
place all the devices on top of the foam inserts so they will reach room temperature. As the
device dimensions change with temperature, their electrical characteristics change as well.
It is necessary to keep the environmental levels within the following limits:
• Temperature: +23 ° C ± 3 ° C (Error-corrected temperature range)
Once the measurement calibration has been done, the ambient temperature must be
maintained to within ± 1 ° C of the calibration temperature.
• Humidity: 0% to 95% at 40 ° C maximum, non-condensing
• Altitude: 0 to 4,600 meters (≈ 15,000 feet.)
Protect Against Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)

This is important. If not properly protected against, electrostatic discharge can seriously
damage your analyzer, resulting in costly repair.
CAUTION To reduce the chance of electrostatic discharge, follow all of the

recommendations outlined in “Electrostatic Discharge Protection” on
page 1-6, for all of the procedures in this chapter.
Allow the Analyzer to Warm Up
NOTE To achieve the maximum system stability, allow the analyzer to warm up for
at least 90 minutes.

N5241A/42A Before You Begin
Review the Principles of Connector Care

Proper connector care and connection techniques are critical for accurate and repeatable
measurements. Refer to Table 3-1 for tips on connector care.
Prior to making connections to your analyzer, carefully review the information about
inspecting, cleaning, and gaging connectors. Refer to the calibration kit documentation for
detailed connector care information.
For course numbers about additional connector care instruction, contact Agilent
Technologies. Refer to “Contacting Agilent” on page 2-13.
Table 3-1 Connector Care Quick Reference Guide

Handling and Storage
Do • Keep connectors clean Do Not • Touch mating-plane surfaces
• Extend sleeve or connector nut • Set connectors contact-end down
• Use plastic end-caps during storage • Store connectors or adapters loose
Visual Inspection
Do • Inspect all connectors carefully Do Not • Use a damaged connector - ever
• Look for metal particles, scratches,
and dents
Connector Cleaning
Do • Try compressed air first Do Not • Use any abrasives
• Use isopropyl alcohola • Get liquid into plastic support
beads
• Clean connector threads
Gaging Connectors
Do • Clean and zero the gage before use Do Not • Use an out-of-specification
• Use the correct gage type connector
• Use correct end of calibration block

• Gage all connectors before first use
Making Connections
Do • Align connectors carefully Do Not • Apply bending force to connection
• Make preliminary connection contact • Over tighten preliminary
lightly connection
• Turn only the connector nut • Twist or screw any connection
• Use a torque wrench for final • Tighten past torque wrench
connection “break” point
a. Cleaning connectors with alcohol shall only be done with the instrument’s power cord
removed, and in a well-ventilated area. Allow all residual alcohol moisture to evaporate,
and the fumes to dissipate prior to energizing the instrument.

About System Verification and Performance Tests N5241A/42A
About System Verification and Performance Tests

The performance of the network analyzer is specified in two ways: system specifications,
and instrument specifications. It is the end user’s responsibility to determine which set of
specifications is applicable to their use of the PNA.
A network analyzer measurement “system” includes the analyzer, calibration kit, test
cables, and any necessary adapters. The system verification software in the PNA is
used to verify the system’s conformance to the “system” specifications. A “pass”
result demonstrates that the analyzer, test cables, and adapters, perform correctly as a
system. It DOES NOT demonstrate that any one component performs according to its
individual specifications. A change to any part of this measurement system requires a
re-verification of the system.
Instrument specifications specify the network analyzer’s uncorrected measurement port
characteristics and its output and input behavior. The PNA performance tests are
used to verify the analyzer’s conformance to “instrument” specifications.
System Specifications
System specifications specify warranted performance of the measurement system when
making error-corrected measurements using the same calibration kit and test cables used
during the system verification routine. System specifications are applicable only when the
measurement system is used to make error-corrected measurements.
The analyzer's system specifications are described in the Agilent PNA Series Network
Analyzer Technical Specifications and also in the analyzer’s on-line help system in the
section titled “Corrected System Performance”.
System specifications are expressed in two ways:
• residual errors of the measurement system shown as tabular specification values
• graphs of measurement uncertainty versus reflection and transmission coefficients
System specifications are verified in one of the following ways:
• Complete the system verification procedure using a certified verification kit and
certified calibration kit that will be used for future measurements, or
• Complete all of the performance tests using a certified calibration kit that will be used
for future measurements. This alternative verifies both the system specifications and
the instrument specifications for the analyzer.
Instrument Specifications
The analyzer's instrument specifications are described in the Agilent PNA Series Network
Analyzer Technical Specifications and also in the analyzer’s on-line help system in the
sections titled “Uncorrected System Performance”, “Test Port Output”, and “Test Port
Input”.
These specifications apply when the analyzer is used to make either raw or error-corrected
measurements.

N5241A/42A About System Verification and Performance Tests
System Verification Procedure

The system verification procedure tests the network analyzer measurement “system”, as
defined previously, against the system specifications. If confirmation is successful, the
measurement system is capable of making measurements to the accuracy specified by the
graphs of measurement uncertainty.
The procedure consists of calibrating the analyzer with a calibration kit, measuring a set
of characterized devices, and comparing the resultant measured data to the data and
uncertainty limits supplied with the verification kit. The device data provided with the
verification kit has a traceable path to NIST. The total measurement uncertainty limits for
the performance verification are the sum of the factory measurement uncertainties and
the uncertainties associated with measuring the same devices on the system being
verified. The difference between the factory-measured data and the verification-measured
data must fall within the total uncertainty limits at all frequencies for the total system
uncertainty test to pass.
NOTE Calibration kits are different from verification kits. Calibration kits are used
to determine the systematic errors of a network analyzer measurement
system. Verification kits are used to confirm system specifications and are not
used to generate error correction.
Performance Tests
Performance tests are used to confirm analyzer performance against the “instrument”
specifications. If confirmation is successful, the analyzer meets the instrument
specifications.
Performance tests are contained in the analyzer’s firmware with Options 897 or 898 and
are described at “Performance Tests” on page 3-29.
An illustrated outline of the performance verification procedure:
• for ANSI/NCSL Z540-1-1994 verification, is shown in Figure 3-1 on page 3-9.
• for non-ANSI/NCSL Z540-1-1994 verification, is shown in Figure 3-2 on page 3-10.

About System Verification and Performance Tests N5241A/42A
Certificate of Calibration
Agilent Technologies will issue a certificate of calibration upon successful completion of
system verification or completion of the performance tests. The certificate of calibration
will apply to the “system” (analyzer, calibration kit, test cables, and any necessary
adapters) if the system verification procedure is used to confirm the system specifications.
If the performance tests are used to confirm instrument specifications, the certificate of
calibration will apply to the PNA as an independent instrument. The equipment and
measurement standards used for the tests must be certified and must be traceable to
recognized standards.
NOTE If you have a measurement application that does not use all of the
measurement capabilities of the analyzer, you may ask your local Agilent
Technologies service office to verify only a subset of the specifications.
However, this “limited calibration” creates the possibility of making
inaccurate measurements if you then use the analyzer in an application
requiring additional capabilities.

N5241A/42A ANSI/NCSL Z540–1–1994 Verification
ANSI/NCSL Z540–1–1994 Verification

To meet the criteria for ANSI/NCSL Z540-1-1994, perform the preliminary checks and all
performance tests without stopping to repair or adjust1. Refer to Figure 3-1 for test flow.
Print data at the completion of all the tests, even if you are aware that the analyzer did not
pass. If there is a failure, complete the verification before you troubleshoot, repair, and
adjust. After the failure has been corrected, repeat the entire set of performance tests and
generate a new set of data.
Figure 3-1 ANSI/NCSL Z540–1–1994 Test Path Verification Flowchart
1. Stop only in case of a catastrophic failure or cable connector damage

Non-ANSI/NCSL Z540–1–1994 Verification N5241A/42A
Non-ANSI/NCSL Z540–1–1994 Verification

For non-ANSI/NCSL Z540-1-1994, perform the preliminary checks and the performance
tests while stopping to troubleshoot. Refer to Figure 3-2 for test flow. Troubleshoot and
repair the first problem encountered without continuing to other tests. After you
troubleshoot, repair, and adjust, repeat the last failed portion and generate a new set of
data.
Figure 3-2 Non–ANSI/NCSL Z540–1–1994 Test Path Verification Flowchart

N5241A/42A Preliminary Checks
Preliminary Checks
Preliminary checks include the following:
• “The Operator’s Check” on page 3-11
The operator’s check tests the network analyzer’s basic functionality of the source,
switch, and receivers.
• “The Test Port Cable Checks” on page 3-13
The test port cable checks are not required, but are recommended to verify the
performance of the test port cables before performing the verification test.
The Operator’s Check

NOTE To achieve the maximum system stability, allow the analyzer to warm up for
at least 90 minutes before performing the Operator’s Check.
The operator’s check is a software driven test that checks the basic operation of the
assemblies in all of the measurement port signal paths. By performing the operator’s
check, the following are determined:
• attenuation ranges of all installed attenuators
• calibration of the receivers
• frequency response of the receivers
• phase lock and leveling
• noise floor and trace noise
Accessories Used in the Operator’s Check
Equipment Type Part Number
Female short, 3.5 mm (any short from the 85052B calibration kit)
Female open, 3.5 mm (any open from the 85052B calibration kit)
Performing the Operator’s Check
1. Press UTILITY System , then Service , then Operator’s Check .
2. In the PNA Operator’s Check dialog box (refer to Figure 3-3), under Configure, select
either Prompt for attachment of Short/Open, to pause at each step in the process to
allow moving the short/open to the appropriate port, or Shorts/Opens are attached to
ALL ports, to run through the test without stopping. Shorts and opens can be mixed on
the test ports.
3. Click Begin.
4. If shorts and opens are not connected to all ports, you will be prompted to connect them
as they are needed.

Preliminary Checks N5241A/42A
5. The result of the operator’s check will be shown as a PASS or FAIL next to each test
(refer to Figure 3-3). The PNA Operator’s Check dialog box will look different for
different PNA model numbers and installed options. Some of the tests are performed
only if the appropriate options are installed in the PNA.
Figure 3-3 Operator’s Check Dialog Box
If the Operator’s Check Fails

1. Clean the test ports, shorts, and adapters. Torque to specification. Repeat the check.
2. If the check still fails, suspect a faulty component. Refer to “Measurement System
Troubleshooting” on page 4-23 to begin troubleshooting to determine the faulty
component.

The Test Port Cable Checks

A faulty test port cable can cause a failure in the verification test. The following checks are
not required, but are recommended to verify the performance of the test port cable.
• “Cable Return Loss Check” on page 3-14
• “Cable Insertion Loss Check” on page 3-15
• “Cable Magnitude and Phase Stability Check” on page 3-16
• “Cable Connector Repeatability Check” on page 3-18
Accessories Used in the Test Port Cable Checks
Model or Alternate Model

Equipment Type
Part Number or Part Number
Calibration kit, 3.5 mm 85052B 85052D
Test cable, 3.5 mm (f) to 3.5 mm (f) 85131C 85131E

Cable Return Loss Check
1. Press UTILITY Preset .
2. Perform a one-port calibration on Port 1, 1-Port Reflection. Refer to the embedded help
in the analyzer if necessary.
3. Connect the test port cable to Port 1. Connect a broadband load to the other end of the
cable. Tighten to the specified torque for the connector type.
The analyzer now displays the return loss of the cable.
4. Press MARKER/ANALYSIS Search , then Search . In the Marker Search dialog box,
in the Search Type box, make sure Maximum is selected. Click Execute, and then click
OK.
5. The marker annotation on the screen indicates the worst case return loss. Refer to the
cable manual to see if it meets the return loss specification. For an example of a typical
return loss measurement, see Figure 3-4.
Figure 3-4 Typical Cable Return Loss Response
If the Cable Return Loss Check Fails

1. Clean the cable and devices and torque to specification. Repeat the check.
2. If the check still fails, the cable should be repaired or replaced.

Cable Insertion Loss Check

1. With the test port cable still connected to Port 1, connect a short to the other end of the
cable.
2. Press MARKER/ANALYSIS Search , then Search . In the Marker Search dialog box,
in the Search Type box, select Minimum.Click Execute, and then click OK.
3. The displayed response is twice the actual loss. To get the actual worst case insertion
loss, divide the value at the marker annotation by two. Refer to the cable manual to see
if it meets the insertion loss specification. For an example of a typical insertion loss
measurement, see Figure 3-5.
Figure 3-5 Typical Cable Insertion Loss Response
If the Cable Insertion Loss Check Fails


Cable Magnitude and Phase Stability Check

1. With the test port cable still connected to Port 1, connect a short to the other end of the
cable.
3. Press TRACE/CHANNEL Traces , then New Trace... . In the New Trace dialog box,
click the S11 box, and then click OK.
4. Press RESPONSE Format , then Phase , then ENTRY Enter .
5. Press RESPONSE Avg . Verify that Average ON/off is ON. If not, press the
Average on/OFF softkey to toggle it ON.
The Averaging Factor box will appear directly above the display. In the Averaging
Factor box, type 50 or click the arrows to select 50, and then press ENTRY Enter .
6. To provide a good reference, hold the test cable in a straight line perpendicular to the
front panel of the network analyzer.
7. Press RESPONSE Avg , then Averaging Restart .
8. Wait for the analyzer to average the measurement 50 times (approximately two
seconds).
9. To normalize the data trace: press MARKER/ANALYSIS Memory , then Data Trace ,
then Data Math , then Data/Memory , then ENTRY Enter .
10. Slowly make a 180 degree bend in the middle of the cable and hold it in that position.
11. For each trace: press RESPONSE Scale , then Scale .
The Scale Per Division box will appear directly above the display. Set the Scale Per
Division for optimum viewing as shown in Figure 3-6.
12. Place a marker on the largest deflection that goes above the reference line and is
within the cable’s specified frequency range. For a typical response of cable magnitude
and phase stability, see Figure 3-6.
13. Place a marker on the largest deflection that goes below the reference line and is
within the cable’s specified frequency range.
In this S11 measurement, the displayed trace results from energy being propagated
down the cable and reflected back from the short. Therefore, the measured deflection
value must be divided in half to reach the correct value.

Figure 3-6 Typical Cable Magnitude and Phase Stability Response
If the Cable Magnitude and Phase Stability Check Fails


Cable Connector Repeatability Check
NOTE The connector repeatability measurement should be done at the test port as
well as at the end of the test port cable.
1. With the test port cable still connected to Port 1, connect a broadband load to the other
end of the cable.
3. Press RESPONSE Avg . Verify that Average ON/off is ON. If not, press the
Average on/OFF softkey to toggle it ON.
The Averaging Factor box will appear directly above the display. In the Averaging
Factor box, type 100 or click the arrows to select 100, and then press ENTRY Enter .
4. Wait for the analyzer to average the measurement 100 times (approximately five
seconds).
5. To normalize the data trace: press MARKER/ANALYSIS Memory , then Data Trace ,
then Data Math , then Data/Memory , then ENTRY Enter .
6. To adjust the display scale:
a. Press RESPONSE Scale , then Scale .
The Scale Per Division box will appear directly above the display. Set the Scale Per
Division for 0.5 dB. Press ENTRY Enter .
b. Press Reference Level .

The Reference Level box will appear directly above the display. Set the Reference
Level for 0 dB. Press ENTRY Enter .
7. Disconnect and then reconnect the cable to the test port. Tighten the connection to the
specified torque for the connector type.
8. Press RESPONSE Avg , then Averaging Restart .
9. Look at the trace for spikes or modes.

10. To re-normalize the data trace of the reconnected cable: press MARKER/ANALYSIS
Memory , then Data->Memory , then ENTRY Enter .
11. Repeat steps 7 through 9 at least three times to look for modes. Modes appear when a
harmonic of the source fundamental frequency is able to propagate through the cable or
connector. It is helpful to print a plot of the trace each time to compare several
connections. If any mode appears each time the cable is connected and reconnected,
measurement integrity will be affected.
For a typical response of cable connector repeatability, see Figure 3-7.

12. For the Port 2, 3, and 4 Check, connect the cable (with the load attached) to the
respective port and repeat steps 2 through 11.
Figure 3-7 Typical Cable Connector Repeatability Response
If the Cable Connector Repeatability Check Fails

1. Clean the cable and devices, and torque to specification. Repeat the check.

System Verification N5241A/42A
System Verification
System verification is used to verify system-level, error-corrected uncertainty limits for
network analyzer measurements. The verification procedure is automated and is
contained in the firmware of the analyzer.
The device data provided with the verification kit has a traceable path to a national
standard. The difference between the supplied traceable data and the measured data must
fall within the total uncertainty limits at all frequencies for the system verification to pass.
The total measurement uncertainty limits for the system verification are the sum of the
factory measurement uncertainties for the verification devices and the uncertainties
associated with the system being verified. You can determine your system measurement
uncertainty limits by referring to the analyzer embedded on-line help.
IMPORTANT Passing this system verification does not guarantee that the analyzer meets
all of its performance specifications. However, it does show that the network
analyzer being verified measures the same devices with the same results as a
factory system which has had all of its specifications verified and its total
measurement uncertainty minimized.
What the System Verification Verifies

The system verification procedure verifies proper operation of the:
• network analyzer
• calibration kit
• test port cables
together as a “system”. It DOES NOT verify that any of these components pass their
specifications independently. The user is responsible for independently calibrating and
verifying the proper operation of the calibration kit and test port cables prior to performing
the system verification.
NOTE Additional equipment or accessories used with the above system are not
verified by system verification.

N5241A/42A System Verification
Measurement Uncertainty
Measurement uncertainty is defined as the sum of:
• the residual systematic (repeatable) errors, and
• the random (non-repeatable) errors
in the measurement system after calibration.
The systematic errors are:
• directivity,
• source match,
• load match,
• reflection and transmission frequency tracking, and
• isolation (crosstalk).
The random errors include:
• noise,
• drift,
• connector repeatability, and
• test cable stability.
A complete description of system errors and how they affect measurements is provided in
the analyzer’s on-line embedded help.
Any measurement result is the vector sum of the actual test device response plus all error
terms. The precise effect of each error term depends on its magnitude and phase
relationship to the actual test device response. When the phase of an error response is not
known, phase is assumed to be worst-case (−180° to +180° ). Random errors such as noise
and connector repeatability are generally combined in a root-sum-of-the-squares (RSS)
manner.

Measurement Traceability
To establish a measurement traceability path to a national standard for a network
analyzer system, the overall system performance is verified through the measurement of
devices that have a traceable path. This is accomplished by measuring the devices in an
Agilent verification kit.
The measurement of the devices in the verification kit has a traceable path because the
factory system that measured the devices is calibrated and verified by measuring
standards that have a traceable path to the National Institute of Standards and
Technology (NIST) (see Figure 3-8). This chain of measurements defines how the
verification process brings traceability to the network analyzer system.
Figure 3-8 NIST Traceability Path for Calibration and Verification Standard

Performing System Verification

The following verification procedure is automated by the analyzer firmware. The process
for the verification is:
• connect cables to the analyzer test ports
• perform a calibration or recall a recent calibration
• run the system verification program for the verification devices
Each time through the verification process, you are prompted to make necessary
connections and perform or recall a calibration as part of performing the verification. If you
select to perform a calibration, you are guided through the calibration procedure. This part
of the process can be eliminated if you choose to load an existing recent calibration. If
necessary, refer to the analyzer’s on-line embedded help for information on storing and
recalling calibrations.
For each verification device, the analyzer reads a file from the verification disk and
sequentially measures the magnitude and phase for all four S-parameters.
IMPORTANT For system verification to perform correctly, it is NECESSARY that the

verification devices be measured with their female connectors connected to
the analyzer’s test ports.
NOTE Although the performance for all S-parameters are measured, the S11 and S22
phase uncertainties for the attenuators and airlines are less important for
verifying system performance. Therefore, the limit lines will not appear on
the printout.
Equipment Used in the System Verification Procedure
Equipment Type 3.5 mm Type-N
85052B, C, D 85054B/D
Calibration kit
N4691A E-cal N4690A E-cal
Verification kit 85053B 85055A
Single cable: 85131C/E Single cable: 85132C/E (3.5 mm NMD to 7 mm)
Cables
Cable pair: 85131D/F Cable pair: 85132D/F (3.5 mm NMD to 7 mm)
With single cable: an 85130C adapter and a 7mm to Type-N
adapter from the 85054B calibration kit.
Adapters None required.
With cable pair: Two 7mm to Type-N adapters from the
85054B calibration kit.

Cable Substitution
The test port cables specified for the network analyzer system have been characterized for
connector repeatability, magnitude and phase stability with flexing, return loss, insertion
loss, and aging rate. Since test port cable performance is a significant contributor to the
system performance, cables of lower performance will increase the uncertainty of your
measurement. Refer to the plots in the cable tests (earlier in this chapter) that show the
performance of good cables. It is highly recommended that the test port cables be regularly
tested.
If the system verification is performed with a non-Agilent cable, ensure that the cable
meets or exceeds the specifications for the test cable specified in the previous table,
“Equipment Used in the System Verification Procedure.” Refer to the cable’s user’s guide
for specifications.
Kit Substitution
Non-Agilent calibration kits and verification kits are not recommended nor supported.
System Verification Procedure

1. If you desire printed test outputs, connect a printer to the analyzer. For the printer,
ensure that the correct driver is loaded and the printer is defined as the default printer.
Refer to the embedded help in the analyzer for printer setup. Let the analyzer warm up
for at least 90 minutes.
2. Insert the verification kit disk into the analyzer disk drive.
3. Press UTILITY System , then Service , then System Verification . The System
Verification dialog box is displayed; refer to Figure 3-9.
Figure 3-9 System Verification Dialog Box

4. In the Calibration Kit box, select the calibration kit or electronic calibration module
(ECal) that is being used by clicking on it. The corresponding verification kit to use is
selected for you and displayed in the Verification Kit box. Refer to Figure 3-9.
5. Under Printer Output, click one of the following options. Refer to Figure 3-9.
• Print Tabular Data: Prints the verification data in tabular form which includes
measured data and uncertainty limits. For an example, refer to Figure 3-11 on
page 3-27.
• Print Graphs: Prints the verification data in graphical form. The graphical form
includes the measured data trace, factory supplied data trace, and uncertainty
limits. For an example, refer to Figure 3-12 on page 3-28.
• File Tabular Data: Writes the tabular data to a text file in the C:\Program
Files\Agilent\Network Analyzer\Documents\ directory.
• File Graphs: Saves a screen image in PNG format in the C:\Program
Files\Agilent\Network Analyzer\Documents\ directory.
NOTE For printed output, it is assumed that the printer has been tested and the
Windows driver is installed for the printer that is being used. The system
verification test prints to the printer that has been designated as the default
printer. (On the Windows Desktop display, click on My Computer, Control
Panel, and then Printers to verify the printer setup.)
To modify the number of ports to be verified or to change the number of devices to

measure, click on the Configure tab and make the desired selections.
6. Click Run.
7. Follow the instructions on the analyzer for performing a full calibration or recalling an
existing recent calibration.
8. Follow the instructions on the analyzer for performing the system verification; inserting
the verification devices as prompted.

If the System Fails the Verification Test

IMPORTANT Inspect all connections. Do not remove the cable from the analyzer test port.
This will invalidate the calibration that you performed earlier.
1. Disconnect and clean the device that failed the verification test.
2. Reconnect the device making sure that all connections are torqued to the proper
specifications.
3. Measure the device again.
4. If the analyzer still fails the test, check the measurement calibration by viewing the
error terms as described in “Accessing Error Terms” on page 8-8.
5. Refer to Figure 3-10 for additional troubleshooting steps.
Figure 3-10 System Verification Failure Flowchart

Interpreting the Verification Results

Figure 3-11 shows an example of typical verification results with Print Tabular Data
selected in the Printer Output area of the System Verification dialog box.
At the top of the printed output is the name of the device, the serial number of the device,
and the date tested.
Each S-parameter measurement result is printed with frequency tested, lower and upper
limit lines, the measured data, and the result of the test.
Figure 3-11 Example of Printed Tabular Verification Results

Figure 3-12 shows an example of typical verification results with Print Graphs selected in
the Printer Output area of the System Verification dialog box. The printed graphical
results show the following:
• the name of the device measured
• the serial number of the device
• the parameters measured
• Results of the measurements. Labeled as A in Figure 3-12.
• Data measured at the factory from the verification kit. Labeled as B in Figure 3-12.
• Upper and lower limit points as defined by the total system uncertainty system.
Labeled as C in Figure 3-12.
Figure 3-12 Example of Printed Graphical Verification Results

N5241A/42A Performance Tests
Performance Tests
The performance tests verify the electrical performance of your N5241A/42A microwave
PNA. These performance tests are included in the analyzer’s firmware with Option 897
and Option 898. Your analyzer is automatically configured for each individual test.
The model numbers of the additional equipment used by these performance tests are
specified under “Required Service Test Equipment” on page 2-10.
There are nine tests in the Option 897 or 898 performance test package:
• Source Power Accuracy Test
• Source Maximum Power Output Test
• Source Power Linearity Test
• Frequency Accuracy Test
• Trace Noise Test
• Receiver Compression Test
• Noise Floor Test
• Calibration Coefficients Test
• Dynamic Accuracy Test
Source Power Accuracy Test

Function of the Test: To confirm the accuracy of the source output power of your network
analyzer over its full frequency range.
Specification Tested: Test Port Output–Power Level Accuracy
Equipment Used: A power meter, power sensors, and adapters.
Description of the Test:
1. The analyzer’s output power level is set to 0 dBm.
2. A power sensor is connected to Port 1.
3. The output power is measured at hundreds of CW frequencies across the analyzer’s
frequency range and the values compared to the setting of 0 dBm.
If the Analyzer Fails this Test:
• Perform the “Source Adjustment” on page 3-39 and repeat this test.
• If the analyzer still fails this test, troubleshoot the source section of the analyzer and
then repeat this test. Refer to “Checking the Source Group” on page 4-29.

Performance Tests N5241A/42A
Source Maximum Power Output Test

Function of the Test: To confirm the maximum source output power of your network
analyzer over its full frequency range.
Specification Tested: Test Port Output–Maximum Leveled Power
Equipment Used: A power meter, power sensors, and adapters.
1. A power sensor is connected to Port 1.
2. The analyzer’s output is set to hundreds of CW frequencies and, at each frequency, the
output power is increased until an “UNLEVELED” error is detected.
3. The power level at this point is measured and compared to the maximum output power
specification.
• Go to “Checking the Signal through the Signal Separation Path” on page 4-34 for
troubleshooting information to determine the faulty assembly.
Source Power Linearity Test

Function of the Test: To verify that the power level is linear over the analyzer’s
frequency range and to check the linearity of the automatic leveling control (ALC).
Specification Tested: Power Sweep Range and Power Level Linearity
Equipment Used: A test cable. (And a 20 dB attenuator if the analyzer does not have an
internal step attenuator.)
1. The Port 2 receiver is used to test Port 1. The receiver linearity is the standard against
which the source linearity is checked.
2. A test cable is connected between Port 1 and Port 2 with 20 dB of attenuation in series
with the cable. This can be done with an internal step attenuator or an external 20 dB
attenuator. This attenuation ensures that the receiver remains in its linear range.
3. The analyzer is set to 25 different points across its frequency range.
4. At each frequency point, the output power level on Port 2 is set to 0.000 dBm and the
power is measured to establish a reference, Preference.
5. The source setting is then stepped from −15 to +10 dBm in 1 dB steps and the power is
measured, Pmeasured, at each setting.
6. The non-linearity in dB at each frequency point is calculated as:
(Pmeasured −Preference) −(source setting)
• Perform the “Source Adjustment” on page 3-39 and repeat this test.
• If the analyzer still fails this test, replace the A21 HMA26.5 and then repeat this test.
Refer to “Removing and Replacing the A21 HMA26.5” on page 7-30.

Frequency Accuracy Test

Function of the Test: To verify the frequency accuracy and range of the analyzer’s source
output.
Specification Tested: Test Port Output–CW Accuracy
Equipment Used: A frequency counter, a test cable, and adapters.
1. Port 1 is connected to a frequency counter.
2. A series of frequencies across the band are checked.
• Verify the accuracy of the 10 MHz OCXO by using a frequency counter to measure the
rear-panel 10 MHz REF OUT. If the 10 MHz reference is off by more than 10 Hz,
perform the “10 MHz Frequency Reference Adjustment” on page 3-37 and then repeat
this test.
Trace Noise Test

Function of the Test: To measure the stability of a signal in the internal source and
receiver system of your analyzer.
Specification Tested: Test Port Input–Trace Noise Magnitude and Trace Noise Phase
Equipment Used: A test cable.
1. Port 1 and Port 2 are connected with a test cable.
2. The analyzer is set to a series of CW frequencies across its frequency range.
3. Magnitude and phase are measured at each frequency at both 1 kHz and 10 kHz IF
bandwidths, in both directions.
4. Measurements are made at a nominal power level of 0 dBm and 201 points per sweep.
• Repeat this test. It is unlikely for the analyzer to fail this test without a complete
failure of the network analyzer system.
• If the analyzer still fails this test, replace the A12 SPAM board and then repeat this
test. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the A4–A13 Boards” on page 7-14.

Receiver Compression Test

Function of the Test: To measure the compression at the analyzer’s specified maximum
power level for the receivers.
Specification Tested: Test Port Input–Maximum Test Port Input Level
Equipment Used: The compression test set (Z5623A Option K01), a power meter, power
sensors, two test cables, and a calibration kit. (And 10-dB and 20-dB pads if the analyzer
does not have an internal step attenuator.)

1. All measurements are made with a 1 kHz IF bandwidth and 201 points per sweep.
2. The measurements are made separately on each port.
3. The analyzer is set to various CW frequencies across the range of the analyzer.
4. A power sensor is connected to the “signal source point” to be used to test the port. The
“signal source point” may be either the port connector itself, when a short is used, or
the end of the test cable, when the compression test set is used to source the test signal.
5. The analyzer source output level is adjusted to create the maximum power level
specified for the receiver.
6. The power sensor is disconnected and the “signal source point” is connected to the port
to be tested.
7. The absolute log magnitude value (dBm) for the reference channel is read.
8. The log magnitude ratioed measurement using the receiver under test is read: (Pa).
9. The source output level is adjusted to decrease the output by 15 dB.
10. The log magnitude ratioed measurement using the receiver under test is read: (Pb).
11. Attenuation of 20 dB is introduced between the source and receiver. This can be done
with an internal step attenuator, an external 10 dB pad (if a short is being used to
reflect the signal back into the port), or an external 20 dB pad (if the signal source is
the compression test set).
12. The log magnitude ratioed measurement using the receiver under test is read: (Pc).
13. The source output level is adjusted to produce a reading of Pref (within ±0.03 dBm) for
the reference channel on the source port.
14. The log magnitude ratioed measurement using the receiver under test is read: (Pd).
15. The compression in dB = (Pa−Pb)−(Pd−Pc).

• Repeat this test. There are no adjustments that can be made.
• If the analyzer still fails this test, replace the A23 mixer brick for a Port 1 or Port 2
failure or the A24 mixer brick for a Port 3 or Port 4 failure, then repeat this test. Refer
to “Removing and Replacing the A23 and A24 Mixer Bricks” on page 7-34.

Noise Floor Test

Function of the Test: To measure the absolute power level of the noise floor for the
analyzer’s receivers.
Specification Tested: Test Port Input–Test Port Noise Floor
Equipment Used: A power meter, power sensor, a calibration kit, and a test cable.
1. The analyzer is set to various CW frequencies across its frequency range at an IF
bandwidth of 1 kHz and 801 points per sweep.
2. A test cable is connected to the driving port for the measurement and a power sensor is
connected to the other end of the cable.
3. The power level at the end of the cable is set to −5.00 dBm.
4. The power sensor is disconnected and the cable is connected to the port to be tested.
5. The absolute power level in dBm (log magnitude) is read: (Plog).
6. The test cable is removed and loads are connected to both ports.
7. The analyzer’s trace is set to represent the absolute power level (linear magnitude) for
the receiver under test and a sweep is taken.
8. The mean of the points on the trace, in watts, is read: (Plin).
9. Average power in dBm is calculated: PdBm=10∗Log10(Plin∗1000).
10. Corrected noise floor in dBm for a 10 Hz IF bandwidth = PdBm−19.96 dB−(5.00-Plog).
• If the analyzer fails this test, replace the A23 mixer brick for a Port 1 or Port 2 failure or
the A24 mixer brick for a Port 3 or Port 4 failure, then repeat this test. Refer to
“Removing and Replacing the A23 and A24 Mixer Bricks” on page 7-34.
• If the analyzer still fails this test, replace the A12 SPAM board and then repeat this
test. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the A4–A13 Boards” on page 7-14.

Calibration Coefficients Test

Function of the Test: To verify the uncorrected calibration coefficients of your analyzer.
The calibration coefficients are measured in forward and reverse direction. Refer to
Appendix 8, “General Purpose Maintenance Procedures” for error term information
relating to the calibration coefficients measured.
Specification Tested: Uncorrected System Performance
Equipment Used: A calibration kit and a test cable.
1. A series of 2-port calibrations are performed. Two full SOLT 2-port calibrations are
performed on each port. Isolation is turned off during each 2-port calibration.
2. A test cable is attached to the first port, and a calibration is performed at the end of the
cable and at the second port. The cable is moved to the second port and another
calibration is performed. Using two calibrations helps to eliminate the unknown
characteristics of the through cable.
3. Each calibration produces 12 error terms.
4. The error terms are used to determine the following characteristics: directivity, source
match, load match, reflection tracking, and transmission tracking.
• If the analyzer fails tracking error terms only, perform “Receiver Adjustment” on
page 3-40 and repeat this test.
• Failure of any other error terms indicate a hardware failure. Refer to the appropriate
error term discussion in Chapter 8, “General Purpose Maintenance Procedures,’ for a
typical cause of failure. Refer to Chapter 7, “Repair and Replacement Procedures,’ for
instructions on replacing the suspected faulty component or assembly.

Dynamic Accuracy Test

Function of the Test: To measure the relative power linearity of the analyzer’s receivers.
Specification Tested: Test Port Input–Dynamic Accuracy
Equipment Used: The dynamic accuracy test set (Z5623A Option H01), a power meter
(E4418B or E4419B), power sensors, and two test cables.
1. The analyzer’s test ports are tested separately at a specific CW frequency and a
reference power level of −20 dBm.
2. The analyzer’s driving port is connected to the dynamic accuracy test set’s source port
and the analyzer’s receiving port is connected to the dynamic accuracy test set’s
receiver port. A power sensor is connected to the dynamic accuracy test set’s power
meter port.
3. The dynamic accuracy test set is used to input a signal from the driving port on the
analyzer. The input signal is routed through step attenuators to both the analyzer and
a power sensor.
4. The analyzer source and the dynamic accuracy test set create power levels that are
“deltas” from the reference power level of −20 dBm. Each delta is measured two ways:
by the power sensor and by the analyzer’s receiver under test.
5. The analyzer’s power level into the port under test is set to the −20 dBm reference level.
6. The power level is measured with the power sensor: (Pmr).
7. The power level is measured using the analyzer’s receiver under test: (Ppr).
8. The power level into the analyzer’s port under test is stepped, in 5 dB steps, over the
range of 0 to −120 dBm. Each power level represents a “delta” from the reference power
level.
9. At each step, the power level is measured using the power meter: (Pmd).
10. At each step, the power level is measured using the receiver under test: (Ppd).
11. The power error in dB = (Pmr−Pmd)−(Ppr−Ppd).
• If the analyzer fails this test, replace the A23 mixer brick for a Port 1 or Port 2 failure or
the A24 mixer brick for a Port 3 or Port 4 failure, then repeat this test. Refer to
• If the analyzer still fails this test, replace the A12 SPAM board and repeat this test.
Refer to “Removing and Replacing the A4–A13 Boards” on page 7-14.

Adjustments N5241A/42A
Adjustments
These adjustments are firmware-driven tests that are used to fine-tune your analyzer.
If multiple adjustments are to be performed, perform them in the order listed.
• “10 MHz Frequency Reference Adjustment” on page 3-37
• “IF Gain Adjustment” on page 3-38
• “Synthesizer Bandwidth Adjustment” on page 3-38
• “Source Adjustment” on page 3-39
• “Receiver Adjustment” on page 3-40
• “Receiver Characterization” on page 3-43
• “EE Default Adjustment” on page 3-43
• “Noise Figure Adjustment (Available Only with Option 029 Installed)” on page 3-44
These adjustments are described on the following pages.

N5241A/42A Adjustments
10 MHz Frequency Reference Adjustment

The 10 MHz frequency adjustment is used to adjust the frequency accuracy of the network
analyzer’s 10 MHz frequency reference on the A10 frequency reference board assembly.
Equipment Used for the 10 MHz Frequency Reference Adjustment
Equipment Type Model or Part Number Alternate Model or Part Number
Cable, BNC, 50Ω, 24 inch 8120-1839 Any
Frequency counter 53151A, Option 001 Any that will measure a signal at 10 MHz.
Procedure
NOTE This adjustment typically adjusts to within ±0.01 ppm.
1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 3-13. Connect a GPIB cable between the
network analyzer and the frequency counter.
Figure 3-13 Equipment Setup for the 10 MHz Frequency Reference Adjustment
2. Press UTILITY System , then Service , then Adjustments , then click

10 MHz Freq Adjustment.
3. Ensure the GPIB settings are correct.
4. Follow the instructions and prompts as they are displayed.

IF Gain Adjustment
The IF gain adjustment is used to adjust the IF gain of the network analyzer.
Procedure
1. Press UTILITY System , then Service , then Adjustments , then click IF Gain
Adjustment.
Synthesizer Bandwidth Adjustment

This adjusts the bandwidth of the 13.5 GHz synthesizers.
Procedure
1. Press UTILITY System , then Service , then Adjustments , then click Synthesizer
Bandwidth Adj.

Source Adjustment
The source calibration is used to adjust your network analyzer for a flat source power
across its full frequency range. There are differences between each test port; therefore, an
adjustment is required for each port.
Equipment Used for the Source Adjustment
Model or Alternate Model or

Equipment Type
Part Number Part Number
Power meter E4418B/E4419B E4418A/E4419A
Power sensor, 3.5 mm E4413A 8485A
Adapter, 3.5 mm (f) to 3.5 mm (f) 83059B 85052-60012
Procedure
network analyzer and the power meter.
Figure 3-14 Equipment Setup for the Source Adjustment
2. .Press UTILITY System , then Service , then Adjustments , then click Source
Adjustment.

Receiver Adjustment
The receiver calibration is used to adjust the network analyzer receivers for a flat response
across its full frequency range:
1. A power meter/sensor is connected to Port 1, as shown in Figure 3-15, to establish a
reference for flatness.
2. A cable is inserted between the power sensor and the test port, as shown in Figure 3-16,
to establish a reference for the cable.
3. The same cable is connected between test port 1 and test port 2, as shown in
Figure 3-17, and a signal from Port 1 is used to adjust the “B” receiver at Port 2.
The adjustment is repeated using a signal from Port 2 to adjust the “A” receiver at
Port 1.
Data obtained during this adjustment are stored in the mxcalfile_pxx files on the hard disk
drive. The data are used in subsequent measurements.
If the hard disk drive is replaced, these mxcalfile_pxx files will be lost. Therefore, they
should be backed up (saved on a floppy disk) so that they can be restored. If using multiple
disk drives (e.g. classified and general usage), then these files must be replaced on each
individual disk drive.
These files can be recreated by performing another receiver calibration adjustment.
Equipment Used for the Receiver Adjustment

Equipment Type
Power sensor, 3.5 mm E4413A 8485A

RF Cable, 3.5 mm (f) to 3.5 mm (f) 85131C 85131E
Procedure
network analyzer and the power meter.

Figure 3-15 Equipment Setup 1 for the Receiver Adjustment
2. Press UTILITY System , then Service , then Adjustments , then click Receiver
Adjustment.


Receiver Characterization
This characterizes the receivers in your analyzer.
Procedure
1. Press UTILITY System , then Service , then Adjustments , then click Receiver
Characterization.
EE Default Adjustment
This sets the EEPROM data to their default values.
Procedure
1. Press UTILITY System , then Service , then Adjustments , then click EE Default
Adjustment.

Noise Figure Adjustment (Available Only with Option 029 Installed)

The noise figure adjustment should be performed after replacing any component in the
noise figure circuitry, or if the PNA fails the noise IF gain portion of the Op check. The
noise figure adjustment consists of the following three sections:
• Noise Compression Adjustment: sets the warning level for overpower conditions at the
noise receiver.
• IF Gain Cal Adjustment: sets IF Gain flatness for the noise receiver.
• Noise Correction Adjustment: overwrites the factory noise receiver calibration.
Equipment Used for the Noise Figure Adjustment
Model or
Equipment Type
Part Number
Noise source 346A/B/C
Adapter, 3.5 mm, -f- to -f- 83059B
RF Cable, 3.5 mm -f- to -f- 85131C
ECal module, 3.5 mm, -m- to -f- N4691B-M0F
Procedure
1. Press UTILITY System , then Service , then Adjustments , then click Noise
Adjustment.
2. On the PNA Noise Adjustment dialog box (see Figure 3-18), leave all three adjustments
selected in the “Select Adjustments” box. Verify the directory path displayed in the
“Select ENR Data File” box contains the ENR file for the noise source you are using. If
not the correct ENR file, click Browse to navigate to the correct file. If the proper file
does not already exist, click Create New to enter data for the noise source you are
using. The PNA will automatically remember and use the last file selected. These files
should normally reside in the C:\Program Files\Agilent\Network Analyzer\Noise
directory, but can also exist elsewhere.

Figure 3-18 PNA Noise Adjustment Dialog Box
3. Click Begin.
4. As shown in Figure 3-19, connect an RF cable between the network analyzer test ports
1 and 2.
5. When prompted, connect the noise source to port 2, either directly or with a short,
low-loss adapter. See Figure 3-20

1. When prompted, reconnect an RF cable between the network analyzer test ports 1 and
2.
2. When prompted, disconnect the cable at port 2 and insert the ECal module between
port 2 and the free end of the cable. Connect the ECal module directly to port 2 without
using any adapters if possible. See Figure 3-21
The entire procedure takes about 15 to 30 minutes.

4 Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers

The information in this chapter helps you:
• Identify the portion of the analyzer at fault.
• Locate the specific troubleshooting procedure to identify the assembly or peripheral at
fault.
The sections in this chapter are arranged in a logical troubleshooting order. The following
table lists the sections and a brief summary of what to look for in that section.
Chapter Four at-a-Glance
‘Getting Started with

A starting point for troubleshooting. Page 4-4
Troubleshooting’
Power-up problems:
• Power supply problems
‘Power Up Troubleshooting’ Page 4-6
• LCD problems
• Bootup for the network analyzer interface
Problems occurring after the network

analyzer interface is loaded:
• Does the display color appear correct?
‘Front Panel Troubleshooting’ • Do the front panel keys function Page 4-13
properly?
• Does the front panel USB connector
function properly?
Problems associated with the rear panel

interconnects.
‘Rear Panel Troubleshooting’ The data found at these rear panel Page 4-17
interconnects can be used to troubleshoot the
CPU board.
Problems with the measurement portion of

the analyzer.
‘Measurement System • Checking the A, B, R1, and R2 signals.
Page 4-23
Troubleshooting’ • Checking the source group.
• Checking the signal separation group.
• Checking the receiver group.
Block diagrams for the analyzer including all

Instrument Block Diagrams Page 4-41
options.

PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers Troubleshooting
N5241A/42A Operating the Analyzer With Covers Removed


Hardkey
on the instrument.
Operating the Analyzer With Covers Removed

costly damage.
Protect Against Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)

CAUTION To reduce the chance of electrostatic discharge, follow all of the

page 1-6, for all of the procedures in this chapter.
Assembly Replacement Sequence

After identifying the problem requiring an assembly to be replaced, follow these steps:
Step 1. Order a replacement assembly. Refer to Chapter 6, “Replaceable Parts.”
Step 2. Replace the faulty assembly and determine what adjustments are necessary.
Refer to Chapter 7, “Repair and Replacement Procedures.”
Step 3. Perform the necessary adjustments. Refer to Chapter 3, “Tests and Adjustments.”
Step 4. Perform the necessary performance tests. Refer to Chapter 3, “Tests and
Adjustments.”

Getting Started with Troubleshooting N5241A/42A
Getting Started with Troubleshooting

Where you begin troubleshooting depends upon the symptoms of the failure. Start by
checking the basics as outlined in the following section. Also review the flowchart in Figure
4-1 on page 4-5. You should then be able to determine where in the troubleshooting
procedure to begin, to locate the failed assembly.
Check the Basics

A problem can often be solved by repeating the procedure you were following when the
problem occurred. Before calling Agilent Technologies or returning the instrument for
service, please perform the following checks:
1. Is there power at the mains receptacle? If not, correct this situation and proceed.
2. Is the instrument turned on? Check to see if the front panel line switch glows. This
indicates the power supply is on. If the front panel line switch is on but the power
supply does not appear to be on, go to “Power Up Troubleshooting” on page 4-6.
3. Is the Windows® operating system running? If not, refer to “Operating System
Recovery” in Chapter 8 for instructions.
4. If other equipment, cables, and connectors are being used with the instrument, make
sure they are clean, connected properly and operating correctly.
5. Review the procedure for the measurement being performed when the problem
appeared. Are all the settings correct? If not, correct them.
If the instrument is not functioning as expected, return the unit to a known state by
pressing the UTILITY Preset key.
6. Is the measurement being performed, and the results that are expected, within the
specifications and capabilities of the instrument? Refer to the embedded help in the
analyzer for instrument specifications.
7. If the problem is thought to be due to firmware, check to see if the instrument has the
latest firmware before starting the troubleshooting procedure. Refer to “Firmware
Upgrades” in Chapter 8 for instructions.
8. If the necessary test equipment is available, perform the operator’s check and system
verification in Chapter 3, “Tests and Adjustments.”
Windows® is a U.S. registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

N5241A/42A Getting Started with Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Organization
Follow the flowgraph in Figure 4-1 to help direct you to the correct section for
troubleshooting the analyzer.
Figure 4-1 Troubleshooting Organization Flowchart
Go to “Power Up Troubleshooting”
on page 4-6.
Go to “Front Panel Troubleshooting”

on page 4-13.
Go to “Rear Panel Troubleshooting”

on page 4-17.
Go to “Measurement System
Troubleshooting” on page 4-23.

Power Up Troubleshooting N5241A/42A
Power Up Troubleshooting
WARNING Immediately unplug the instrument from the ac power line if the
unit shows any of the following symptoms:
• Smoke, arcing, or unusual noise from inside the analyzer.
• A circuit breaker or fuse on the main ac power line opens.
Check your network analyzer for evidence that it is powering up correctly. Perform the
following steps and make sure that the analyzer is displaying correct behavior as noted in
the following steps.
Step 1. Disconnect all peripherals and plug in the network analyzer. Before the analyzer
is powered on, the line switch should glow yellow and no other lights should be
on.
Step 2. Turn on the network analyzer.
• The line switch should glow green.
• The fans should be audible.
• The display should flash and then show the hardware boot-up sequence. This
process checks the RAM and communication with the hard disk drive. These
checks return an error message if a problem is detected.
• The Windows operating system should start.
• The network analyzer measurement interface should open with an S11
measurement displayed.
Step 3. If the analyzer powers up correctly, continue troubleshooting with “Front Panel
Step 4. If the analyzer does not power up correctly, follow these troubleshooting steps:
• If the line switch does not glow, go to “Power Supply Check” on page 4-7.
• If you cannot hear the fans operating, go to “If the Fans Are Not Operating” on
page 4-11.
• If the line switch glows green and the fans are operating (audible), but the
display remains dark, go to “Troubleshooting LCD Display Problems” on
page 4-12.
• If the instrument appears to abort the network analyzer measurement
interface process, contact Agilent. Refer to “Contacting Agilent” on page 2-13.

N5241A/42A Power Up Troubleshooting
Power Supply Check

NOTE There are no fuses to replace within the power supply. If you determine that
the power supply is the failed assembly, replace the power supply.
A catastrophic failure in the power supply can be determined by observing the line switch
and the power supply LED indicators:
1. Ensure that the instrument is plugged in with the power switch in the standby position
(power not switched on). Verify that the line switch glows yellow. A line switch that
glows yellow indicates that the power supply is providing enough voltage to light the
LED. (However, the voltage may not actually be the correct voltage.)
2. Turn on the instrument power and verify that the line switch glows green. When the
line switch glows green, it is an indication that the power supply has received an “ON”
command and that the power supply can provide enough current to light, at least, this
LED.
3. You can determine which power supplies are functioning by viewing the LED indicators
on the A15 midplane board. Refer to Figure 4-2.
To view the LED indicators, it is necessary to remove the instrument’s outer and inner
covers. Refer to “Removing the Covers” on page 7-6 for removal procedures. To
determine the location of the A15 midplane board, refer to “Top Assemblies, All
Options” on page 6-14.
costly damage.
4. If any power supply voltage is missing, it is likely that the problem is a defective A16
power supply, the A15 midplane board, or another assembly that is loading down the
A16 power supply. Continue with “If Any Supply Voltage Is Missing” on page 4-9 to
determine the cause of the problem.
5. If the line switch is lit correctly, and all the power supply voltages appear to be present,
as indicated by the LEDs as shown in Figure 4-2, the power supply has not suffered a
catastrophic failure. However, the power supply could still be at fault. Continue at
“Measure the Individual Supply Voltages” to verify that the actual supply voltages are
correct.
Measure the Individual Supply Voltages

Measure the power supply voltages using a digital multi-meter. Use the point labeled
ACOM as ground reference for analog supplies and the point marked DCOM as ground
reference for digital supplies.
Refer to Figure 4-2 for the power supply measurement points on the A15 midplane board.
Refer to Table 4-1 on page 4-9 for the correct voltages.

Figure 4-2 A15 Midplane Board Power Supply LED Indicators and Measurement Points
WARNING The instrument contains potentially hazardous voltages. Refer to the

safety symbols provided on the instrument and in “General Safety
Considerations” on page 1-3 before operating the unit with the cover
removed. Make sure that the safety instructions are strictly followed.
Failure to do so can result in personal injury or loss of life.
costly damage.
NOTE If any one individual voltage supply from the A16 power supply develops an
over-voltage or over-current problem, all supplies are affected. The cause of
the over-voltage or over-current condition can be the A16 power supply itself,
or any assembly to which the A16 power supply provides voltage. To isolate
the cause, continue to the assembly removal process as described in the
section titled “If Any Supply Voltage Is Missing” on page 4-9.

Table 4-1 Power Supply Measurement Points
Expected Expected
Test Point Supply Name Test Point Supply Name
Level (Vdc) Level (Vdc)
TP517 Analog Ground 0V TP516 -5.2 V analog -5.2 ±0.1

TP509 +15 V analog +15.0 ±0.1 TP514 -7 V analog -7.0 ±0.1
TP511 +9 V analog +9.0 ±0.1 TP500 Digital Ground 0V
TP515 +3.3 V analog +3.3 ±0.1 TP502 +5.1 V standby +5.1 ±0.1
TP513 +5.2 V analog +5.2 ±0.1 TP503 +12 V digital +12.0 ±0.1
TP501 +15 V standby +15.0 ±0.1 TP507 +3.35 V digital +3.35 ±0.1
TP504 +32 V analog +32.0 ±0.1 TP505 +5.1 V digital +5.1 ±0.1
TP512 -15 V analog -15.0 ±0.1 TP519 Digital Ground 0V
If All Supply Voltages are Present

If all of the supplies have measured within tolerances, and the instrument still is not
functioning properly, refer to “Front Panel Troubleshooting” on page 4-13.
If Any Supply Voltage Is Missing

WARNING Disconnect the line-power cord before removing any assembly.
Procedures described in this document may be performed with
injury or loss of life.
You must sequentially remove all of the assemblies, taking care to disconnect the line
power cord before each removal, and then measure the supply voltages after each removal.
If the missing supply voltages return to a “power on” condition after removal of an
assembly, suspect that assembly as being defective.
Remove the network analyzer assemblies in the order specified in the following steps (refer
to Chapter 7 for removal instructions).
1. Unplug the A19 test set motherboard ribbon cable from the A19 test set motherboard
(refer to “Removing and Replacing the A19 Test Set Motherboard” on page 7-26).
1. Unplug the A19 test set motherboard to A20 IF multiplexer board ribbon cable from
the A20 IF multiplexer board (refer to “Removing and Replacing the A20 IF
Multiplexer Board” on page 7-28).
2. Unplug the front panel interface cable from the A1 front panel interface board (refer to
“Removing the A1 Front Panel Interface Board and Keypad Assembly” on page 7-10).
3. Remove the A12 SPAM board (refer to “Removing and Replacing the A4–A13 Boards”
on page 7-14).
4. Remove the A8 source board (refer to “Removing and Replacing the A4–A13 Boards” on
page 7-14).

5. Remove the A5 source board, if present (refer to “Removing and Replacing the A4–A13
Boards” on page 7-14).
6. Remove the A11 13.5 GHz synthesizer board (refer to “Removing and Replacing the
A4–A13 Boards” on page 7-14).
7. Remove the A13 13.5 GHz synthesizer board (refer to “Removing and Replacing the
8. Remove the A4 13.5 GHz synthesizer board, if present (refer to “Removing and
Replacing the A4–A13 Boards” on page 7-14)
9. Remove the A10 frequency reference board (refer to “Removing and Replacing the
10. Remove the A18 GPIB board (refer to “Removing and Replacing the A18 GPIB Board”
on page 7-24). Reinstall the A16 power supply assembly and the A17 CPU board
assembly.
11.Unplug the A51 hard disk drive from the A17 CPU board (refer to “Removing and
Replacing the A51 Hard Disk Drive (HDDA)” on page 7-48).
The minimum required assemblies to power up the analyzer are:
• A16 power supply
• A15 midplane board
• A14 system motherboard
• A17 CPU board
To further isolate the failure in the three remaining assemblies, measure the resistance
(with the power turned off) from the power supply test points to either ACOM or DCOM.
NOTE Make sure that the only assemblies plugged in are the four minimum
required assemblies listed above.
Check for shorts (zero Ω) or very low resistance (approximately 1 Ω). If a short or low
resistance is measured, isolate each of the remaining four boards in the following order,
and recheck the shorted test point after each board is removed. You should be able to
determine if the shorted condition has changed.
Isolate the remaining three assemblies:
• remove the A17 CPU board
• remove the A16 power supply
• remove the A15 midplane board
• This leaves only the A14 system motherboard installed. If the resistance measurements
are still incorrect, this is the suspected faulty assembly.

If the Fans Are Not Operating

CAUTION The power supply may be in thermal shutdown if the instrument has been
operating without the fans running. Allow the instrument to cool down before
troubleshooting.
If all three fans are not operating, suspect a power supply problem or a defective
A14 system motherboard. Refer to “Power Supply Check” on page 4-7 to check the
individual supplies. If the supplies are within specifications, the most probable cause is a
defective A14 system motherboard. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the A14 System
Motherboard” on page 7-16.
If only one or two fans are not functioning, and the power supplies are within
specifications, suspect the A14 system motherboard or defective fan(s). Perform the
following procedure.
1. Remove the fan bracket, with fans attached, from the analyzer to expose the fan power
cable connections on the A14 system motherboard. Refer to Figure 4-3 for location of
these connections. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the Fans” on page 7-62.
2. Plug in the power cord and measure the fan voltages at all three connectors on the A14
system motherboard. THIS MUST BE DONE QUICKLY AS THE ANALYZER WILL
RAPIDLY OVERHEAT WITHOUT THE COOLING EFFECT OF THE FANS. DO NOT
PLUG IN THE POWER CORD UNTIL READY TO PERFORM MEASUREMENTS.
Figure 4-3 Fan Power Cable Connections

3. If the correct voltage is present at each connection and the fan connectors are in good
mechanical condition, suspect a defective fan. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the
Fans” on page 7-62.
If the correct voltage is not present, suspect a defective A14 system motherboard. Refer
to “Removing and Replacing the A14 System Motherboard” on page 7-16.
Troubleshooting LCD Display Problems

This procedure is intended to isolate the faulty assembly when the display is dark. If the
display is lit, but the color mix is faulty, refer to “A3 Display Test” on page 4-15.
NOTE There are no front panel adjustments for intensity and contrast of the LCD.
1. If the display is dim, the A3 display assembly is defective. Refer to “Removing and
Replacing the A1–A3 and Other Front Panel Subassemblies” on page 7-10.
If the display is dark (not visible), connect an external VGA monitor to the rear panel
Monitor output connector. (Be aware that some multisync monitors might not be able to
lock to a 60 Hz sync pulse.) If the video information is not present on the external VGA
monitor, the most probable cause is the A17 CPU board. Refer to “Removing and
Replacing the A17 CPU Board Assembly” on page 7-22.
2. If the external VGA monitor displays the correct information, verify that the front panel
interface ribbon cable is properly plugged into the motherboard connector. Refer to
“Removing and Replacing the Front Panel Assembly” on page 7-8.
3. If the front panel interface ribbon cable is properly connected, suspect that one or more
of the following is defective:
• inverter board (mounted on the display assembly)
• A1 front panel interface board
• A3 display assembly

N5241A/42A Front Panel Troubleshooting
Front Panel Troubleshooting

The front panel assembly consists of the A1 front panel interface board, the keypad, the
A2 USB board, and the A3 display assembly. The following tests verify the operation of the
front panel assembly when the analyzer is in the measurement mode. If the instrument
fails to power up correctly, or it is difficult to verify due to a faulty display, refer to “Power
Up Troubleshooting” on page 4-6.
Refer to the following sections to verify the operation of the noted assemblies.
• “Front Panel Keypad and RPG Test” on this page
• “A3 Display Test” on page 4-15
• “Checking the A2 USB Board” on page 4-16
• “A1 Front Panel Interface Board” on page 4-16
If all assemblies are working correctly, continue troubleshooting with “Rear Panel
Front Panel Keypad and RPG Test

Test the front panel keypad by running the front panel test. To run the front panel test,
perform the following:
Press UTILITY System , then Service , then More , then Front Panel Test .
A Front Panel Key Test Utility dialog box will be displayed, as shown in Figure 4-4.
Figure 4-4 Front Panel Key Test Utility Dialog Box

Front Panel Troubleshooting N5241A/42A
Checking the Front Panel Keys

To check the front panel keys, push each key and compare the name in the Key Label box
to the name physically labeled on the key cap. These names are also in Table 4-2 below.
• If all the key names are correct, then the front panel keypad is working. If some of the
keys are not working, suspect a faulty keypad. To replace the keypad, refer to
“Removing the A1 Front Panel Interface Board and Keypad Assembly” on page 7-10.
• If none of the keys are working correctly, suspect a faulty A1 front panel interface
board. To replace the A1 front panel interface board, refer to “Removing the A1 Front
Panel Interface Board and Keypad Assembly” on page 7-10.
Table 4-2 Front Panel Keyboard Key Names
TRACE/CHAN RESPONSE ENTRY ENTRY
Keys Keys Keys Keys (Cont’d)
Trace 1 Meas OK k/m
Enter
Trace 2 Format Cancel
Off
Trace 3 Scale Help . (decimal point)
Trace 4 Display Bk Sp +/-
STIMULUS
Traces Avg 0
Keys
Channel Cal 1 Freq
Navigation MARKER/
2 Power
Keys ANALYSIS Keys
← Marker 3 Sweep
→ Search 4 Trigger
UTILITY
↑ Memory 5
Keys
↓ Analysis 6 Save
Click 7 Print
8 Macro
9 Recall
G/n System
M/u Preset

N5241A/42A Front Panel Troubleshooting
Checking the RPG (Front Panel Knob)

To check the RPG knob:
1. Press the UTILITY Preset key.
2. Rotate the knob and check for a fluid movement of numbers on the analyzer display.
3. If the movement of numbers is not smooth or no numbers appear at all, suspect a faulty
A1 front panel interface board. To replace the A1 front panel interface board, refer to
“Removing the A1 Front Panel Interface Board and Keypad Assembly” on page 7-10.
A3 Display Test
The display should be bright with all annotations and text readable. The display test
allows you to check for non-functioning pixels and other problems.
NOTE If the display is dim or dark, refer to “Troubleshooting LCD Display
Problems” on page 4-12.
What Is a Damaged Pixel?

A pixel is a picture element that combines to create the image on the display. A pixel is
about the size of a small pin point.
A damaged pixel is:
• A pixel that has a constant blue, green, or red appearance that will not change, or
• a pixel that has a constant black appearance that will not change.
How to Run the Display Test

To run the display test, perform the following:
Press UTILITY System , then Service , then More , then Display Test .
A multi-color screen is displayed. Be prepared to look for the symptoms described in “How
to Identify a Faulty Display.” Follow the instructions on the screen.
How to Identify a Faulty Display

A display is considered faulty if:
• More than 0.002% of the total pixels have a constant blue, green, red, or black
appearance that will not change.
• Three or more consecutive pixels have a constant blue, green, red, or black appearance
that will not change.
If the A3 display assembly is determined to be faulty, replace it. Refer to “Removing the
A3 Display Assembly and the Touchscreen” on page 7-12.

Front Panel Troubleshooting N5241A/42A
Checking the A2 USB Board

To verify proper operation of the USB board:
• Connect a known good USB device, such as a USB mouse, to a front panel USB port.
• Wait 15 seconds for the analyzer to verify the device connection, and then check the
operation of the USB device.
• If the device performs correctly, the USB board is functioning properly.
• If the device does not perform correctly, the USB board is faulty. Refer to “Removing the
A2 USB Board” on page 7-10.
A1 Front Panel Interface Board

This assembly performs the following functions:
• It routes USB signals between the front-panel USB connector and the A17 CPU board.
• The speaker produces the audio output from signals supplied by the A17 CPU board.
• It routes key pad commands from the keypad to the A17 CPU board.
• It routes display signals from the A17 CPU board to the A3 display assembly.
Checking the Speaker

If no audio is heard:
• Verify that the volume is set correctly and the proper sound driver is loaded; do the
following:
— Press UTILITY System , then Configure , then Control Panel... .
— Click on the Sounds and Audio Devices entry. Follow the normal Windows procedure
to check the sound drivers and volume. If the audio is still not heard, suspect a faulty
speaker. Refer to “Removing the A1 Front Panel Interface Board and Keypad
Assembly” on page 7-10.
Checking the Operation of the Key Pad Commands

To verify the key pad functionality, refer to “Front Panel Keypad and RPG Test” on
page 4-13.
Checking the Display

To verify the display functionality, refer to “A3 Display Test” on page 4-15.

N5241A/42A Rear Panel Troubleshooting
Rear Panel Troubleshooting

Each rear panel connector is associated with a hardware group in the analyzer. You can
use the data at these rear panel connectors to help troubleshoot these hardware groups in
addition to testing the connectors.
The connectors discussed in this section are:
• USB x 4
• Monitor (VGA)
• GPIB (0) CONTROLLER
• GPIB (1) TALKER/LISTENER
• LAN
Checking the USB Ports

To verify proper operation of any rear panel USB port:
• Connect a known good USB device, such as a USB mouse.
• Wait 15 seconds for the analyzer to verify the device connection, and then check the
operation of the USB device.
• If the device performs correctly, the USB port is functioning properly.
• If the device does not perform correctly, remove the non-working USB device, wait 15
seconds, and then reconnect the device to the rear panel USB port.
• If the USB device still does not work and has been verified to work elsewhere, then the
A17 CPU board is faulty. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the A17 CPU Board
Checking the CONTROLLER Port

The network analyzer uses a National Instruments 488.2 GPIB controller and associated
driver software. This software includes a test utility that scans the GPIB bus and returns
the status of all the connected peripherals.
To run the test utility software and check the GPIB status:
1. Connect a known good peripheral to the analyzer using a known good GPIB cable.
2. Press UTILITY System , then Configure , then SICL/GPIB... . A SICL/GPIB/SCPI dialog

box is displayed.
3. In the GPIB block, click System Controller to establish the analyzer as a controller. Wait
for the analyzer to configure, and then click OK.
4. If the Window Desktop is not displayed, press UTILITY System , then Configure , then
Control Panel... to view the Windows Taskbar menu at the bottom of the display.

Rear Panel Troubleshooting N5241A/42A
5. On the Windows Taskbar menu, click Start then point to Programs, National Instruments
NI-488.2, and then click Explore GPIB to open the Measurement & Automation window.
6. On the left side of the Measurement & Automation window under folders:
a. Click the plus sign to expand the Measurement & Automation folder.
b. Click the plus sign to expand the Devices and Interfaces folder.
c. Right click GPIB0 (AT-GPIB/TNT) to open a submenu.
7. On the submenu, click Scan for Instruments to run the test.
8. The state of all the peripherals found on the bus is returned.
9. If problems are detected, check the connections of all GPIB cables, and check all the
GPIB addresses of the instruments on the bus.
NOTE Address Information
• Each device must have its own unique address.
• The network analyzer’s default GPIB address in the controller mode is 21.
• The address set on each device must match the one recognized by the
analyzer (and displayed).
Refer to the manual of the peripheral to read or change its address.
Troubleshooting Systems with Controllers

Passing the preceding test indicates that the analyzer's peripheral functions are operating
normally. Therefore, if the analyzer has not been operating properly with an external
controller, check the following:
• The GPIB interface hardware is incorrectly installed or not operational. (Refer to the
embedded help in your analyzer.)
• The programming syntax is incorrect. (Refer to the embedded help in your analyzer.)
LAN Troubleshooting
Problems with the Local Area Network (LAN) can be difficult to solve. Software and
protocol problems can make it difficult to determine whether the analyzer's hardware is
working properly, or if there is a problem with the LAN or cabling.
The purpose of this section is to determine if the analyzer's hardware is functioning
properly. While the turn-on self-test verifies some LAN hardware functionality, it is limited
to internal testing only. Incorrect IP addresses will prevent proper operation. Improper
subnet masks may allow only one-way communication, while improper gateway addresses
may exclude outside LAN access.

Ping Command
The analyzer has the built-in capability of performing a “ping” operation. Ping will request
the analyzer to send a few bytes of information to a specific LAN device. That device will
then signal the analyzer that it has received the information. The analyzer computes the
approximate round trip time of the communication cycle and displays it. For a full test of
two-way communications, a ping test should be performed in two directions.
• First: you should ping from the analyzer to the local area network.
• Second: you should ping from the local area network to the analyzer.
NOTE In the second case, any other network device capable of sending a ping
command could be used, assuming it is connected to the same network. This
could be a computer or even another analyzer.
How to Ping from the Analyzer to the Local Area Network (LAN)
Follow the steps below to verify proper LAN operation (assuming you have a functioning
LAN). If no network LAN is available, see “Testing Between Two Analyzers” on page 4-20.
1. Make sure the IP address on the analyzer is set properly and that it is unique. If unsure
how to check the IP address, refer to the embedded help in the analyzer.
2. Make sure the subnet mask is 0.0.0.0. If not, note the current setting (to allow setting
it back later) and then set it to 0.0.0.0.
3. Find and note the IP address of another working LAN device on the same network.
Make sure this device is turned on, connected, and is functioning properly.
4. To ping the network device:
a. If the Windows Desktop is not displayed, press UTILITY System , then Configure ,
then Control Panel... to view the Windows Taskbar menu at the bottom of the display.
b. On the Windows Taskbar menu, click Start, point to Programs, Accessories, and then
click Command Prompt.
c. The command prompt window is displayed.
d. At the prompt, type ping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx1 and press ENTRY Enter on the front
panel. Refer to Step 5 for the results of a successful ping.
5. The analyzer attempts four cycles of communications with the indicated LAN device.
• It displays the time it took to complete each cycle.
• Each cycle times-out after one second if no communication is established and the
message, Request timed out, is displayed.
• It is common for the first of the four cycles to time-out even though subsequent cycles
pass.
• See below for an example output of a successful ping.
1. The letters x represent the IP address of the other device on the network.

C:>ping 141.121.69.162
Pinging 141.121.69.162 with 32 bytes of data:
Reply from 141.121.69.162: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=127

Ping statistics for 141.121.69.162:
Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, lost = 0 <0% loss>.
Approximate round trip times in milli-seconds:
Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0ms
6. The above message verifies that one way communication from the analyzer to the
network has been established
7. If the subnet mask was changed in step 2, set it back at this time.
How to Ping from the Local Area Network (LAN) to the Analyzer
Reverse communication should also be verified. Determining this, though, is dependent
upon your network setup and software. Generally, you need to issue a ping command using
the IP address of the analyzer to be tested. For example, using Windows 95, 98, 2000, or
XP and while at a DOS prompt, type in ping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx1. Then press ENTRY
Enter on the front panel. If full communication can be established, then the computer
display shows the cycle time for each of four cycle attempts (similar to that in step 5).
Other software may behave somewhat differently, but basically the same.
If the analyzer can talk to the network, but the network can not talk to the analyzer, then the
computer or device used from the network may have a subnet mask that excludes
communication with the IP address chosen for the analyzer. Any subnet mask other than
0.0.0.0 will exclude operation from some addresses. Changing the subnet mask of a computer
or other device should only be attempted by a qualified network administrator. Failure to
communicate due to a subnet mask incompatibility does not indicate any failure of the analyzer.
If the analyzer fails to ping in either direction, and assuming the subnet masks are set
properly, then the fault must be isolated to the analyzer or to the network. Contact a
qualified network administrator.
Testing Between Two Analyzers

The ability of the analyzer's LAN to function can be easily tested by connecting two
analyzers together using a “crossover cable” (a short length of cable with an RJ-45
connector on each end).
Some network hubs have the capability to make a crossover connection using two normal,
or straight-through, cables. If this capability is not available and a crossover cable is not
available, a crossover cable can be made by following the directions in “Constructing a
Crossover Cable” on page 4-21.
1. The letters x represent the IP address of the analyzer.

Set the IP addresses on two analyzers. The addresses can be set to anything, but they must
be different. Make sure the subnet mask and gateway addresses are set to 0.0.0.0 and
that the LAN is active on both analyzers. Connect the two analyzers together using either
a crossover cable or a crossover hub.
Now follow the steps in “How to Ping from the Analyzer to the Local Area Network (LAN)”
on page 4-19 to have the first analyzer ping the second analyzer. When done, repeat the
procedure having the second analyzer ping the first. If both procedures function properly,
the LAN circuitry on both analyzers is verified.
If neither function properly:
• One or both IP addresses could be wrong.
• One or both LAN states could be set to off.
• The crossover cable could be miswired.
• One or both analyzers could be defective.
If possible, eliminate the possibility of a defective analyzer by substitution of a known
working unit. Once the analyzer has been proven to be working properly, concentration can
be placed on the network itself to determine the cause of the failure.
Constructing a Crossover Cable

A crossover cable can be made from a standard LAN cable by connecting pin 1 from each
connector to pin 3 of the other connector, and pin 2 from each connector to pin 6 of the
other connector.
1. Strip away a few inches of the outside jacket insulation from the middle of a standard
LAN cable that has an RJ-45 connector on each end.
NOTE Pins 1, 2, 3, and 6 of the connectors must be located to determine which wires
to cut in the following steps. Most, but not all, LAN cables use the color
coding listed in Table 4-3. If your cable does not use this color scheme, you
will have to determine the locations of the appropriate wires before
proceeding with this procedure.

Table 4-3 LAN Pin Definitions and Wire Color Codes
Pin Number Color Pin Number Color
1 (transmit +) White/orange 5 White/blue
2 (transmit −) Orange 6 (receive −) Green

3 (receive +) White/green 7 White/brown
4 Blue 8 Brown
2. Cut the wires going to pins 1, 2, 3, and 6. Strip away a small amount of insulation from
each of the eight cut ends.
a. Connect the wire from pin 1 on one end of the cable to the wire from pin 3 on the
other end of the cable.
b. Connect the wire from pin 3 on one end of the cable to the wire from pin 1 on the
c. Connect the wire from pin 2 on one end of the cable to the wire from pin 6 on the
d. Connect the wire from pin 6 on one end of the cable to the wire from pin 2 on the
3. Insulate all exposed wires so that they cannot short together.
4. Label this as a crossover cable so that it cannot be confused with a standard cable.
Figure 4-5 Construction of a Crossover Cable

N5241A/42A Measurement System Troubleshooting
Measurement System Troubleshooting

This section provides troubleshooting procedures for the measurement portion of the PNA.
In this section, the analyzer is used as a tool to help isolate the suspected faulty functional
group. Once the faulty functional group is determined, troubleshooting steps are provided
to help you isolate the faulty assembly or part.
Before you begin—consider: Where do you see a problem?

If you are seeing a problem at Preset, perform the standard S-parameter test set
troubleshooting procedure, starting with: “Verifying the A, B, C, D, and R Traces (Standard
S-Parameter Mode)” on page 4-25.
You should also consider the problem indications that are observed and whether the
observed condition is a soft failure or a hard failure.
Soft Failure
With a soft failure, the network analyzer's performance has degraded to an unacceptable
level, yet it continues to operate and displays no error messages. For this type of failure,
performance tests must be conducted to isolate the problem. Begin with viewing the error
terms as described in “Error Terms” on page 8-3. This will help to isolate most problems. If
additional tests are required, refer to “Performance Tests” on page 3-29.
Hard Failure
With a hard failure, the PNA does not perform well and displays one or more error
messages. To diagnose and repair a hard failure:
• Check “Help About” to verify that the model number and options listed match the
actual analyzer model and options.
• Check “EEPROM Headers” to verify that the data there is correct.
• Check error messages. Refer to “Error Messages” and follow the suggestions outlined
there for each applicable error message.
Help About
Go to the Help About screen by pressing UTILITY System , then Help , then About NA... .
Verify that the information displayed in this screen is correct for your analyzer. If any of
the information is incorrect, contact Agilent Technologies. Refer to “Contacting Agilent” on
page 2-13.

Measurement System Troubleshooting N5241A/42A
EEPROM Headers
The network analyzer application uses the firmware revision information stored in the pc
board header EEPROM. If the information stored in any EEPROM is incorrect, the
network analyzer may not operate properly.
The following table lists the pc boards in your network analyzer that contain EEPROM
headers. The pc boards are listed by name and part number and the correct firmware
revision code is given for each.
PC Board Part Memory Hardware Firmware

PC Board Name
Number Type ID ID Revision
To view this EEPROM header information on the network analyzer display: press
UTILITY System , then Service , then Utilities , then View EEPROM Headers .
If the information is incorrect for any of the pc boards, contact Agilent Technologies. Refer
to “Contacting Agilent” on page 2-13.
Error Messages
SOURCE UNLEVELED: The source ALC circuit on the A19 test set motherboard is running
open-loop. Check the cable connections for the A21 HMA26.5 and the A19 test set
motherboard.

Verifying the A, B, C, D, and R Traces (Standard S-Parameter Mode)
NOTE There is no way to view the frequency offset receiver response (Option 080).
However, some standard S-parameter receiver trace information is helpful in
troubleshooting the frequency offset section of the PNA. It is therefore
recommended that you run this test even if you suspect only the frequency
offset section of a malfunction.
The first step is to verify that the A, B,C, D, and R traces are present and that they are
approximately level:
• Press UTILITY System , then Service , then Utilities , then Receiver Display .
• For 2-port analyzer models, traces A, B, R1, and R2 are displayed in four separate data
windows as shown in Figure 4-6. Identifying discrepancies of the traces in these
windows can help you to isolate the faulty assembly.
Figure 4-6 Typical 4-Channel Display for 2-Port Models

• For 4-port analyzer models, traces A, B, C, D, and R are displayed in five separate data
windows as shown in Figure 4-7. Identifying discrepancies of the traces in these
windows can help you to isolate the faulty assembly.
Figure 4-7 Typical 5-Channel Display for 4-Port Models
• If all traces are present and are similar to the traces in Figure 4-6 or Figure 4-7, then
there are no major problems with the analyzer’s measurement system. There may,
however, be a minor failure in the analyzer.
To test further:
— Go to Chapter 3, “Tests and Adjustments” and perform all the tests in that section.
— If a problem still exists, contact Agilent. Refer to “Contacting Agilent” on page 2-13.
• If any of the traces are not present, are noisy or distorted, or are at an incorrect level,
then there is a problem with the analyzer’s measurement system. Proceed to “Where to
Begin Troubleshooting.”

Where to Begin Troubleshooting

For the purposes of troubleshooting, the analyzer block diagram is divided into the
following functional groups:
• the source group
— A10 frequency reference
— A4 and A13 (optional on 2-port analyzers) 13.5 GHz source synthesizers
— A5 and A8 (optional on 2-port analyzers) sources
— A11 13.5 GHz LO synthesizer
— A21 HMA26.5
— A22 splitter
— A19 test set motherboard
• the signal separation group
— A46, A47, A48, and A49 source bypass switches (optional)
— A50 combiner (optional)
— A25, A26, A27, and A28 bridges
— A34, A35, A36, and A37 60-dB source step attenuators (optional)
— A38, A39, A40, and A41 60-dB bias tees (optional)
— A29, A30, A31, and A32 test port couplers
• the receiver group
— A33 reference channel mixer switch
— A42, A43, A44, and A45 35-dB receiver step attenuators (optional)
— A23 and A24 mixer bricks
— A12 SPAM board
— A20 IF multiplexer board
• the noise measurement group (Option 029)
— A52 and A53 test port 1 and test port 2 Option 029 switches
— A54 test port 2 Option 029 bridge
— A55 noise downconverter
— A7 noise receiver board
Use the list on the following pages to help you determine in which analyzer functional
group to begin troubleshooting.
This is by no means an exhaustive list of possible symptoms nor possible failures. It is
recommended that you view the system block diagram, at the end of this chapter, as you
review the entries in this list and perform any of the troubleshooting procedures listed.
Good judgement and established logical troubleshooting techniques must be used to
complement the procedures contained in this section.

All Traces
• If all traces are missing in all bands, the problem is most likely in the source group.
However, a missing or disabled DSP driver may exhibit the same or similar symptoms.
To verify that this DSP driver is present and enabled:
1. Press UTILITY System , then Configure , then Control Panel... . In the Address
box, click the down arrow and then click My Computer. In an open area of the My
Computer window, click the right mouse button and then click Properties in the resulting
pop-up menu.
Click the Hardware tab, click Device Manager, and then expand Network Adapters
in the resulting list. The following entry should be listed: Agilent Technologies DSP
Driver #2 and should be enabled.
2. If the entry is not present or if the icon to the left of the name is a yellow box
containing an exclamation mark (!), navigate the following directories and verify the
presence of the following file: C:\WINNT\system32\drivers\spampnp.sys.
3. If you have verified that the DSP driver is present and enabled, but all traces are
still missing in all bands, go to “Checking the Source Group” on page 4-29.
• If the trace faults are band-related, the problem is in the source group. Go to
“Source Group Tests” on page 4-29 and perform the tests that correspond to the
problems seen.
R Trace Only
A problem that affects only the R trace is isolated to the receiver group assemblies. Go to
“Checking the Receiver Group” on page 4-37.
A Trace Only
If the trace is missing in all bands, go to “Checking the Signal Separation Group” on page 4-33.
B Trace Only
C Trace Only
D Trace Only
A, B, R1, and R2 Traces Only
The problem is in the source 1 group, go to “Checking the Source Group” on page 4-29. If the
trace is missing in all bands, go to “Checking the Signal Separation Group” on page 4-33.
C, D, R3, and R4 Traces Only
The problem is in the source 2 group, go to “Checking the Source Group” on page 4-29. If the
trace is missing in all bands, go to “Checking the Signal Separation Group” on page 4-33.

Checking the Source Group
Source Group Tests

Before checking the source group assemblies, you must open the analyzer.
CAUTION Use an antistatic work surface and wrist strap to reduce the chance of
electrostatic discharge for all of the procedures in this chapter.
1. Turn off the analyzer power.

2. Unplug the power to the analyzer and disconnect all front and rear panel connections
except installed jumpers.
3. Remove the outer and inner covers from the analyzer. Refer to “Removing the Covers” on page 7-6.
WARNING Procedures described in this document are performed with power
supplied to the product while protective covers are removed. Energy
available at many points may, if contacted, result in personal injury.
4. With the covers off, plug in the analyzer and turn on the power.
CAUTION Do not operate the analyzer with the outer cover removed for more than 30 minutes,
as this could cause the analyzer to overheat which could result in costly damage.
Single vs. Broadband Failure

There are two main types of failures that are related to the source group. The failures are
classified as:
• broadband
• single band
Single band failures are indicated by all four channel traces having partial dropouts across
the frequency range or intermittent phase lock problems. Troubleshooting information is
provided under “If the trace faults are band-related,” under “All Traces” on page 4-28.
Broadband failures are indicated by all four channel traces being in the noise floor.
Proceed to “RF Signal Troubleshooting”.
RF Signal Troubleshooting
To isolate a broadband RF signal generation failure, check the test port output power:
1. Connect a power meter and power sensor to Port 1 of the analyzer.
2. Press UTILITY Preset . Press STIMULUS Freq , then Center . Set the Center
Frequency to 2 GHz and press ENTRY Enter . Press Span , set the Span Frequency to
0 Hz and press ENTRY Enter .
3. Note the power reading displayed on the power meter; it should be at least 0 dBm.
4. Connect the power sensor, in turn, to Ports 2, 3, and 4 and set trace to measure S22, S33,
and S44 respectively. Note the power reading displayed on the power meter.

• If the power level is low or high on all test ports, the problem is LO signal related.
Continue with “Checking the A10 50 MHz Reference Outputs”.
• If the power level is low or high on only one of the test ports, the problem is either
source group or in the signal separation group. Continue with “Checking the A10
50 MHz Reference Outputs” to check the source group.
Checking the A10 50 MHz Reference Outputs

1. Refer to the block diagram at the end of this chapter and to “Top Cables, All Cables—All
Options” on page 6-16. Locate flexible cables W65, W66, and W67, at the A10 frequency
reference board.
2. Disconnect cables W65, W66, and W67, one at a time, from the A10 board.
3. Connect the spectrum analyzer to the open connector on the A10 board.
4. The spectrum analyzer should measure a signal at 50 MHz.
5. If any of the 50 MHz signals are not present, replace the A10 frequency reference board.
Refer to “Removing and Replacing the A4–A13 Boards” on page 7-14.
6. If the 50 MHz signals are present, reconnect the cables, and then:
• for LO related problems, continue testing at “Checking the A11 13.5 GHz LO
Synthesizer Output”.
• for source related problems, continue testing at “Checking the A4 and A13 Source
Synthesizer Outputs” on page 4-31.
Checking the A11 13.5 GHz LO Synthesizer Output

Options” on page 6-16. Locate the flexible cable W41 at the A11 LO synthesizer board.
2. Disconnect W41 from J1207.
3. Connect the spectrum analyzer to J1207.
4. Set the network analyzer for a 500 MHz CW frequency and observe the spectrum
analyzer measurement.
• The spectrum analyzer should measure a signal at 507.61 MHz.
5. If the signal is not present and the 50 MHz reference signal is present from “Checking
the A10 50 MHz Reference Outputs,” replace the A11 LO synthesizer board. Refer to
“Removing and Replacing the A4–A13 Boards” on page 7-14.
6. If the signal is present, reconnect cable W41, and then continue with “Checking the A21
HMA26.5 Output”.
Checking the A21 HMA26.5 Output

1. Refer to the block diagram at the end of this chapter and to “Bottom RF Cables,
Standard 4-Port Configuration, Option 400” on page 6-42. Locate the flexible cable W42
at the A21 HMA26.5.
2. Disconnect W42 from the A21 HMA 26.5.
3. Connect the spectrum analyzer to the open connector on the A21 HMA 26.5.

4. Set the network analyzer for a 2 GHz CW frequency and observe the spectrum analyzer
measurement.
• The spectrum analyzer should measure a signal at 2 GHz (plus the 7.61 MHz offset).
5. If the signal is not present and the signal is present from “Checking the A11 13.5 GHz
LO Synthesizer Output,” replace the A21 HMA 26.5. Refer to “Removing and Replacing
the A21 HMA26.5” on page 7-30.
6. If the signal is present, reconnect cable W42, and then:
• for 2-port models, continue checking with “Checking the Receiver Group” on
page 4-37.
• for 4-port models, continue checking with “Checking the A22 Splitter Output”.
Checking the A22 Splitter Output

1. Refer to the block diagram at the end of this chapter and to “Bottom RF Cables,
Standard 4-Port Configuration, Option 400” on page 6-42. Locate the semi-rigid cables
W43 and W44, at the A22 splitter.
2. Disconnect W43 and W44, one at a time, from the A22 splitter.
3. Connect the spectrum analyzer to the open connector.
4. Set the network analyzer for an S33 measurement at a CW frequency of 2 GHz and
observe the spectrum analyzer measurement.
5. If the signal is not present and the signal is present from “Checking the A21 HMA26.5
Output,” replace the A22 splitter. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the A22 Splitter”
on page 7-32.
6. If the signal is present, reconnect cables W43 and W44, and then continue with
“Checking the Receiver Group” on page 4-37.
Checking the A4 and A13 Source Synthesizer Outputs

Options” on page 6-16. Locate either the flexible cable W1 at the A4 source 1
synthesizer board or W2 at the A13 source 2 synthesizer board.
2. Disconnect W1 or W2 from J1207.
3. Connect the spectrum analyzer to J1207.
4. Set the network analyzer for a 500 MHz CW frequency and observe the spectrum
analyzer measurement.
• The spectrum analyzer should measure a signal at 507.61 MHz.
5. If the signal is not present and the 5 MHz reference signal is present from “Checking
the A10 50 MHz Reference Outputs,” replace the faulty synthesizer board. Refer to
“Removing and Replacing the A4–A13 Boards” on page 7-14.
6. If the signal is present, reconnect cables W1 and W2, and then continue with “Checking
the A5 and A8 Source Outputs”.

Checking the A5 and A8 Source Outputs

Options” on page 6-16. Locate the flexible cables W3 and W9 at the A5 source 1 board or
cables W5 and W7 at the A8 source 2 board.
2. Disconnect the cables, one at time, that are connected to cables W3 and W9 or cables
W5 and W7, from the source board to be checked.
3. Connect the spectrum analyzer to the open connector at the end of the cable that
connects to the source board to be checked.
4. Set the network analyzer for a 2 GHz CW frequency and observe the spectrum analyzer
measurement.
5. If the signal is not present and the signals are present from “Checking the A4 and A13
Source Synthesizer Outputs,” replace the appropriate source board. Refer to “Removing
and Replacing the A4–A13 Boards” on page 7-14.
6. If the signal is present, reconnect all cables, and then continue with “Checking the
Signal Separation Group” on page 4-33.

Checking the Signal Separation Group

Before checking the signal separation group assemblies, you must open the analyzer.

3. Remove the outer cover from the analyzer. Refer to “Removing the Covers” on page 7-6.
costly damage.
Checking the Output Power of the A, B, C, and D Signals

Using a power meter, you can measure the outputs of the A, B, C, and D signals from the
front panel. The measurement results will help you isolate a faulty assembly. The output of
the R channel cannot be measured because it would necessitate breaking the phase lock
loop, causing all of the signals to be lost.
Equipment Used for This Check

Equipment Type
Power sensor, 3.5 mm E8485A None
Equipment Setup
1. Before starting these checks, zero and calibrate the power meter. (See the power meter
user’s guide for instructions on setting the calibration factor.)
2. If the Receiver Display (Figure 4-6 or Figure 4-7) is not on the analyzer screen, perform
the following: Press UTILITY System , then Service , then Utilities , then
Receiver Display .
3. Set the sweep speed for a 10 second sweep: Press STIMULUS Sweep , then
Sweep Time . Set the time to 10.000 seconds in the Sweep Time box.

Checking Port 1, 2, 3, or 4 Power Outputs (A, B, C, or D Signals)

The object of this check is to verify the power of the output signal across the entire
frequency range. Perform this test if there is an observed problem only with one channel
trace. The ten second sweep is slow enough to allow you to observe the output power on the
power meter as the sweep occurs.
1. Connect the power sensor to the suspect port.
2. Observe the power reading on the power meter as the sweep occurs on the analyzer.
3. The measured output power on the power meter should be at least 0 dBm over the
entire frequency range.
• If the measured power is correct, go to “Checking the Receiver Group” on page 4-37.
• If the measured power is not correct, go to “Checking the Signal through the Signal
Separation Path” on page 4-34.
Checking the Signal through the Signal Separation Path

For all of the following checks, refer to the block diagrams at the end of this chapter and to
any of the following that are appropriate:
• “Bottom Assemblies, Standard 2-Port Configuration, Option 200” on page 6-18
• “Bottom RF Cables, Standard 2-Port Configuration, Option 200” on page 6-20
• “Bottom Assemblies, 2-Port, Option 219 (including Option 029)” on page 6-24
• “Bottom RF Cables, 2-Port, Option 219 without Option 029” on page 6-26
• “Bottom RF Cables, 4-Port, Option 419 without Option 029 (Ports 1 and 2)” on
page 6-48
page 6-52
page 6-60
page 6-64
Trace loss in the signal separation group is due to one or more of the following assemblies
being defective:
• A46, A47, A48, or A49 source bypass switch and A50 combiner
• A25, A26, A27, or A28 bridge

• A34, A35, A36, or A37 source step attenuator

• A38, A39, A40, or A41 bias tee
• A29, A30, A31, or A32 test port coupler
Equipment Used for These Tests

Equipment Type
Spectrum analyzer 8565E 856xEa
a. Must be capable of measuring a signal at 1 GHz.
To determine which assembly is defective, check the signal at each available measurement
point in the signal path from the output of the source board to the output port.
Set the network analyzer for an S11, S22, S33, or S44, measurement for Port 1, 2, 3, or 4
respectively, with a CW frequency of 1 GHz.
Perform the following checks in the order presented.
Checking the A25, A26, A27, and A28 Bridges

1. Locate the appropriate semirigid cable at the output of the bridge to be checked:
• Options 200 and 400
— Port 1; W11 of A25
— Port 4; W19 or A27
• Options 219, 224, 419, and 423
2. Using a 5/16-inch torque wrench, disconnect the semirigid cable at the bridge.
3. Connect the spectrum analyzer to the open bridge connector. Set the spectrum analyzer
to measure a signal at 1 GHz.
4. If the 1 GHz signal is not present and the analyzer has source bypass switches, continue
testing at “Checking the A46, A47, A48, and A49 Source Bypass Switches” on page 4-36.
5. If the 1 GHz signal is not present and the analyzer does not have source bypass
switches, replace the bridge. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the A25–A28 Bridges
and Bridge Mounting Brackets” on page 7-36.
6. If the 1 GHz signal is present and the analyzer has source attenuators and bias tees,

reconnect the cable to the bridge and continue testing at “Checking the A34, A35, A36,
and A37 60-dB Source Step Attenuators” on page 4-36
7. If the 1 GHz signal is present and the analyzer does not have source attenuators and
bias tees, replace the test port coupler. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the A29–A32
Test Port Couplers” on page 7-38.
Checking the A34, A35, A36, and A37 60-dB Source Step Attenuators
1. Locate the appropriate semirigid cable at the output of the source step attenuator to be
checked:
• Options 219, 224, 419, and 423
2. Using a 5/16-inch torque wrench, disconnect the semirigid cable at the step attenuator.
3. Connect the spectrum analyzer to the open step attenuator connector. Set the spectrum
analyzer to measure a signal at 1 GHz.
4. If the 1 GHz signal is not present, replace the source step attenuator. Refer to
“Removing and Replacing the A34–A37 Source Attenuators, the A38–A41 Bias Tees,
and the A42–A45 Receiver Attenuators” on page 7-42.
5. If the 1 GHz signal is present, replace the associated bias tee. Refer to “Removing and
Replacing the A34–A37 Source Attenuators, the A38–A41 Bias Tees, and the A42–A45
Receiver Attenuators” on page 7-42.
Checking the A46, A47, A48, and A49 Source Bypass Switches
1. Locate the appropriate semirigid cable at the output of the source bypass switch to be
checked:
• Options 224 and 423
— Port 2; W110 of A49
— Port 3; W102 of A47
— Port 4; W106 of A48
2. Using a 5/16-inch torque wrench, disconnect the semirigid cable at the bypass switch.
3. Connect the spectrum analyzer to the open bypass switch connector. Set the spectrum
4. If the 1 GHz signal is not present, replace the source bypass switch. Refer to “Removing
and Replacing the A46–A49 Bypass Switches and the A50 Combiner” on page 7-46.
5. If the 1 GHz signal is present, replace the associated bridge. Refer to “Removing and
Replacing the A25–A28 Bridges and Bridge Mounting Brackets” on page 7-36.

Checking the Receiver Group
Equipment Used for These Tests

Equipment Type
Part Number or Part Number
Spectrum analyzer 8565E 856xEa
a. Must be capable of measuring signals at 7.61 MHz and 1 GHz.
For all of the following checks, refer to the block diagrams at the end of this chapter and to
any of the following that are appropriate:
page 6-48
page 6-52
page 6-60
page 6-64
Getting Ready to Test

Before checking the assemblies, you must open the analyzer.

3. Remove the outer and inner covers from the analyzer. Refer to “Removing the Covers”
on page 7-6.


costly damage.
Checking the A23 and A24 Mixer Brick Receiver Outputs

Set the network analyzer for an S11 measurement with a CW frequency of 1 GHz.
1. Locate the following flexible cables at the receiver channel IF outputs of the mixer
brick(s).
• 2-port models
— Channel A; W51 of A23
— Channel R1; W52 of A23
— Channel B; W54 of A23
• 4-port models
— Channel A; W51 of A23
— Channel B; W54 of A23
— Channel C; W55 of A24
— Channel D; W58 of A24
2. Disconnect the flexible cable at the suspect channel.
3. Connect the spectrum analyzer to the suspect channel connector.
4. The measured signal on the spectrum analyzer should be at 7.61 MHz.
• If the measured signal is present, continue testing at “Checking the A20 IF
Multiplexer Board” on page 4-39.
5. If the measured signal is missing on the R1 channel, continue testing at “Checking the
A33 Reference Channel Switch” on page 4-39.
If the measured signal is missing on any channel (other than the R1 channel noted
above) and the analyzer does not have receiver attenuators, replace the A23 or A24
mixer brick, whichever is appropriate. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the A23 and

A24 Mixer Bricks” on page 7-34.

If the measured signal is missing on the A, B, C, or D channels and the analyzer has
receiver attenuators, continue testing at “Checking the A42, A43, A44, and A45 35-dB
Receiver Step Attenuators” on page 4-39.
Checking the A33 Reference Channel Switch

1. Remove the front panel REF 1 jumper and connect a spectrum analyzer to the
front-panel REF 1 SOURCE OUT connector.
2. If the measured signal is present, replace the A23 mixer brick. Refer to “Removing and
Replacing the A23 and A24 Mixer Bricks” on page 7-34.
3. If the measured signal is not present replace the A33 reference channel switch. Refer to
“Removing and Replacing the A33 Reference Mixer Switch” on page 7-40.
Checking the A42, A43, A44, and A45 35-dB Receiver Step Attenuators
1. Locate the appropriate semirigid cable at the output of the receiver step attenuator to
be checked:
• Options 219, 224, 419, and 423
2. Disconnect the appropriate semirigid cable from the output of the step attenuator.
3. Connect the spectrum analyzer to the open step attenuator connector. Set the spectrum
4. If the 1 GHz signal is not present, replace the receiver step attenuator. Refer to
5. If the 1 GHz signal is present, replace the associated mixer brick, A23 or A24. Refer to
Checking the A20 IF Multiplexer Board

1. Locate each of the flexible RF cables at the output channels of the IF multiplexer board:
• 2-port models
— Channel A; W59
— Channel R1; W60
— Channel R2; W61
— Channel B; W62
• 4-port models
— Channel A; W59

— Channel B; W60
— Channel C; W61
— Channel D; W62
— Channel R; W63
2. Disconnect the appropriate flexible RF cable from the output channel to be tested on the
A20 IF multiplexer board.
3. Connect the spectrum analyzer to the open connector.
4. The measured signal on the spectrum analyzer should be at 7.61 MHz.
5. If the measured signal is present, replace the A12 SPAM board. Refer to “Removing and
Replacing the A4–A13 Boards” on page 7-14.
6. If the measured signal is not present replace the A20 IF multiplexer board. Refer to
“Removing and Replacing the A20 IF Multiplexer Board” on page 7-28.

REAR PANEL
INTERCONNECTS N5241A and N5242A 2-Port Overall Block Diagram FRONT PANEL
INTERCONNECTS
FRONT PANEL
INTERCONNECTS
(Includes Options 200-Standard; 219-Attenuators

and Bias Tees; 224-Source Bypass Switches; and A3 A2 USB x 4 OPTION 200 Port 1
029-Noise Figure) DISPLAY USB BD A20 IF MULTIPLEXER W31 RCVR A IN
A12 SIGNAL PROCESSING W30

Service Guide: N5242-90001 ADC MODULE (SPAM)
Main IF A A
P1
OPTION 219, 224, OR 029
CPLR ARM
10.7 MHz
USB
9 MHz
PulseA PULSE
GATES
A23 MIXER BRICK (1) A42 STEP
HUB IF OUT A
DISPLAY INVERTER
KEYPAD EXT IF IN A 100.0 MHz W88 - (219, 224)
ATTEN W87 - (219, 224)
PROCESSOR POWER J1 W59 P3 W51 W133 - (029) W132 - (029)
ADC A A RCVR
FLASH 15 MHz I R TO A23 A
A L A IN
A51 A17 CPU RAM
AUX R4
0-35 dB
HARD DISK SPEAKER 9 MHz
DRIVE W64
100.0 MHz
W60
R1
I R
R1
W48 - (200)
REF 1
USB x 4
USB
EEPROM A1 FRONT PANEL INTERFACE BOARD ADC 15 MHz
J2 Main IF B B L W37 - (219, 224) W36 RCVR R1 IN
INTERFACE B P201 W136 - (029)
10.7 MHz
PCI BUS Pulse B PULSE W35 W30
CONTROLLER GPIB PORT MAIN PCI 100.0 MHz W13
9 MHz GATES W65
GPIB INTERFACE CPU BRIDGE IF OUT B R2 R2
I R SOURCE OUT
EXT IF IN B R1 L
J4 W61 P203
P411
A33 REF
10/100 BASE-T
LAN ETHERNET
ROM RAM ADC 15 MHz
R AUX R3
MIXER
W54
100.0 MHz SWITCH
DSP B B
VGA VIDEO PROCESSOR R2 I R
VGA INTERFACE 9 MHz L
VIDEO RAM P412
RAM W62
J5 Main IF R
A16 ADC 15 MHz
C/R1
R
POWER A15 MIDPLANE R3
10.7 MHz
SUPPLY 9 MHz
IF OUT R Pulse R PULSE P413
AC LINE IN P403 GATES
J6 W63 EXT IF IN R W47
EXT TSET DRIVE LO OUT
A18 A14 ADC 15 MHz
D/R2 R4
GPIB SYSTEM POWER BUS
P414
MOTHERBOARD
TALKER/LISTENER GPIB PORT C/R1 RECEIVER
Main IF C LO DRIVE
GPIB INTERFACE LOCAL DIGITAL BUS
10.7 MHz P601 OPTION 200, 219, OR 224
Pulse C PULSE
GATES
W70
DITHER PULSE IF OUT C
X6 DRIVE
NOISE EXT IF IN C
P603
OPTION 029
AUX R2
TO A4, A5, A7, A8, TO A7 10 MHz REF J3
HIGH DENSITY DATA BUS A10, A11, A21
4
A22 SPLITTER
To
\
POWER BUS Main IF D D/R2 W43 A23
P801
A19 Pulse D
10.7 MHz
From
LOCAL DIGITAL BUS TEST SET PULSE A21 W42
GATES
MOTHERBOARD IF OUT D
EXT IF IN D W139
MIXED POWER AND CONTROL SIGNALS P803
FROM THE A19 TEST SET MOTHERBD AUX R1
OPTION H30 W146
A 4 PULSE DRIVE
SERIAL TEST BUS NODES \
W147
P402 IF OUT R
P602 IF OUT C
P802 IF OUT D
P202 IF OUT B
P2 IF OUT A
B
Bx = ACTIVE SOURCE BAND
W148 W40 - (200, 219, 224)
REF 2
PULSE
IF OUTPUTS R MODULATION W138 - (029) RCVR R2 IN
LOGIC
W149 10 MHz REF
P1 W30
C
W150 W27 - (200) SOURCE OUT
D W25 - (219, 224)
A20 J20 SOURCE W137 - (029)
PULSE
DRIVE OUT Port 2
A20 J20 15 15 OPTION 200
PULSE I/O \ \ W34 RCVR B IN
5 IF INPUTS
\ W30
OPTION 219, 224, OR 029
CPLR ARM
OPTION 029
A45 STEP
A7 NOISE RECEIVER W94 - (419, 423)
ATTEN W93 - (219, 224)
W134 - (029) W135 - (029)
10-25 MHz RCVR
A55 NOISE DOWNCONVERTER TO A23 B
B IN
0-35 dB
25-60 MHz
W141
60-150 MHz
A20 J2
A
31.6 MHz 150-350 MHz
A20 J202 L 3.0 - 6.0 GHz
B I R
12 MHz
A20 J602 350-750 MHz
IF INPUTS C/R1 TO A14 ADC 6.0 - 12.0 GHz
A20 J802
W142 L Port 1
I R
D/R2 SOURCE OUT
0.75-1.5 GHz
A20 J402 12.0 - 26.5 GHz W30
R
31.6 MHz 1.5-3.0 GHz CPLR THRU
W143 0.010-3.00 GHz A25 A29
OPTION 200 OR 219 BRIDGE OPTION 200 TEST PORT
W3 W4 W11 W114
COUPLER
50 OHM PORT 1
LOAD
W47
LO OUT (J5) OPTION 219 OR 224 To Port 1
EXT EXT TEST SET DRIVE LO OUT OPTION 224 W30 DC BIAS 1
TSET
DRIVE
50 OHM
LOAD
W13 A34 STEP A38
W46 EXT TEST SET DRIVE RF OUT
A46 BYPASS ATTEN BIAS TEE
RF OUT (J6) W115
W100 SWITCH W71 W72 W73 W119
From W96
W3 W95
W97 0-65 dB
50
To rear panel
SW SRC OUT OPTION 029 To Port 1
DC BIAS 1
W30
Mixer 1
(1) 2
(2) (3)
3 (4)
4 OPTION 224 A34 STEP A52 BYPASS
A50 A38
Brick L.O. A11 13.5 GHz LO SYNTHESIZER A21 LO MULTIPLIER/AMPLIFIER 26.5 (HMA26.5) COMBINER ATTEN SWITCH
Band A11 A21 A4/A7 A5/A8 B23, 6.752-8.0 GHz 10.664-13.510 GHz W98 W123 W124 BIAS TEE
Harmonic COMB THRU IN (J10) W98 To A50 2-4 GHz 29-30 B26-28,34-36
W121 W122
W125 W119
Synthesizer Frequency MA26.5 Synthesizer Source
Number W113 W97
B24-28,
(GHz) Frequency (GHz) Frequency (GHz) Frequency (GHz) From A46 B22,
5.332-6.752 GHz
31-36
X2
20.0 - 26.5 GHz 50
26-28, B33-36
PORT 1 SW SRC OUT (J11) B21-36 34-36 B21-36 8.0-10.664 GHz 0-65 dB
0 - - - - - MAIN X2 2 From rear panel COMB ARM IN W99
B21, B24-25,31-33 From rear panel COMB THRU IN
24-25, 4.0-5.332 GHz 15.4 - 20.0 GHz
COMB ARM IN (J9) W99 B29-36
1 - - - - - To A50 Frac-N 31-33 1 B29-36
X2
B30-32 26 GHz
0.013-26.508 GHz
W113
ƒ Logic 12.5 MHz
W103 From A47 B2-36 to
2 1 0.01254 to 0.01654 0.01254 to 0.01654 0.010 to 0.014 0.010 to 0.014 3.0-4.0 GHz
0.010-13.510 GHz 13.518 GHz 13.518-26.508 GHz
13.5-15.4 GHz
SRC 2 SW SRC OUT (J8) B19-20 B2-28
-10 to +10 dBm B29
3 1 0.01654 to 0.02154 0.01654 to 0.02154 0.014 to 0.019 0.014 to 0.019 50 MHz W41
W104 REF B21-23,29-30
50 OHM To A47 2.0-3.0 GHz J1207 511
4 1 0.02154 to 0.02954 0.02154 to 0.02954 0.019 to 0.027 0.019 to 0.027 PORT 3
LOAD A10 FREQUENCY REFERENCE J5 B18
10 MHz 10 MHz B14-20 B2-23, 29-30

SW TSET IN (J7) W64 ALC 13 GHz
5 1 0.02954 to 0.04054 0.02954 to 0.04054 0.027 to 0.038 0.027 to 0.038 J3 10 MHz REF 1.0-2.0 GHz B2-28 0.013-13.518 GHz
J4 B16-17
2
SW TSET IN (J1) W112
6 1 0.04054 to 0.05554 0.04054 to 0.05554 0.038 to 0.053 0.038 to 0.053 To A49
10 MHz
50 MHz
W65
Frac-N B2-13 FROM FROM
A19
HIGH STAB 50 MHz REF ƒ Logic 0.5-1.0 GHz A19
PORT 2 W113 W111 From A49 OCXO
2
J5
B14-15 W46
7 1 0.06061 to 0.08261 0.06061 to 0.08261 0.053 to 0.075 0.053 to 0.075 W66
4
SW SRC OUT (J2) LOCAL
DAC LOCAL 3.4 GHz DIGITAL BUS
J6 0.01-0.5 GHz
8 1 0.08261 to 0.11261 0.08261 to 0.11261 0.075 to 0.105 0.075 to 0.105 DIGITAL R B2-13
100 MHz W67 BUS L I POWER
J7 BUS
9 1 0.11261 to 0.15361 0.11261 to 0.15361 0.105 to 0.146 0.105 to 0.146 ƒ
10 POWER
BUS W45
215 HET
NC
10 1 0.15361 to 0.21261 0.15361 to 0.21261 0.146 to 0.205 0.146 to 0.205 10 MHz 200 Hz 211
J8
J2 OPTION 224
11 1 0.21261 to 0.25761 0.21261 to 0.25761 0.205 to 0.250 0.205 to 0.250 50 OHM
W68 LOAD
10 MHz A13 13.5 GHz SOURCE 2 SYNTHESIZER 6.752-8.0 GHz 10.664-13.510 GHz
A8 26.5 GHz SOURCE (SOURCE 2)
B23, P4
12 1 0.25761 to 0.40361 0.25761 to 0.40361 0.250 to 0.396 0.250 to 0.396 REF OUT
2-4 GHz 29-30 B26-28,34-36
20-26.5 GHz
B33-36
W69 B24-28, 20-26.5 GHz
10 MHz
13 1 0.40361 to 0.50761 0.40361 to 0.50761 0.396 to 0.500 0.396 to 0.500 REF IN B22,
5.332-6.752 GHz
31-36
X2
B33-36
B21-36 26-28, 8.0-10.664 GHz 12.8-20 GHz
34-36 B21-36
MAIN X2 B28-32
14 1 0.50761 to 0.63561 0.50761 to 0.63561 0.500 to 0.628 0.500 to 0.628 16-20 GHz B20-36
B21, B24-25,31-33 B31-32
4.0-5.332 GHz X2 B20-36
24-25, 8.5-12.8 GHz
15 1 0.63561 to 1.00761 0.63561 to 1.00761 0.628 to 1.000 0.628 to 1.000 Frac-N 31-33
A19 TEST SET MOTHERBOARD ƒ Logic B2-36 13.5-16 GHz
B20-36 B25-27 B20-36 A47 SWITCH
W104
16 1 1.00761 to 1.50761 1.00761 to 1.50761 1.000 to 1.500 1.000 to 1.500 BIAS 1 IN
3.0-4.0 GHz
10 MHz to 3 B29-30 ALC
B2-36
13.510 GHz Modulator 5.33-8.5 GHz B2-36
B19-20 B29-36 Pulse 0.01-26.5 GHz W67
-10 to +10 dBm B22-24
17 1 1.50761 to 2.00761 1.50761 to 2.00761 1.500 to 2.000 1.500 to 2.000 2
\ DC BIAS 1 TO A38 50 MHz W2 B20-28 Modulator OUT 1 W5 W101
W103 SRC 2 OUT 1
J541 REF B21-23,29-30 P5 50
2.0-3.0 GHz J1207 P1
B18 3.2-5.33 GHz
18 1 2.00761 to 3.00761 2.00761 to 3.00761 2.000 to 3.000 2.000 to 3.000 BIAS 3 IN
J5 B2-19
B20-21 4 To rear panel
FROM
B20-36 A19
B14-20 B2-23, 29-30 SW SRC OUT
ALC B2-36 B2-36
19 1 3.00761 to 3.20761 3.00761 to 3.20761 3.000 to 3.200 3.000 to 3.200 2
1.0-2.0 GHz SRC 2 OUT 2
B16-17
\ DC BIAS 3 TO A39 2 B2-19
20 1 3.20761 to 4.00761 3.20761 to 4.00761 3.200 to 4.000 3.200 to 4.000 J542 Frac-N B2-13 ALC
B2-36
ƒ Logic 0.5-1.0 GHz 0.01-26.5 GHz
B14-15 Modulator OUT 2 W7 W68
BIAS 4 IN
21 1 4.00761 to 5.33961 4.00761 to 5.33961 4.000 to 5.332 4.000 to 5.332 4 P3
LOCAL 3.2 GHz
2 LOCAL 3.4 GHz B2-19
22 1 5.33961 to 6.75961 5.33961 to 6.75961 5.332 to 6.752 5.332 to 6.752 \ DC BIAS 4 TO A40 DIGITAL
0.01-0.5 GHz DIGITAL BUS B2-19 Port 2
J543
R B2-13 P2 P6
BUS L I SOURCE OUT
POWER PIN-switched LPF
23 1 6.75961 to 8.00761 6.75961 to 8.00761 6.752 to 8.000 6.752 to 8.000 BIAS 2 IN
POWER BUS ALC Pulse
10 MHz-3.2 GHz
BUS HET Modulator Modulator W30
24 1 8.00761 to 8.50761 8.00761 to 8.50761 8.000 to 8.500 8.000 to 8.500 2 CPLR THRU
\ DC BIAS 2 TO A41
25 1 8.50761 to 10.67161 8.50761 to 10.67161 8.500 to 10.664 8.500 to 10.664 J544
EXT A28 A32
A4 13.5 GHz SOURCE 1 SYNTHESIZER A5 26.5 GHz SOURCE (SOURCE 1) TSET OPTION 200 OR 219 BRIDGE TEST PORT
6.752-8.0 GHz 10.664-13.510 GHz DRIVE OPTION 200 COUPLER
26 1 10.67161 to 12.00761 10.67161 to 12.00761 10.664 to 12.000 10.664 to 12.000 MEAS TRIG RDY MEAS TRIG RDY
2-4 GHz
B23,
29-30 B26-28,34-36
P4
RF
20-26.5 GHz W9 W10 W23 W116
B24-28, 20-26.5 GHz OUT
B33-36 PORT 2
27 1 12.00761 to 12.80761 12.00761 to 12.80761 12.000 to 12.800 12.000 to 12.800 AUX TRIG 1 IN AUX TRIG 1 IN B22, 31-36 B33-36
26-28, 5.332-6.752 GHz X2
B21-36 8.0-10.664 GHz 12.8-20 GHz
28 1 12.80761 to 13.51761 12.80761 to 13.51761 12.800 to 13.510 12.800 to 13.510 AUX TRIG 1 OUT AUX TRIG 1 OUT MAIN X2
34-36 B21-36
B28-32 OPTION 224 OPTION 219 OR 224 To Port 2
DC BIAS 2
16-20 GHz B20-36 W30
B21, B24-25,31-33 B31-32
29 1 6.75880 to 7.70380 13.51761 to 15.40761 6.755 to 7.700 13.510 to 15.400 AUX TRIG 2 IN
24-25, 4.0-5.332 GHz X2 B20-36
8.5-12.8 GHz A37 STEP A41
AUX TRIG 2 IN
ƒ
Frac-N
Logic
31-33
B2-36 13.5-16 GHz
B20-36 B25-27 B20-36 A49 BYPASS ATTEN BIAS TEE
From rear panel W27 - (200) W117
30 1 7.70380 to 8.00380 15.40761 to 16.00761 7.700 to 8.000 15.400 to 16.000 AUX TRIG 2 OUT AUX TRIG 2 OUT
POWER
BUS 3.0-4.0 GHz
B2-36 SW TSET IN W112 SWITCH W25 - (219, 224)
W137 - (029)
W83 W84 W85 W120
B19-20 B29-36 Pulse 0.01-26.5 GHz W110
TO -10 to +10 dBm B22-24
31 1 8.00380 to 9.00380 16.00761 to 18.00761 8.000 to 9.000 16.000 to 18.000 28 V 28 V A34 THRU A37, 50 MHz W1 B20-28 Modulator OUT 1 From W9 W109
REF B21-23,29-30 P5
W111 0-65 dB
A42 THRU A49 2.0-3.0 GHz J1207 P1 50
3.2-5.33 GHz
32 1 9.00380 to 10.00380 18.00761 to 20.00761 9.000 to 10.000 18.000 to 20.000 MEAS TRIG IN J5 B18 B2-19
MEAS TRIG IN LOCAL
B20-36
B20-21 4
33 1 10.00380 to 10.66781 20.00761 to 21.33561 10.000 to 10.664 20.000 to 21.328
DIGITAL BUS B14-20 B2-23, 29-30
ALC B2-36 B2-36 To rear panel SW SRC OUT OPTION 029 To Port 2
DC BIAS 2
1.0-2.0 GHz W30
25 B16-17
TEST SET /O \
TEST SET I/O 2 A37 STEP A53 BYPASS
34 1 10.66781 to 11.25381 21.33561 to 22.50761 10.664 to 11.250 21.328 to 22.500 INTERFACE B2-19
B2-36 SWITCH A41
ƒ
Frac-N B2-13 ALC 0.01-26.5 GHz ATTEN BIAS TEE
9 PWR I/O
Logic
B14-15
0.5-1.0 GHz Modulator OUT 2 A54 BRIDGE W126 W127
35 1 11.25381 to 12.00381 22.50761 to 24.00761 11.250 to 12.000 22.500 to 24.000 PWR I/O \
INTERFACE 4 P3 W131
W128 W85 W120
3.2 GHz 50
LOCAL 3.4 GHz LOCAL B2-19
36 1 12.00381 to 13.25381 24.00761 to 26.50761 12.000 to 13.250 24.000 to 26.500 HANDLER I/O
36 HANDLER I/O DIGITAL
0.01-0.5 GHz DIGITAL BUS B2-19
0-65 dB
\ R B2-13 P2 P6
INTERFACE BUS L I
POWER BUS ALC Pulse W129
BUS HET Modulator Modulator 10 MHz-3.2 GHz
W130
01 September 2008
N5242A_blk_2port
Instrument Block Diagrams Sheet 1 N5241A/42A

REAR PANEL
INTERCONNECTS N5241A and N5242A 4-Port Overall Block Diagram FRONT PANEL
INTERCONNECTS
FRONT PANEL
INTERCONNECTS
(Includes Options 400-S tandard; 419-Attenuators

and Bias T ees; 423-Source Byp ass Switches; and A3 A2 USB x 4 OPTION 400 Port 1
029-Noise Figure) DISPLAY USB BD A20 IF MULTIPLEXER W31 RCVR A IN
A12 SIGNAL PROCESSING W30

Service Guide: N5242-90001 ADC MODULE (SPAM)
Main IF A A
P1
OPTION 419, 423, OR 029
CPLR ARM
10.7 MHz
USB
9 MHz
PulseA PULSE
GATES
A23 MIXER BRICK (1) A42 STEP
HUB IF OUT A
DISPLAY INVERTER
KEYPAD EXT IF IN A 100.0 MHz W88 - (419, 423)
ATTEN W87 - (419, 423)
PROCESSOR POWER J1 W59 P3 W51 W133 - (029) W132 - (029)
ADC A A RCVR
FLASH 15 MHz I R TO A23 A
A L A IN
A51 A17 CPU RAM
AUX R4
0-35 dB
HARD DISK SPEAKER 9 MHz
DRIVE W52
100.0 MHz
W60
R1
I R
R1
W48 - (400)
REF 1
USB x 4
USB
EEPROM A1 FRONT PANEL INTERFACE BOARD ADC 15 MHz
J2 Main IF B B L W37 - (419, 423) W36 RCVR R1 IN
INTERFACE B P201 W136 - (029)
10.7 MHz
PCI BUS Pulse B PULSE W35 W30
CONTROLLER GPIB PORT MAIN PCI 100.0 MHz W13
9 MHz GATES W53
GPIB INTERFACE CPU BRIDGE IF OUT B R2 R2
I R SOURCE OUT
EXT IF IN B R1 L
J4 W61 P203
P411
A33 REF
10/100 BASE-T
LAN ETHERNET
ROM RAM ADC 15 MHz
R AUX R3
MIXER
W54
100.0 MHz
W49 - (400) SWITCH REF 3
DSP B B
VGA VIDEO PROCESSOR I R W38 - (419, 423, 029) RCVR R3 IN
VGA 9 MHz R2 L
INTERFACE
VIDEO RAM P412 W30
W62 W17
RAM J5 Main IF R
A16 ADC 15 MHz
C
R
SOURCE OUT
POWER A15 MIDPLANE R3
10.7 MHz
SUPPLY 9 MHz
IF OUT R Pulse R PULSE P413
AC LINE IN P403 GATES
OPTION 400 Port 3
J6 W63 EXT IF IN R W47 W32 RCVR C IN
EXT TSET DRIVE LO OUT
A18 A14 ADC 15 MHz
D R4
GPIB SYSTEM POWER BUS W30
P414 OPTION 419, 423, OR 029
MOTHERBOARD CPLR ARM
TALKER/LISTENER
GPIB
GPIB PORT
INTERFACE LOCAL DIGITAL BUS
Main IF C C/R1 A43 STEP
10.7 MHz P601 ATTEN
Pulse C PULSE W90 W89 RCVR
4 IF OUT C GATES RECEIVER LO DRIVE TO A24 C
DITHER PULSE C IN
X6 NOISE \ EXT IF IN C
DRIVE P603 0-35 dB
TO A24 AUX R2
10 MHz REF J3
TO A4, A5, A7, A8, TO A7
HIGH DENSITY DATA BUS A10, A11, A21
OPTION 400 Port 4

W33 RCVR D IN
POWER BUS Main IF D D/R2
P801 W30
10.7 MHz
LOCAL DIGITAL BUS Pulse D PULSE A24 MIXER BRICK (2) OPTION 419, 423, OR 029
GATES CPLR ARM
IF OUT D
MIXED POWER AND CONTROL SIGNALS P803 EXT IF IN D
W55
100.0 MHz A44 STEP
D D
FROM THE A19 TEST SET MOTHERBD AUX R1
I R ATTEN
L
OPTION H30 W146 W92 W91 RCVR
A TO A24 D
SERIAL TEST BUS NODES D IN
W147 100.0 MHz 0-35 dB
P402 IF OUT R
P602 IF OUT C
P802 IF OUT D
P202 IF OUT B
P2 IF OUT A
B 10 MHz REF W56 R4 R4
Bx = ACTIVE SOURCE BAND I R
L
DET OUT
W148 4 PULSE DRIVE PULSE
IF OUTPUTS R FROM
\ W50 - (400) REF 4
P1001
A16 MODULATION
LOGIC W39 - (419, 423, 029) RCVR R4 IN
W149 100.0 MHz
C P1 W57 R3 R3
I R W21 W30
W150 W80 L
D SOURCE OUT
SOURCE
PULSE 100.0 MHz
DRIVE OUT W58 C C
15 15 I R
PULSE I/O
A20 J20
\ \ L
W40 - (400, 419, 423)
REF 2
5 IF INPUTS W138 - (029) RCVR R2 IN
\
W30
OPTION 029 W27 - (400) SOURCE OUT

W25 - (419, 423)
A7 NOISE RECEIVER OPTION 400, 419, W137 - (029)
OR 423
10-25 MHz
A55 NOISE DOWNCONVERTER OPTION 400 Port 2
TERMINATION W34 RCVR B IN
25-60 MHz OPTION 029 W30

W140 OPTION 419, 423, OR 029
W141 CPLR ARM
60-150 MHz A45 STEP
A20 J2 W94 - (419, 423)
ATTEN W93 - (419, 423)
A W134 - (029) W135 - (029)
31.6 MHz RCVR
150-350 MHz 3.0 - 6.0 GHz TO A23 B
A20 J202 L B IN
B I R 0-35 dB
12 MHz
A20 J602 350-750 MHz
IF INPUTS C/R1 TO A14 ADC 6.0 - 12.0 GHz
A20 J802
W142 L Port 1
I R
D/R2 RECEIVER LO DRIVE SOURCE OUT
0.75-1.5 GHz
A20 J402 12.0 - 26.5 GHz W30
R
31.6 MHz 1.5-3.0 GHz CPLR THRU
W143 0.010-3.00 GHz OPTION 400 OR 419 A25 A29
BRIDGE OPTION 400 TEST PORT
W3 W4 W11 W12
COUPLER
50 OHM PORT 1
LOAD
W47
LO OUT (J5) OPTION 419 OR 423 To Port 1
DC BIAS 1
EXT EXT TEST SET DRIVE LO OUT W30
TSET 50 OHM OPTION 423 W13 A34 STEP
DRIVE LOAD A38 W14
W46 EXT TEST SET DRIVE RF OUT
A46 BYPASS ATTEN BIAS TEE
RF OUT (J6)
W100 SWITCH W71 W72 W73 W74
From W96
W3 W95
W97 0-65 dB
50
To rear panel
SW SRC OUT OPTION 029 To Port 1
DC BIAS 1
W30
Mixer 1
(1) 2
(2) (3)
3 (4)
4 OPTION 423 A34 STEP A52 BYPASS
A50 A38
Brick L.O. A11 13.5 GHz LO SYNTHESIZER A21 LO MULTIPLIER/AMPLIFIER 26.5 (HMA26.5) COMBINER ATTEN SWITCH
Band A11 A21 A4/A7 A5/A8 B23, 6.752-8.0 GHz 10.664-13.510 GHz W98 W123 W124 BIAS TEE
Harmonic COMB THRU IN (J10) W98 To A50 2-4 GHz 29-30 B26-28,34-36
W121 W122
W125 W74
Synthesizer Frequency MA26.5 Synthesizer Source
Number W113 W97
B24-28,
A22 SPLITTER
(GHz) Frequency (GHz) Frequency (GHz) Frequency (GHz) From A46 B22,
5.332-6.752 GHz
31-36
X2
20.0 - 26.5 GHz 50
26-28, 8.0-10.664 GHz B33-36
PORT 1 SW SRC OUT (J11) B21-36 34-36 B21-36 0-65 dB
0 - - - - - MAIN X2 2 From rear panel COMB ARM IN W99
W43
B21,
24-25, 4.0-5.332 GHz
B24-25,31-33
15.4 - 20.0 GHz From rear panel COMB THRU IN Port 3
COMB ARM IN (J9) W99 B29-36
1 - - - - - To A50 Frac-N 31-33 1 B29-36
X2
B30-32 26 GHz
0.013-26.508 GHz W42 SOURCE OUT
W113
ƒ Logic 12.5 MHz
W103 From A47 B2-36 to W30
2 1 0.01254 to 0.01654 0.01254 to 0.01654 0.010 to 0.014 0.010 to 0.014 3.0-4.0 GHz
0.010-13.510 GHz 13.518 GHz 13.518-26.508 GHz
13.5-15.4 GHz
SRC 2 SW SRC OUT (J8) B19-20 B2-28 W44
-10 to +10 dBm B29 CPLR THRU
3 1 0.01654 to 0.02154 0.01654 to 0.02154 0.014 to 0.019 0.014 to 0.019 50 MHz W41
SW TSET IN (J7) REF
2.0-3.0 GHz B21-23,29-30
J1207 511 OPTION 400 OR 419 A26 A30
4 1 0.02154 to 0.02954 0.02154 to 0.02954 0.019 to 0.027 0.019 to 0.027
W104 To A47 A10 FREQUENCY REFERENCE J5 B18 BRIDGE TEST PORT
PORT 3 50 OHM OPTION 400 COUPLER
LOAD 10 MHz 10 MHz B14-20 B2-23, 29-30 W5 W6 W15 W16
J3 W64 ALC 13 GHz
5 1 0.02954 to 0.04054 0.02954 to 0.04054 0.027 to 0.038 0.027 to 0.038 10 MHz REF
B16-17
1.0-2.0 GHz B2-28 0.013-13.518 GHz PORT 3
J4
2
6 1 0.04054 to 0.05554 0.04054 to 0.05554 0.038 to 0.053 0.038 to 0.053 To A48
10 MHz
50 MHz
W65
Frac-N B2-13 FROM FROM
A19 OPTION 419 OR 423 OR 029 To Port 3
HIGH STAB 50 MHz REF ƒ Logic 0.5-1.0 GHz A19 DC BIAS 3
PORT 4 W113 W107 2 B14-15 W30
7 1 0.06061 to 0.08261 0.06061 to 0.08261 0.053 to 0.075 0.053 to 0.075 From A48 OCXO J5
4 OPTION 423
SW SRC OUT (J4) W66 LOCAL W17 A35 STEP A39 W18
DAC LOCAL 3.4 GHz DIGITAL BUS ATTEN
8 1 0.08261 to 0.11261 0.08261 to 0.11261 0.075 to 0.105 0.075 to 0.105 J6
DIGITAL R B2-13
0.01-0.5 GHz A47 BYPASS BIAS TEE
From rear panel
100 MHz W67 BUS L I POWER
SW TSET IN W104 SWITCH W75 W76 W77 W78
To A49 J7 BUS
9 1 0.11261 to 0.15361 0.11261 to 0.15361 0.105 to 0.146 0.105 to 0.146 ƒ
10 POWER
BUS W102
215 HET W101
PORT 2 W113 W111 From A49 NC From W5 W103
10 1 0.15361 to 0.21261 0.15361 to 0.21261 0.146 to 0.205 0.146 to 0.205 SW SRC OUT (J2)
10 MHz 200 Hz 211
J8 50 0-65 dB
J2 W46
11 1 0.21261 to 0.25761 0.21261 to 0.25761 0.205 to 0.250 0.205 to 0.250 J402
50 OHM
Port 4
W68 LOAD
10 MHz A13 13.5 GHz SOURCE 2 SYNTHESIZER 6.752-8.0 GHz 10.664-13.510 GHz
A8 26.5 GHz SOURCE (SOURCE 2) To rear panel SW SRC OUT
SOURCE OUT
12 1 0.25761 to 0.40361 0.25761 to 0.40361 0.250 to 0.396 0.250 to 0.396 REF OUT B23, P4 20-26.5 GHz
2-4 GHz 29-30 B26-28,34-36
B33-36
W69 B24-28, 20-26.5 GHz W30
10 MHz
13 1 0.40361 to 0.50761 0.40361 to 0.50761 0.396 to 0.500 0.396 to 0.500 REF IN B22,
5.332-6.752 GHz
31-36
X2
B33-36
B21-36 26-28, 8.0-10.664 GHz W45 12.8-20 GHz CPLR THRU
34-36 B21-36
MAIN X2 B28-32
14 1 0.50761 to 0.63561 0.50761 to 0.63561 0.500 to 0.628 0.500 to 0.628 16-20 GHz A27 A31
B21, B24-25,31-33 B31-32
B20-36 OPTION 400 OR 419
24-25, 4.0-5.332 GHz X2 B20-36 BRIDGE TEST PORT
15 1 0.63561 to 1.00761 0.63561 to 1.00761 0.628 to 1.000 0.628 to 1.000 Frac-N 31-33
8.5-12.8 GHz OPTION 400 COUPLER
A19 TEST SET MOTHERBOARD ƒ Logic B2-36 13.5-16 GHz
B20-36 B25-27 B20-36 W7 W8 W19 W20
16 1 1.00761 to 1.50761 1.00761 to 1.50761 1.000 to 1.500 1.000 to 1.500 BIAS 1 IN 10 MHz to 3 B29-30 ALC PORT 4
3.0-4.0 GHz 13.510 GHz Modulator B2-36 B2-36
B19-20 B29-36 Pulse 5.33-8.5 GHz
-10 to +10 dBm B22-24 0.01-26.5 GHz
2 Modulator
17 1 1.50761 to 2.00761 1.50761 to 2.00761 1.500 to 2.000 1.500 to 2.000 \ DC BIAS 1 TO A38 50 MHz W2 B20-28 OUT 1 OPTION 419 OR 423 OR 029 To Port 4
DC BIAS 4
J541 REF B21-23,29-30 P5 W30
2.0-3.0 GHz J1207 P1 3.2-5.33 GHz OPTION 423
18 1 2.00761 to 3.00761 2.00761 to 3.00761 2.000 to 3.000 2.000 to 3.000 BIAS 3 IN
J5 B18 B2-19
B20-21 4 W21 A36 STEP A40 W22
B14-20 B2-23, 29-30
ALC
B20-36
B2-36 A48 BYPASS ATTEN BIAS TEE
19 1 3.00761 to 3.20761 3.00761 to 3.20761 3.000 to 3.200 3.000 to 3.200 1.0-2.0 GHz B2-36 From rear panel
2 B16-17 SW TSET IN W108 SWITCH W79 W80 W81 W82
\ DC BIAS 3 TO A39 2 B2-19 W106
20 1 3.20761 to 4.00761 3.20761 to 4.00761 3.200 to 4.000 3.200 to 4.000 J542 Frac-N B2-13 ALC
B2-36
W105
ƒ Logic 0.5-1.0 GHz 0.01-26.5 GHz From W7
Modulator W107
BIAS 4 IN B14-15 OUT 2 50 0-65 dB
21 1 4.00761 to 5.33961 4.00761 to 5.33961 4.000 to 5.332 4.000 to 5.332 4 P3
LOCAL 3.2 GHz
2 LOCAL 3.4 GHz B2-19
22 1 5.33961 to 6.75961 5.33961 to 6.75961 5.332 to 6.752 5.332 to 6.752 \ DC BIAS 4 TO A40 DIGITAL
To rear panel SW SRC OUT Port 2
J543
R B2-13 P2 P6
BUS L I SOURCE OUT
23 1 6.75961 to 8.00761 6.75961 to 8.00761 6.752 to 8.000 6.752 to 8.000 BIAS 2 IN
POWER BUS ALC Pulse
10 MHz-3.2 GHz
BUS HET Modulator Modulator W30
24 1 8.00761 to 8.50761 8.00761 to 8.50761 8.000 to 8.500 8.000 to 8.500 2 CPLR THRU
\ DC BIAS 2 TO A41
25 1 8.50761 to 10.67161 8.50761 to 10.67161 8.500 to 10.664 8.500 to 10.664 J544
EXT OPTION 400 OR 419 A28 A32
A4 13.5 GHz SOURCE 1 SYNTHESIZER A5 26.5 GHz SOURCE (SOURCE 1) TSET BRIDGE TEST PORT
6.752-8.0 GHz 10.664-13.510 GHz DRIVE OPTION 400 COUPLER
26 1 10.67161 to 12.00761 10.67161 to 12.00761 10.664 to 12.000 10.664 to 12.000 MEAS TRIG RDY MEAS TRIG RDY
2-4 GHz
B23,
29-30 B26-28,34-36
P4
RF
20-26.5 GHz W9 W10 W23 W24
B24-28, 20-26.5 GHz OUT
B33-36 PORT 2
27 1 12.00761 to 12.80761 12.00761 to 12.80761 12.000 to 12.800 12.000 to 12.800 AUX TRIG 1 IN AUX TRIG 1 IN B22, 31-36 B33-36
26-28, 5.332-6.752 GHz X2
B21-36 8.0-10.664 GHz 12.8-20 GHz
28 1 12.80761 to 13.51761 12.80761 to 13.51761 12.800 to 13.510 12.800 to 13.510 AUX TRIG 1 OUT AUX TRIG 1 OUT MAIN X2
34-36 B21-36
B28-32 OPTION 419 OR 423 To Port 2
DC BIAS 2
16-20 GHz W30
B21, B24-25,31-33 B31-32
B20-36 OPTION 423
29 1 6.75880 to 7.70380 13.51761 to 15.40761 6.755 to 7.700 13.510 to 15.400 AUX TRIG 2 IN
24-25, 4.0-5.332 GHz X2 B20-36
8.5-12.8 GHz A37 STEP A41 W26
AUX TRIG 2 IN
ƒ
Frac-N
Logic
31-33
B2-36 13.5-16 GHz
B20-36 B25-27 B20-36 A49 BYPASS W27 - (400)
ATTEN BIAS TEE
From rear panel
30 1 7.70380 to 8.00380 15.40761 to 16.00761 7.700 to 8.000 15.400 to 16.000 AUX TRIG 2 OUT AUX TRIG 2 OUT
POWER
BUS 3.0-4.0 GHz
B2-36 SW TSET IN W112 SWITCH W25 - (419, 423)
W137 - (029)
W83 W84 W85 W86
B19-20 B29-36 Pulse 0.01-26.5 GHz W110
TO -10 to +10 dBm B22-24
31 1 8.00380 to 9.00380 16.00761 to 18.00761 8.000 to 9.000 16.000 to 18.000 28 V 28 V A34 THRU A37, 50 MHz W1 B20-28 Modulator OUT 1 From W9 W109
REF B21-23,29-30 P5
W111 0-65 dB
A42 THRU A49 2.0-3.0 GHz J1207 P1 50
3.2-5.33 GHz
32 1 9.00380 to 10.00380 18.00761 to 20.00761 9.000 to 10.000 18.000 to 20.000 MEAS TRIG IN J5 B18 B2-19
MEAS TRIG IN LOCAL
B20-36
B20-21 4
33 1 10.00380 to 10.66781 20.00761 to 21.33561 10.000 to 10.664 20.000 to 21.328
DIGITAL BUS B14-20 B2-23, 29-30
ALC B2-36 B2-36 To rear panel SW SRC OUT OPTION 029 To Port 2
DC BIAS 2
1.0-2.0 GHz W30
25 B16-17
TEST SET /O \
TEST SET I/O 2 A37 STEP A53 BYPASS
34 1 10.66781 to 11.25381 21.33561 to 22.50761 10.664 to 11.250 21.328 to 22.500 INTERFACE B2-19
B2-36 SWITCH A41
ƒ
Frac-N B2-13 ALC 0.01-26.5 GHz ATTEN BIAS TEE
9 PWR I/O
Logic
B14-15
0.5-1.0 GHz Modulator OUT 2 A54 BRIDGE W126 W127
35 1 11.25381 to 12.00381 22.50761 to 24.00761 11.250 to 12.000 22.500 to 24.000 PWR I/O \
INTERFACE 4 P3 W131
W128 W85 W86
3.2 GHz 50
LOCAL 3.4 GHz LOCAL B2-19
36 1 12.00381 to 13.25381 24.00761 to 26.50761 12.000 to 13.250 24.000 to 26.500 HANDLER I/O
36 HANDLER I/O DIGITAL
0-65 dB
\ R B2-13 P2 P6
INTERFACE BUS L I
POWER BUS ALC Pulse W129
BUS HET Modulator Modulator 10 MHz-3.2 GHz
W130
01 September 2008
N5242A_blk_4port
Instrument Block Diagrams Sheet 2 N5241A/42A

5 Theory of Operation

Theory of Operation PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers

This chapter provides a general description of the operating theory of the N5241A/42A
2-port and 4-port PNA microwave network analyzers.
• Theory of operation is explained to the assembly level only.
• Component-level circuit theory is not provided.
• Simplified block diagrams are included for each functional group.
• More detailed block diagrams are located at the end of Chapter 4, “Troubleshooting.”
IMPORTANT Although simplified block diagrams are included within the description of
each functional group, it is recommended that the more detailed block
diagrams, located at the end of Chapter 4, be available for reference, as you
read the information in this chapter.
Chapter Five at-a-Glance
Network Analyzer System A summary of the theory of operation for the Page 5-3
Operation analyzer.
A summary of the operation of the major
functional groups of the analyzer.
Synthesized Source Group Operation of the assemblies associated with the Page 5-7
Operation source group.
Signal Separation Group Operation of the assemblies associated with Page 5-16
Operation signal separation, including the operation of
optional source attenuators, source bypass
switches, and bias tees.
Receiver Group Operation Operation of the assemblies associated with the Page 5-21
receiver group including the operation of
optional receiver attenuators.
Noise Measurement Group Operation of the assemblies associated with the Page 5-27
Operation (Option 029) noise measurement group.
Digital Processing and Digital Operation of the assemblies associated with Page 5-29
Control Group Operation digital processing and digital control.
Power Supply Group Operation of the power supply assembly group. Page 5-34
Operation

PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers Theory of Operation
N5241A/42A Network Analyzer System Operation
Network Analyzer System Operation

The PNA network analyzer generates two (2-port models) or four (4-port models)
phase-locked incident signals and an LO signal from the internal synthesized source. By
means of signal separation, the incident signals are divided into reference signals and test
signals.
The reference signals are applied to the receiver group, while the test signals are applied
to the device under test (DUT) and then to the receiver group. The LO signal is applied
directly to the receiver group where it is mixed with the test and reference signals to
produce IF signals for each of the eight channels (A–D, R1–R4) for 4-port models or four
channels (A, B, R1, R2) for 2-port models. These IF signals are downconverted and then
sampled and digitally processed.
If configured with the optional 2nd source, the 2-port models provide two auxiliary source
outputs, SRC 2 OUT 1 and SRC 2 OUT 2.
Figure 5-1 is a simplified block diagram of the 4-port network analyzer system and Figure
5-2 is a simplified block diagram of the 2-port network analyzer system.
Figure 5-1 4-Port System Simplified Block Diagram

Network Analyzer System Operation N5241A/42A
Figure 5-2 2-Port System Simplified Block Diagram
Functional Groups of the Network Analyzer

The operation of the network analyzer can be separated into major functional groups. Each
group consists of assemblies that perform a distinct function in the instrument. Some of
the assemblies are related to more than one group, and all of the groups, to some extent,
are interrelated and affect each other's performance. The major functional groups are:
• Synthesized Source Group
• Signal Separation Group
• Receiver Group
• Noise Measurement Group (Option 029)
• Digital Processor and Digital Control Group
• Power Supply Group

N5241A/42A Network Analyzer System Operation
Synthesized Source Group

The built-in synthesized source generates a swept, stepped, or continuous wave (CW)
signal in the frequency ranges as listed in Table 5-1. The source group provides five
signals: an LO signal and four incident signals. The LO signal and the four incident
signals are offset in frequency by the receiver IF of 7.606 MHz (at tuned frequencies below
53 MHz the IF and the offset is 2.535 MHz).
The LO signal is sent directly to the mixers in the receiver group. The incident signals are
routed to the front panel test ports and then to the device under test (DUT) as the test
signal. A portion of each incident signal is coupled off (in the signal separation group) and
sent to the mixers in the receiver group as reference signals. These reference signals are
compared (mixed) with the LO signal in the receiver group to produce the 7.606 MHz (or
2.535 MHz at frequencies below 53 MHz) IF signal.
The incident signal output power is leveled by an internal automatic leveling control (ALC)
circuit. The maximum output power level of the network analyzer at the test ports is
shown in Table 5-1.
Refer to “Synthesized Source Group Operation” on page 5-7.
Table 5-1 Frequency Range and Maximum Output Power Level

Nominal Maximum Leveled Output Power (in dBm)
Output Power 10 MHz 50 MHz 500 MHz 3.2 GHz 10 GHz 16 MHz 20 GHz 24 GHz
Options
at Instrument to to to to to to to to
Preset Ports
50 MHz 500MHz 3.2 GHz 10 GHz 16 GHz 20 GHz 24 GHz 26.5 GHz
0 dBm 1 +8 +10 +10 +13 +13 +13 +12 +5
200
0 dBm 2 +13 +13 +13 +13 +13 +10 +7 +2
-5 dBm 1 +8 +10 +10 +13 +12 +10 +8 +3
219
-5 dBm 2 +13 +13 +13 +13 +11 +8 +7 -1
-5 dBm 1 +7 +8 +8 +13 +12 +10 +7 0
-5 dBm 2 +13 +13 +13 +13 +10 +7 +5 -2
224 SRC 2
+5 dBm +9 +11 +10 +18 +16 +15 +13 +7
OUT 1
SRC 2
+5 dBm +13 +17 +14 +18 +16 +13 +12 +5
OUT 2
0 dBm 1, 3 +8 +10 +10 +13 +13 +13 +12 +5
400
0 dBm 2, 4 +13 +13 +13 +13 +13 +10 +7 +2
-5 dBm 1, 3 +8 +10 +10 +13 +12 +10 +8 +3
419
-5 dBm 2, 4 +13 +13 +13 +13 +11 +8 +7 -1
-5 dBm 1, 3 +7 +8 +8 +13 +12 +10 +7 0
423
-5 dBm 2, 4 +13 +13 +13 +13 +10 +7 +5 -2

Network Analyzer System Operation N5241A/42A
Signal Separation Group

Each of the incident signals from the source group is separated into a reference path and a
test path. The reference signal is transmitted to the receiver group. The test signal is
transmitted through—and reflected from—the DUT and is then transmitted to the
receiver group.
The signal separation group includes:
• RF path switching to allow forward and reverse measurements
• external connections for the DUT (configurable test set)
• optional step attenuators in the source and receiver paths
• optional source bypass switches
• optional bias tees
Refer to “Signal Separation Group Operation” on page 5-16.
Receiver Group
The receiver converts the test and reference signals to 7.606 MHz intermediate frequency
(IF) signals for signal processing, retaining both magnitude and phase characteristics. The
IF signals are converted to digital information by the digital processing group.
Refer to “Receiver Group Operation” on page 5-21.
Noise Measurement Group (Option 029)

Description here.
Refer to “Noise Measurement Group Operation (Option 029)” on page 5-27.
Digital Processor and Digital Control Group

The digital processor and digital control group are divided into a front panel group and a
data acquisition and processing group. The front panel group provides communication to
the network analyzer. The data acquisition and processing group provides the output to
the display, in addition to signal processing and analyzer control.
Refer to “Digital Processing and Digital Control Group Operation” on page 5-29.
Power Supply Group

The power supply functional group provides power for the other assemblies in the
instrument.
Refer to “Power Supply Group Operation” on page 5-34.

N5241A/42A Synthesized Source Group Operation
Synthesized Source Group Operation

The source group produces a stable output signal by phase locking a synthesized
voltage-controlled oscillator (VCO). Refer to Table 5-2 on page 5-9 for the full frequency
range of the source. The outputs at the front panel test ports are swept, stepped or CW
signals. Maximum leveled output powers are listed in Table 5-1 on page 5-5. For a simple
block diagram of the source group, refer to Figure 5-3 on page 5-8.
In this section the following are described:
• Basic Operation
• A4, A13, and A11 13.5 GHz Synthesizer Boards
• A5 and A8 26.5 GHz Source Boards
• A21 Multiplier/Amplifier 26.5 Board (HMA26.5)
• A10 Frequency Reference Board (including rear-panel interconnects)
• A19 Test Set Motherboard (including rear-panel interconnects)
Basic Operation
Table 5-2 on page 5-9 lists the L.O. harmonic number, the synthesizer frequencies (A4,
A13, and A11), and the main source frequency (A5 and A8) within the analyzer for each
band. This table is referred to throughout this chapter and also appears on the overall
block diagram at the end of Chapter 4, “Troubleshooting.”
The A10 frequency reference board produces a constant phase locked reference signal of
50 MHz that is sent to the A4, A13, and A11 13.5 GHz synthesizer boards.
The A11 13.5 GHz synthesizer board produces an LO signal that is sent through the A21
multiplier/amplifier 26.5 to the A23 and A24 mixer bricks (via the A22 splitter). The
frequency is synthesized such that the mixing product of this LO signal with the test
signal output is a constant 7.606 MHz IF; except for frequencies below 53 MHz when the
IF is 2.535 MHz. This IF signal is sent to the A12 SPAM board for digital processing.
The A4 and A13 13.5 GHz synthesizer boards each produce an incident signal that is sent
to the front panel outputs. A portion of these signals are coupled off and sent to the A23
and A24 mixer bricks (A–D and R1–R4) where they are mixed with the LO signal from the
A22 splitter to produce the 7.606 MHz (or 2.535 MHz) IF signal.
The A4, A13, and A11 13.5 GHz synthesizer boards each contain their own phase lock
circuitry. The A11 board is used to phase lock the LO signal while the A4 and A13 boards
are used to phase lock the test signal. This makes it possible for the LO signal to be tuned
to a different frequency than the test signal, which is necessary since the LO signal is
normally 7.606 MHz higher than the test signal. Since the A4, A13, and A11 13.5 GHz
synthesizer boards each receive their 50 MHz input reference signal from the exact same
source, frequency drift error is eliminated.

Synthesized Source Group Operation N5241A/42A
Figure 5-3 Source Group

Table 5-2 Subsweep Frequencies

Mixer
Brick
L.O. A11 A21 A4/A13 A5/A8
Band
Harmonic Synthesizer HMA26.5 Synthesizer Source
Number Frequency (GHz) Frequency (GHz) Frequency (GHz) Frequency (GHz)
(N)
0 - - - - -
1 - - - - -
2 1 0.01254 to 0.01654 0.01254 to 0.01654 0.010 to 0.014 0.010 to 0.014
3 1 0.01654 to 0.02154 0.01654 to 0.02154 0.014 to 0.019 0.014 to 0.019
4 1 0.02154 to 0.02954 0.02154 to 0.02954 0.019 to 0.027 0.019 to 0.027
5 1 0.02954 to 0.04054 0.02954 to 0.04054 0.027 to 0.038 0.027 to 0.038
6 1 0.04054 to 0.05554 0.04054 to 0.05554 0.038 to 0.053 0.038 to 0.053
7 1 0.06061 to 0.08261 0.06061 to 0.08261 0.053 to 0.075 0.053 to 0.075
8 1 0.08261 to 0.11261 0.08261 to 0.11261 0.075 to 0.105 0.075 to 0.105
9 1 0.11261 to 0.15361 0.11261 to 0.15361 0.105 to 0.146 0.105 to 0.146
10 1 0.15361 to 0.21261 0.15361 to 0.21261 0.146 to 0.205 0.146 to 0.205
11 1 0.21261 to 0.25761 0.21261 to 0.25761 0.205 to 0.250 0.205 to 0.250
12 1 0.25761 to 0.40361 0.25761 to 0.40361 0.250 to 0.396 0.250 to 0.396
13 1 0.40361 to 0.50761 0.40361 to 0.50761 0.396 to 0.500 0.396 to 0.500
14 1 0.50761 to 0.63561 0.50761 to 0.63561 0.500 to 0.628 0.500 to 0.628
15 1 0.63661 to 1.00761 0.63661 to 1.00761 0.628 to 1.000 0.628 to 1.000
16 1 1.00761 to 1.50761 1.00761 to 1.50761 1.000 to 1.500 1.000 to 1.500
17 1 1.50761 to 2.00761 1.50761 to 2.00761 1.500 to 2.000 1.500 to 2.000
18 1 2.00761 to 3.00761 2.00761 to 3.00761 2.000 to 3.000 2.000 to 3.000
19 1 3.00761 to 3.20761 3.00761 to 3.20761 3.000 to 3.200 3.000 to 3.200
20 1 3.20761 to 4.00761 3.20761 to 4.00761 3.200 to 4.000 3.200 to 4.000
21 1 4.00761 to 5.33961 4.00761 to 5.33961 4.000 to 5.332 4.000 to 5.332
22 1 5.33961 to 6.75961 5.33961 to 6.75961 5.332 to 6.752 5.332 to 6.752
23 1 6.75961 to 8.00761 6.75961 to 8.00761 6.752 to 8.000 6.752 to 8.000
24 1 8.00761 to 8.50761 8.00761 to 8.50761 8.000 to 8.500 8.000 to 8.500
25 1 8.50761 to 10.67161 8.50761 to 10.67161 8.500 to 10.664 8.500 to 10.664
26 1 10.67161 to 12.00761 10.67161 to 12.00761 10.664 to 12.000 10.664 to 12.000
27 1 12.00761 to 12.80761 12.00761 to 12.80761 12.000 to 12.800 12.000 to 12.800
28 1 12.80761 to 13.51761 12.80761 to 13.51761 12.800 to 13.510 12.800 to 13.510
29 1 6.758803 to 7.703803 13.51761 to 15.40761 6.755 to 7.700 13.510 to 15.400
30 1 7.703803 to 8.003803 15.40761 to 16.00761 7.700 to 8.000 15.400 to 16.000
31 1 8.003803 to 9.003803 16.00761 to 18.00761 8.000 to 9.000 16.000 to 18.000
32 1 9.003803 to 10.00381 18.00761 to 20.00761 9.000 to 10.000 18.000 to 20.000
33 1 10.00381 to 10.66781 20.00761 to 21.33561 10.000 to 10.664 20.000 to 21.328
34 1 10.66781 to 11.25381 21.33561 to 22.50761 10.664 to 11.250 21.328 to 22.500
35 1 11.25381 to 12.00381 22.50761 to 24.00761 11.250 to 12.000 22.500 to 24.000
36 1 12.00381 to 13.25381 24.00761 to 26.50761 12.000 to 13.250 24.000 to 26.500

A4, A13, and A11 13.5 GHz Synthesizer Boards

On 2-ports models, the A13 13.5 GHz synthesizer board is optional and included only with
Option 224.
The A4, A13, and A11 13.5 GHz synthesizer boards use the 50 MHz reference signal from
the A10 frequency reference board to tune two VCO circuits: one that sweeps from 2 GHz
to 4 GHz and one that is set to a fixed CW frequency of 3.4 GHz.
In bands 2-13, the 3.4 GHz signal is mixed with 3.41 GHz to 3.90 GHz signals from the
2–4 –GHz oscillator to produce the output frequencies of 10 MHz to 500 MHz as listed in
Table 5-2.
In bands 14 and 15, the output of the swept VCO is passed through a divide-by-4 circuit to
produce the output frequencies listed in Table 5-2.
In bands 16 and 17, the swept VCO signal is passed through a divide-by-2 circuit to
produce the output frequencies listed in Table 5-2.
In bands 18–20, the swept VCO signal is passed directly to the output of the synthesizer
board to produce the output frequencies listed in Table 5-2.
In bands 21–36, the swept VCO signal is passed through a doubler circuit where bands
21–23 and 29–30 are sent directly to the output of the synthesizer board while bands 26–28
and 34–36 are passed through another doubler circuit then to the output of the synthesizer
board to produce the output frequencies listed in Table 5-2.
The output of the A11 13.5 GHz synthesizer board (the LO synthesizer) is 7.606 MHz
higher than the output of the A4 and A13 13.5 GHz synthesizer boards (the source
synthesizers). This is because the output of the A11 13.5 GHz synthesizer board is routed
through the A21 multiplier/amplifier 26.5 board to the A23 and A24 mixer bricks where
they are mixed with the test signals to produce a 7.606 MHz IF signal for each of eight
channels (A–D and R1–R4). Refer to “A23 and A24 Mixer Bricks” on page 5-21 for a more
complete description.
A5 and A8 26.5 GHz Source Boards

On 2-port models, the A8 26.5 GHz source board is optional and included only with
Option 224.
In bands 2–19, the input signals from the A4 or A13 13.5 GHz synthesizer board are
passed through to both outputs (main and secondary) unchanged.
For bands 20–28, the input signals are passed directly to the secondary output or amplified
and filtered, then sent to the main output.
For bands 29–36, the input signals are doubled, filtered, and amplified. The signals for
these bands are then either passed directly to the secondary output or passed through
more amplification and filtering and sent to the main output.
Together these signals for bands 2–36 create the full synthesized source output frequency
range of 10 MHz to 26.5 GHz. These output frequencies for each band are listed in
Table 5-2.
The A5 26.5 GHz source board provides an EXT TSET DRIVE RF OUT signal to the rear
panel. This signal is output in bands 20–36 at a frequency range of 3.2–26.5 GHz for use

with an external test set. This output is terminated with a 50-ohm load on the A8 26.5 GHz
source.
The companion signal, EXT TEST SET DRIVE LO, is output from the A23 mixer brick.
Refer to “A23 and A24 Mixer Bricks” on page 5-21.
A21 Multiplier/Amplifier 26.5 Board (HMA26.5)

In bands 2–28, the synthesized LO input is filtered, amplified, and passed through to the
A22 splitter (4-port only). In bands 29–36, the input is amplified, doubled, and filtered,
then sent to the output.
Together, these signal paths create the full output frequency range of 12.5 MHz to
26.508 GHz that is sent to the A22 splitter (4-port only) where the signal is divided and
sent to the A23 and A24 (4-port only) mixer bricks as the LO signal.
A10 Frequency Reference Board

This assembly provides stable reference frequencies to the rest of the instrument. A high
stability 10 MHz oven-controlled crystal oscillator (OCXO) normally provides the
frequency standard. However, if a 10 MHz external reference signal is detected at the
10 MHz EXT REF IN port on the rear panel, it is used as the frequency reference instead.
The 10 MHz reference signal is used to phase lock a 100 MHz VCO. The output of this VCO
is then divided by ten to produce the 10 MHz EXT REF OUT rear panel signal and also a
10 MHz reference signal for the A12 signal processing ADC module (SPAM) board. The
VCO output is also divided by two to produce 50 MHz reference signals for the A4, A13,
and A11 13.5 GHz synthesizer boards.
Rear-Panel Interconnects
10 MHz REF INPUT A BNC connector that allows an external frequency reference
signal to be used to phase lock the analyzer for increased
frequency accuracy.
The analyzer automatically enables the external frequency
reference feature when a signal is connected to this input. When
the signal is removed, the analyzer automatically switches back to
its internal frequency reference.
10 MHz REF OUTPUT A BNC connector that allows a 10 MHz reference signal, produced
by the A10 frequency reference board, to be output for use in
phase locking external test equipment.

A19 Test Set Motherboard

The A19 test set motherboard serves these functions:
• to act as an interface between the A17 CPU board and the auxiliary rear panel
interconnects.
• to provide ALC signals to the A21 HMA26.5.
• to route control signals to the signal separation group. Refer to “Signal Separation
Group Operation” on page 5-16 for more information.
Rear Panel Interconnects

The A19 test set motherboard includes the following rear panel interconnects.
TEST SET I/O A DB-25 female connector that is used to control external test sets. The
external test set bus consists of 13 multiplexed address and data lines,
three control lines, and an open-collector interrupt line. Pin assignments
are listed in Table 5-3 on page 5-13.
Up to 16 test sets may be “daisy-chained” on the bus at one time.
The Test Set I/O is not compatible with 8753 network analyzer test sets.
HANDLER I/O A rectangular 36-pin, female connector providing four independent parallel
input/output ports, nine control signal lines, one ground, and a power
supply line. This connector has Type 2 output pin assignments as listed in
Table 5-4 on page 5-14.
All signals are TTL-compatible. Data input/output ports consist of two 8-bit
output ports (Port A and Port B) and two 4-bit bidirectional ports (Port C
and Port D).
Connector settings can be changed using SCPI and COM commands. The
settings are not accessible from the front panel.
PWR I/O A DB-9 female connector. Pin assignments are listed in Table 5-5 on
page 5-15.

Table 5-3 TEST SET I/O Connector Pin Assignments
DB-25 Female Connector
Pin Numbers Name Function
1 SEL0 TTL out, test set select bit 0, tied to 0 V
2 Sweep Holdoff In TTL in, low level holds off sweep
3–6 AD12–AD8 TTL I/O, address and latched data
7 GND 0 V, ground reference
8 LAS TTL out, active low address strobe (1 μs min)
9–11 AD4–AD2 TTL I/O, address and latched data

13 Interrupt In TTL in, low level (10 μs min) aborts sweep
14 +22 V +22 Vdc, 100 mA max.

15–16 SEL1–2 TTL out, test set select bits 1-2, tied to 0 V
17 AD11 TTL I/O, address and latched data
18 SEL3 TTL out, test set select bit 3, tied to 0 V

19–21 AD7–5 TTL I/O, address and latched data
22–23 AD0–1 TTL I/O, address and latched data
24 LDS TTL out, active low data strobe (1 μs min)
25 RLW TTL out, high = read, low = write

Table 5-4 HANDLER I/O Connector Pin Assignments
Rectangular 36-Pin Female Connector
Pin Numbers Name Function
2 INPUT1 TTL in, negative pulse (1 μs min) latches OUTPUT1-2
3–4 OUTPUT1–2 TTL out, latched

5–12 Port A0–7 Out TTL out, latched
13–20 Port B0–7 Out TTL out, latched
21–24 Port C I/O TTL I/O, latched
25–28 Port D I/O TTL I/O, latched
29 Port C Status TTL out, low = input mode, high = output mode
30 Port D Status TTL out, low = input mode, high = output mode
31 Output Strobe TTL out, active low data write strobe (1 μs min)
Write Strobe
32 No connect Not used
33 Pass Fail TTL out, latched, indicates pass fail (programmable polarity)
34 +5 V +5 Vdc, 100 mA max.
35 Sweep End TTL out, active low (10 μs min) indicates sweep done
36 Pass/Fail TTL out, active low pass/fail write strobe (1 μs min)

Write Strobe

Table 5-5 PWR I/O Connector Pin Assignments
Pin Name Description
1 +15V +15 V @ 400 mA
2 -15V -15 V @ 400 mA
3 AnalogOut1 Analog Output Voltage

Programmable ±10 V @ 100 mA out
Nominally 0 ohms
2.44 mV typical resolution
1 MHz BW
4 AnalogOut2 Analog Output Voltage
Programmable ±10 V @ 100 mA out
Nominally 0 ohms
2.44 mV typical resolution
1 MHz BW
5 ACOM System ground
6 GndSense Ground sense for Analog In and Analog Out

Connected with 51.1 ohms to ACOM
7 AnalogIn1 Analog input:

±10 V @ 1.22 mV typical resolution
Rin > 1 M-ohm
BW ≈ 1 MHz
ADC conversion time < 1 us typical
8 AnalogIn2 Analog input:

±10 V @ 1.22 mV typical resolution
Rin > 1 M-ohm
BW ≈ 1 MHz
ADC conversion time < 1 us typical
9 Power Button Open collector input

Active low replicates power button key press.

Signal Separation Group Operation N5241A/42A
Signal Separation Group Operation

The signal separation group divides the source incident signals into a reference path and a
test path. Refer to Figure 5-4 on page 5-18 and Figure 5-5 on page 5-19.
• The reference signals are transmitted to the receiver group as the R1, R2, R3, and R4
inputs for 4-port models or the R1 and R2 inputs for 2-port models.
• The test signals are transmitted through—and reflected from—the device under test
(DUT) and then transmitted to the receiver group as the A, B, C, and D inputs for 4-port
models or the A and B inputs for 2-port models.
• Control lines to this group are routed from the A19 test set motherboard.
In this section, the following assemblies are described:

• A25–A28 Bridges
• A29–A32 Test Port Couplers
• Front Panel Jumpers—Configurable Test Set
• A34–A37 65-dB Source Step Attenuators and A38–A41 Bias Tees (Optional)
• A46–A49 Source Bypass Switches and A50 Combiner (Optional)
Configurable Test Set

The configurable test set is included in the standard analyzer and allows you to measure
devices with higher power and higher dynamic range limits than an analyzer without the
configurable test set. On 4-port models, twelve signal paths, routed through front panel
SMA jumpers, comprise the configurable test set. On 2-port models, there are six signal
paths routed through front panels jumpers in the configurable test set.
As shown in Figure 5-4 on page 5-18 and Figure 5-5 on page 5-19, these jumpers are
installed between the components listed below. Ports 3 and 4 apply only to 4-port models.
• the A25 port 1 bridge and the A23 mixer brick channel R1
• the A25 port 1 bridge and the A29 test port 1 coupler
• the A29 test port 1 coupler and the A23 mixer brick channel A
• the A30 test port 3 coupler and the A24 mixer brick channel C
• the A31 test port 4 coupler and the A24 mixer brick channel D
• the A32 test port 2 coupler and the A23 mixer brick channel B

N5241A/42A Signal Separation Group Operation
Normal Measurement Configuration

The Option 419 analyzer is equipped with configurable test set and source attenuators.
With this configuration and inclusion of an external amplifier and accessories, you can
calibrate the analyzer and test devices at power levels up to +30 dBm. You can make
measurements in the forward, reverse, or both directions and still achieve these high
power levels.
High Dynamic Range Measurement Configuration

With a few jumper changes, you can configure the measurement configuration for higher
dynamic range measurements. By swapping the front panel jumpers for one port, signal
flow through the corresponding coupler is reversed, increasing the test signal sensitivity
by 15 dB.
In the forward direction, for example, the signal flow through the test port 2 coupler (A32)
is reversed by arranging the front panel jumpers such that RCVR B IN connects to CPLR
THRU and CPLR ARM connects to SOURCE OUT.
While increasing forward (S21) dynamic range, the reverse (S12) dynamic range is
degraded by the same amount.
A25–A28 Bridges
The source incident signals from the A5 and A8 26.5 GHz sources are sent to the A25–A28
bridges where a portion of each signal is coupled off to provide the R1, R2, R3, and R4
channel reference signals for 4-port models or R1 and R2 reference signals for 2-port
models.
These reference signals are routed through front-panel jumpers to the A23 and A24 mixer
bricks. Refer to “A23 and A24 Mixer Bricks” on page 5-21 for additional information.
The test signals each go through the through-line arm of a bridge, then through a front
panel jumper to the A29–A32 test port couplers.
A29–A32 Test Port Couplers

The test port signals go into the through-line arm of the couplers, and from there to the
test ports and the DUT.
The coupled arm of the couplers carries the signal reflected from or transmitted through
the DUT, to the receiver for measurement (through front panel jumpers), as inputs A, B, C,
and D for 4-port models or inputs A and B for 2-port models. The coupling coefficient of the
directional couplers is nominally 15 dB over the full frequency range.

Figure 5-4 4-Port Signal Separation Group

N5241A/42A Signal Separation Group Operation
Figure 5-5 2-Port Signal Separation Group

A34–A37 65-dB Source Step Attenuators and A38–A41 Bias Tees

(Optional)
On 4-port models with Option 419 or 423, a step attenuator and a bias tee are placed in the
signal path of each test port between the A25–A28 bridges and the A29–A32 test port
couplers.
On 2-port models with Option 219 or 224, a step attenuator and a bias tee are placed in the
signal path of each test port between the A25 and A28 bridges and the A29 and A32 test
port couplers.
The 65-dB step attenuators provide coarse power control for the test port signals. They are
electro-mechanical step attenuators that provide 0 to 65 dB of attenuation in 5-dB steps.
They adjust the power level to the DUT without changing the level of the incident power in
the reference path. These attenuators are controlled by the A17 CPU board.
The bias tees are to provide DC biasing for the DUT.
A46–A49 Source Bypass Switches and A50 Combiner (Optional)

On 4-port models with Option 423, a source bypass switch is placed in the signal path of
each test port between the A5 and A8 26.5 GHz sources and the A25–A28 bridges.
On 2-port models with Option 224, a source bypass switch is placed in the signal path of
each test port between the A5 and A8 26.5 GHz sources and the A25 and A28 bridges.
These switches allow the source signal to be routed to or from rear-panel connectors. The
internal source can be sent out through a rear-panel connector to be made available for
external use or an external source can be input through a rear-panel connector to be used
in place of the internal source signal.
In the port 1 signal path, there is an additional bridge (A50) which, when switched into the
signal path, is used as a combiner to combine two source signals from the rear panel. These
signals typically come from the analyzer’s two internal sources and are jumpered on the
rear panel.

N5241A/42A Receiver Group Operation
Receiver Group Operation

The receiver group measures and processes the input signals into digital information for
processing and eventual display. Figure 5-6 on page 5-25 and Figure 5-7 on page 5-26 are
simplified block diagrams of the receiver functional group for 2-port and 4-port analyzers
respectively.
In this section the following assemblies are described:
• A42–A45 35-dB Receiver Step Attenuators (Optional)
• A33 Reference Mixer Switch
• A23 and A24 Mixer Bricks
• A20 IF Multiplexer Board
• A12 SPAM Board (Analog Description)
A42–A45 35-dB Receiver Step Attenuators (Optional)

A step attenuator is placed in the signal path of each of the A, B, C, and D receiver inputs
for 4-port models and A and B receiver inputs for 2-port models.
These 35-dB step attenuators provide power control for the input signals to the mixer
bricks. They are electro-mechanical step attenuators that provide 0 to 35 dB of attenuation
in 5-dB steps. These attenuators are controlled by the A17 CPU board.
A33 Reference Mixer Switch

The A33 reference mixer switch is placed in the R1 reference signal path allowing this
reference signal to be switched in and out of the signal path when an external mixer is
being used in test configuration.
An external mixer is placed in measurement configuration between REFERENCE 1
SOURCE OUT and RCVR R1 IN where there would normally be a front panel jumper. The
A33 reference mixer switch can then be used to switch this external mixer in and out of the
measurement configuration without having to manually connect/disconnect the external
mixer and remove/replace the front panel jumper.
A23 and A24 Mixer Bricks

Each of these assemblies contain four identical amplifiers, mixers, and filters for a total of
eight of each. For 2-port models, only the A23 mixer brick is present; the A24 mixer brick is
omitted since only four channels are needed.
For frequencies at or above 53 MHz, the test signals (channels A, B, C, and D for 4-port
models and A and B for 2-port models) and the reference signals (channels R1, R2, R3, and
R4 for 4-port models and R1 and R2 for 2-port models) are mixed with a synthesized source
signal that is 7.606 MHz higher than the source incident signal to produce a 7.606 MHz IF
signal. This synthesized source comes from the A21 HMA26.5 (via the A22 splitter for
4-port models).
At frequencies below 53 MHz, the IF is set to 2.535 MHz.

Receiver Group Operation N5241A/42A
The analog IF signal is sent to the A20 IF multiplexer board where it is processed and then
sent to the A12 SPAM board.
The A23 mixer brick sends the EXT TSET DRIVE LO OUT signal to a rear-panel
connector for use with an external test set. This same output connector on the A24 mixer
brick is terminated.
A20 IF Multiplexer Board

This assembly provides pulse modulation capability and routes the IF signal out through
the rear panel connectors for external use and routes external signals in through rear
panel connectors to be included in the signal processing.
In this assembly, on 4-port models, the R1, R2, R3, and R4 reference signals are combined
to create one reference signal, R. On 2-port models the R1 and R2 reference signals are not
combined.
The analog IF signals (A, B, C, D, and R for 4-port models and A, B, R1, and R2 for 2-port
models) are sent to the A12 SPAM board where they are converted to digital information.
Rear Panel Interconnects

The A20 IF multiplexer board includes the following rear panel interconnects.
A DB-15 female connector. Pin assignments are listed in Table 5-6 on

PULSE I/O
page 5-23.

Table 5-6 PULSE I/O Connector Pin Assignments
Pin Name Description
1 IFGateAin IF pulse gate input A (TTL)
2 IFGateBin IF pulse gate input B (TTL)
3 IFGateCin IF pulse gate input C (TTL)
4 IFGateDin IF pulse gate input D (TTL)
5 IFGateRin IF pulse gate input R (TTL)
6 DCOM Digital ground
7 PulseSyncIn Pulse generator synchronization trigger input (TTL)
8 RFPulseModIn RF source pulse modulation drive input (TTL)
10 Pulse1Out Programmable pulse train output #1 (TTL)
14 NC No connect

A12 SPAM Board (Analog Description)

The A12 SPAM board contains digital and analog circuitry. For digital descriptions, refer
to “A12 SPAM Board (Digital Description)” on page 5-32.
In this assembly, the IF signals (A, B, C, D, and R for 4-port models and A, B, R1, and R2
for 2-port models) from the A20 IF multiplexer board go through a gain stage where small
signals are amplified to ensure that they can be detected by the analog-to-digital converter
(ADC).
All input signals are sampled simultaneously by the ADCs, where they are converted to
digital form. The ADC conversions are triggered by timing signals from the digital signal
processor (DSP) in response to commands from the central processing unit (CPU). The
digitized data is processed into magnitude and phase data by the DSP and sent to the CPU
random access memory (RAM) by way of the peripheral component interconnect (PCI) bus.
The processed and formatted data is finally routed to the display, and to the
general-purpose interface bus (GPIB) for remote operation. Refer to “Digital Processing
and Digital Control Group Operation” on page 5-29 for more information on signal
processing.

Figure 5-6 4-Port Receiver Group

Figure 5-7 2-Port Receiver Group

N5241A/42A Noise Measurement Group Operation (Option 029)
Noise Measurement Group Operation (Option 029)

The noise measurement group does something. Figure 5-8 on page 5-28 is a simplified
block diagram of the noise measurement group. Although the 4-port configuration is
shown, the 2-port configuration is very similar. Refer to the detailed block diagrams at the
end of Chapter 4 if necessary.
In this section the following assemblies are described:
• A52 and A53 Test Port 1 and 2 Option 029 Switches
• A54 Test Port 2 Option 029 Bridge
• A55 Noise Downconverter
• A7 Noise Receiver Board
A52 and A53 Test Port 1 and 2 Option 029 Switches

Description here.
A54 Test Port 2 Option 029 Bridge

Description here.
A55 Noise Downconverter

Description here.
A7 Noise Receiver Board

Description here.

Noise Measurement Group Operation (Option 029) N5241A/42A
Figure 5-8 Noise Measurement Group (Option 029)

N5241A/42A Digital Processing and Digital Control Group Operation
Digital Processing and Digital Control Group Operation

The digital processor and control group provides digital control for the entire analyzer. It
provides:
• front panel operation,
• output to the display,
• math processing functions, and
• communications between the analyzer and an external controller or peripherals.
A block diagram of the digital control functional group is shown in Figure 5-9 on page 5-30.
The digital control functional group consists of two subgroups:
• Front Panel Subgroup
— A1 Front Panel Display Board
— A2 USB Board
— A3 Display Assembly
— Keypad Assembly
— A14 system motherboard
• Data Acquisition and Processing Subgroup
— A12 SPAM Board (Digital Description)
— A17 CPU Board
— A51 Hard Disk Drive

Digital Processing and Digital Control Group Operation N5241A/42A
Figure 5-9 Digital Processing and Digital Control Group

Front Panel Subgroup

The front panel subgroup contains the following assemblies:
• A1 Front Panel Display Board
• A2 USB Board
• A3 Display Assembly
• Keypad Assembly
A1 Front Panel Display Board

The A1 front panel display board detects and decodes user inputs from the keypad
assembly and front panel knob, and transmits them to the A17 CPU board by way of the
A14 system motherboard. It also decodes video data from the video processor on the
A17 CPU board and supplies this to the A3 display assembly. Power from the power bus on
the A14 system motherboard is buffered and routed to the keypad assembly and the
A3 display assembly. All data and power signals are routed through a single cable
connector to the A14 system motherboard.
The A1 front panel interface board also includes a speaker that emits the audio signals
received from the A17 CPU board.
A2 USB Board
This board provides four universal serial bus (USB) jacks that are industry standard 4-pin
connectors allowing multiple USB devices to be connected to the analyzer’s front panel.
A3 Display Assembly
The A3 display assembly contains an 10-inch LCD with associated drive circuitry and
backlight inverter. Two cables between the A3 display assembly and the A1 front panel
display board provide all necessary power and data for normal operation. The two cables
are:
1. A cable to the inverter that supplies buffered power.
2. A cable to the display circuitry that supplies decoded data from the video processor on
the A17 CPU board and the necessary drive circuit power. The video data received from
the A17 CPU board includes the following:
• digital TTL horizontal sync • digital TTL red video • blanking
• digital TTL vertical sync • digital TTL green video • data clock
• digital TTL blue video
Keypad Assembly
The keypad assembly provides user interface to the analyzer. The front panel rotary pulse
generator (RPG) knob is not electrically connected to the keypad, but rather provides user
inputs directly to the front panel processor.

Digital Processing and Digital Control Group Operation N5241A/42A
Data Acquisition and Processing Subgroup

The data acquisition and processing subgroup contain the following assemblies. See Figure
5-9 on page 5-30.
• A12 SPAM Board (Digital Description)
• A17 CPU Board (including rear-panel interconnects)
• A51 Hard Disk Drive
A12 SPAM Board (Digital Description)

The A12 SPAM board contains digital and analog circuitry. For analog descriptions, refer
to “A12 SPAM Board (Analog Description)” on page 5-24.
The digital signal processor (DSP) receives digitized data from the digital circuitry of the
A12 SPAM board. It computes discrete Fourier transforms to extract the complex phase
and magnitude data from the analog IF signal. The resulting raw data is written into the
main random access memory (RAM). The data taking sequence is triggered either
externally from the rear panel or by firmware on the A17 CPU board.
A17 CPU Board

The A17 CPU board contains the circuitry to control the operation of the analyzer. Some of
the components include the central processing unit (CPU), memory (EEPROM, ROM,
RAM), bus lines to other board assemblies, and connections to the rear panel. Some of the
main components are described next:
• CPU
• Main RAM
• Rear Panel Interconnects
CPU The central processing unit (CPU) is a microprocessor that maintains digital control
over the entire instrument through the instrument bus. The CPU receives external control
information from the keypad, any USB device, LAN or GPIB, and performs processing and
formatting operations on the raw data in the main RAM. It controls the DSP, the video
processor, and the interconnect port interfaces. In addition, when the analyzer is in the
system controller mode, the CPU controls peripheral devices through the peripheral port
interfaces.
Front panel settings are stored in SRAM, with a battery providing at least five years of
backup storage when external power is off.
Main RAM The main random access memory (RAM) is shared memory for the CPU and
the DSP. It stores the raw data received from the DSP while additional calculations are
performed on it by the CPU. The CPU reads the resulting formatted data from the main
RAM, converts it to a user-definable display format, and writes this to the video processor
for display.

Rear Panel Interconnects The rear panel includes the following interfaces:
USB x4 Four universal serial bus (USB) jacks (industry standard 4-pin connectors).
GPIB (0)
A 24-pin, female, type D-24 connector that meets IEEE-488 standards.
Controller
GPIB (1)
A 24-pin, female, type D-24 connector that meets IEEE-488 standards.
Talker/Listener
A standard 8-pin, 10/100BaseT, Ethernet connection. It auto selects between

LAN
the two data rates.
A 15-pin, female, D-sub connector that provides a video output of the

Display (VGA)
analyzer display that can be viewed on an external VGA monitor.
A51 Hard Disk Drive

The hard disk drive assembly (HDDA) is an integrated development environment (IDE)
data storage device which is connected directly to, and physically mounted within the
enclosure of, the A17 CPU board. The full operating system and firmware for the network
analyzer is stored on the A51 hard disk drive.

Power Supply Group Operation N5241A/42A
Power Supply Group Operation

The A16 power supply assembly is a switching power supply operating at 103 kHz
switching frequency. The input power ranges for the power supply are 90 to 132 Vac or
195 to 250 Vac. The power supply automatically senses the input voltage and switches
between these two ranges.
WARNING Supply voltages which oscillate between the two normal input
ranges of the autoranging line voltage input will damage the power
supply. In rare cases, this damage has become a user safety concern.
If unstable power levels are expected, the analyzer input power must
be buffered by a line conditioner.
The dc output voltages of the A16 power supply assembly are:

• +15 V analog
• +9 V analog
• +3.3 V analog
• +5.2 V analog
• +15 V standby (always on)
• +32 V analog
• −15 V analog
• −5.2 V analog
• −7 V analog
• +5.1 V standby
• +12 V digital
• +3.35 V digital
• +5.1 V digital
The +15 V standby supply remains on continuously whenever the power supply is plugged
in. This supply is used to provide power to front panel LEDs and CPU components when
the analyzer is turned off.

6 Replaceable Parts

Replaceable Parts PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers

This chapter:
• identifies the replaceable parts for the Agilent PNA series microwave network analyzer.
• includes several tables and illustrations to assist you in identifying the correct part for
your analyzer.
• contains ordering information for new assemblies and rebuilt-exchange assemblies.
Chapter Six at-a-Glance
How to order a replaceable part from Agilent

Ordering Information Page 6-3
Technologies.
Assembly Replacement The correct sequence for replacing a defective

Page 6-3
Sequence assembly.
The definition of a rebuilt-exchange assembly.

Rebuilt-Exchange Assemblies The procedure for replacing and returning a Page 6-4
defective assembly to Agilent Technologies.
Tables that list the assemblies by reference

designator with their associated part number
and description.
Illustrations that indicate the location of each of
the replaceable parts in your analyzer:
Replaceable Parts Listings • Assemblies (front panel, top, and bottom) Page 6-5
• Cables (top and bottom)

• Hardware (top, bottom, internal, external,
and, rear panel)
• Miscellaneous replaceable parts

PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers Replaceable Parts
N5241A/42A Ordering Information
Ordering Information
To order a part listed in the replaceable parts lists:
• include the part number
• indicate the quantity required
• Contact Agilent Technologies for instructions on where to send the order. Refer to
“Contacting Agilent” on page 2-13.
To order a part that is not listed in the replaceable parts lists:
• include the instrument model number and complete instrument serial number
• include the description and function of the part
• indicate the quantity required
• Contact Agilent Technologies for instructions on where to send the order. Refer to
Assembly Replacement Sequence

The following steps describe how to replace an assembly in the network analyzer.
Step 1. Identify the faulty group. Begin with Chapter 4, “Troubleshooting.” Follow up
with the appropriate troubleshooting chapter that identifies the faulty assembly.
Step 2. Order a replacement assembly. Refer to this chapter.
Step 3. Replace the faulty assembly and determine what adjustments are necessary.
Refer to Chapter 7, “Repair and Replacement Procedures.”
Step 4. Perform the necessary adjustments. Refer to Chapter 3, “Tests and Adjustments.”
Step 5. Perform the necessary performance tests. Refer to Chapter 3, “Tests and
Adjustments.”

Rebuilt-Exchange Assemblies N5241A/42A
Rebuilt-Exchange Assemblies
Under the rebuilt-exchange assembly program:
• Certain factory-repaired and tested assemblies are available on a trade-in basis.
• Exchange assemblies are offered for lower cost than a new assembly, but meet all
factory specifications required of a new assembly.
• The defective assembly must be returned for credit under the terms of the
rebuilt-exchange assembly program.
• Spare assembly stock desired should be ordered using the new assembly part number.
Figure 6-1 Module Exchange Procedure

N5241A/42A Replaceable Parts Listings
Replaceable Parts Listings

This section contains the replacement part numbers and their descriptions for your
Agilent microwave PNA. You can find the locations of replaceable parts in this section:
• listed by reference designator in Table 6-1, or
• listed by the type of part in Table 6-2.
Table 6-1 Part Number Location by Reference Designator
Reference
Designator Description Location
A1 Front panel interface board
“Front Panel Assembly, Back Side, All
A2 USB board
Options” on page 6-12
A3 Display assembly
A4 13.5 GHz synthesizer board
A5 26.5 GHz source board
A6 Not used
A7 Noise receiver board
A8 26.5 GHz source board
A9 Not used
A10 Frequency reference board “Top Assemblies, All Options” on
A11 13.5 GHz synthesizer board page 6-14
A12 Signal processing ADC module (SPAM) board

A13 13.5 GHz synthesizer board
A14 System motherboard
A15 Midplane board
A16 Power supply
A17 CPU board
A18 GPIB board
A19 Test set motherboard
A20 IF multiplexer board
A21 LO Multiplier/amplifier 26.5 (HMA26.5)
A22 Splitter
“Bottom Assemblies, Standard 4-Port
A23 Mixer brick
Configuration, Option 400” on page 6-40
A24 Mixer brick
A25 Port 1 bridge
A26 Port 3 bridge
A27 Port 4 bridge

Replaceable Parts Listings N5241A/42A
Table 6-1 Part Number Location by Reference Designator (Continued)

Reference
Designator Description Location
A28 Port 2 bridge
A29 Port 1 port coupler
A30 Port 3 port coupler “Bottom Assemblies, Standard 4-Port
A31 Port 4 port coupler Configuration, Option 400” on page 6-40
A32 Port 2 port coupler

A33 Reference mixer switch
A34 Port 1 source step attenuator
A38 Port 1 bias tee
A39 Port 3 bias tee “Bottom Assemblies, 4-Port, Option 419
A40 Port 4 bias tee (including Option 029)” on page 6-46
A41 Port 2 bias tee

A42 Port 1 receiver step attenuator
A46 Port 1 source bypass switch
“Bottom Assemblies, 4-Port, Option 423
(including Option 029)” on page 6-58
A50 Port 1 combiner
“Top Assemblies, All Options” on
A51 Hard disk drive
page 6-14
A52 Port 1 noise bypass switch
A53 Port 2 noise bypass switch “Bottom Assemblies, 4-Port, Option 423
A54 Port 2 noise bridge (including Option 029)” on page 6-58
A55 Noise down converter

Table 6-2 Part Number Location by Type of Part
Type of Part Location
• “Front Panel Assembly, Front Side, All Options” on page 6-10
• “Front Panel Assembly, Back Side, All Options” on page 6-12
• “Top Assemblies, All Options” on page 6-14
Assemblies
• “Rear Panel Assembly, All Options” on page 6-80

Table 6-2 Part Number Location by Type of Part (Continued)
• “Top Cables, All Cables—All Options” on page 6-16

• “Bottom RF Cables, 2-Port, Option 219 with Option 029” on page 6-28
• “Bottom RF Cables, 2-Port, Option 224 with Option 029” on page 6-36
• “Bottom RF Cables, 4-Port, Option 419 without Option 029 (Ports 1 and 2)” on page 6-48
• “Bottom RF Cables, 4-Port, Option 419 with Option 029 (Ports 1 and 2)” on page 6-50
Cables • “Bottom RF Cables, 4-Port, Option 419 without Option 029 (Ports 3 and 4)” on page 6-52
• “Bottom Ribbon Cables and Wire Harnesses, Standard 2-Port Configuration, Option 200”
on page 6-22
• “Bottom Ribbon Cables and Wire Harnesses, 2-Port, Option 219 (including Option 029)”
on page 6-30
on page 6-38
• “Bottom Ribbon Cables and Wire Harnesses, Standard 4-Port Configuration, Option 400”
on page 6-44
on page 6-56
on page 6-68

Table 6-2 Part Number Location by Type of Part (Continued)
• “Top Hardware and Miscellaneous Parts, All Options” on page 6-70

• “Bottom Hardware and Miscellaneous Parts, All Options Except 029” on page 6-72
• “Bottom Hardware and Miscellaneous Parts, Option 029” on page 6-74
Hardware
• “Internal Hardware and Miscellaneous Parts, All Options” on page 6-76
• “External Hardware and Miscellaneous Parts, All Options” on page 6-78
• “Rear Panel Assembly, All Options” on page 6-80
• Service Tools on page 6-82

• Documentation on page 6-82
• GPIB Cables/GPIB Adapter on page 6-82
• Fuses on page 6-82
• ESD Supplies on page 6-83
Miscellaneous
• Memory Modules on page 6-82
• Upgrade Kits orderable by Model Number on page 6-83
• USB Accessories on page 6-83
• Rack Mount Kits and Handle Kits on page 6-83
• Touch-up Paint on page 6-84

Front Panel Assembly, Front Side, All Options

Reference
Designator Part Number Qty Description
N5242-20101 1 Front frame assembly
RFI gasket material, 1.2 meters in length
8160-0660 1.2 m
(Must be ordered separately from front frame assembly.)
0515-0943 12 Machine screw, M4.0 x 12 flat head (To attach front frame to chassis.)
a 5041-9174 2 Trim strip, filler (For analyzers without handles.)
N5242-80005 1 Keypad overlay

N5242-00012 Lower front dress panel, 2-port
1
N5242-00013 Lower front dress panel, 4-port
N5242-80001 Front panel overlay, 2-port (Options 200 and 219 without 029)
N5242-80002 Front panel overlay, 2-port (Option 224 without 029)
N5242-80003 Front panel overlay, 4-port (all options without 029)
1
N5242-80010 Front panel overlay, 2-port (Option 219 with 029)
N5242-80011 Front panel overlay, 2-port (Option 224 with 029)
N5242-80012 Front panel overlay, 4-port (all options with 029)
Machine screw, M3.0 x 6 flat head (To attach lower dress panel to
0515-1227 10
front frame.)
N5242-80007 1 Power switch overlay
W1312-40017 1 Front (RPG) knob
N5242-80006 1 Nameplate (all models)

a. Refer to “Rack Mount Kits and Handle Kits” on page 6-83 for part numbers of complete rack mount kits.

Figure 6-2 Front Panel Assembly, Front Side, All Options

Front Panel Assembly, Back Side, All Options

Reference
N5240-60053
A1a Was N5240-60046
1 Front panel interface board (until 11-15-07)
A2 N5240-60047 1 USB board

N5242-40001 1 Keypad assembly
Machine screw, M3.0 x 6 pan head (9 to attach front panel interface board
0515-0430 12
to front frame and 3 to attach display cable to display hold down bracket.)
a N5242-40009
1 Touch screen rubber boot
Was N5242-40003
a 2090-0973
1 Touch screen, 10.4 inch
Was 2090-0930
Machine screw, M3.0 x 8 pan head (6 to attach display to front frame and
0515-0372 10
4 to attach USB board to front frame.)
E6601-61028 1 Cable, A3 front panel interface board to inverter board
Machine screw, M2.5 x 6 pan head (To attach inverter board and USB
0515-1934 4
controller board to display hold down bracket.)
0950-4420 1 Inverter board
N5230-00017 1 Inverter Shield
a 0960-2804
1 Touch screen controller board
Was 0960-2535
11 Machine screw, M3.0 x 5 flat head (To attach power switch assembly to
0515-1521 2
front frame.)
12 N5240-60050 1 Power switch board
13 N5240-40001 1 Power button keypad
14 a W1312-60047
1 Touch screen controller board cable harness (until 11-15-07)
Was 8121-1452
15 8121-1451 1 Power switch cable harness

16 1400-0510 2 Cable clamp (with adhesive backing)
A3 Display assembly
17 Machine screw, M3.0 x 10 pan head (To attach LCD display to hold down
0515-0374 4
bracket.)
18 2090-0883 1 LCD display
19 N5242-20121 4 Spacers (For display hold down bracket standoffs.)
20 a N5242-00034
1 LCD display hold down bracket (until 11-15-07)
Was N5242-00008
21 N5242-60043 1 Display cable

a. The reference designators in the following list have all had part number changes, as indicated in
the table. If you replace the old part number of a reference designator in the list with its new part
number, you must also replace ALL of the other old part numbers of reference designators in the
list with their new part numbers: A1, 3, 4, 9, 13, and 19.

Figure 6-3 Front Panel Assembly, Back Side, All Options

Top Assemblies, All Options

Reference
A4 N5230-60002 1 13.5 GHz (source 1) synthesizer board
A5 5087-7307 1 26.5 GHz source (1) board
A6 Not used.
A7 N5242-60098 1 Noise receiver board (Included only with Option 029.)
26.5 GHz source (2) board (On 2-port models, this assembly is
A8 5087-7307 1
included only with Option 224.)
A9 Not used.
A10 N5240-60042 1 Frequency reference board
A11 N5230-60002 1 13.5 GHz (LO) synthesizer board
N5264-60005
A12 1 Signal Processing ADC Module (SPAM) board
Was N5240-60041
13.5 GHz (source 2) synthesizer board (On 2-port models, this

A13 N5230-60002 1
assembly is included only with Option 224.)
A14 N5240-60044 1 System motherboard
A15 W1312-60002 1 Midplane board
0950-4900
A16 1 Power supply
Replaces 0950-4457
A17 W1312-60068a 1 CPU board assembly, 2.0 GHz, 4 GB DDR SDRAM
A18 N5240-60052 1 GPIB board

Hard disk drive (HDD) to be used with the older 1.6 GHz CPU
N5242-60035b board
A51 1
c Hard disk drive assembly (HDDA) to be used with the 2.0 GHz
N5242-60044 CPU board
1420-0356 1 Battery, lithium manganese dioxide, 3V, 0.22A-hr.d
a. Replacing the older 1.6 GHz CPU board with this new 2.0 GHz CPU board requires ordering and
installing a new A51 hard disk drive. The 1.6 GHz CPU board is no longer available.
b. The A51 hard disk drive for the 1.6 GHz CPU board is located inside the A17 CPU board assembly.
Refer to “Removing and Replacing the A51 Hard Disk Drive (HDDA)” on page 7-48 for an
illustration.
c. The A51 hard disk drive for the 2.0 GHz CPU board plugs into the A17 CPU board assembly from the
rear panel and is replaced as an entire assembly. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the A51 Hard
Disk Drive (HDDA)” on page 7-48 for an illustration.
d. The lithium battery is located inside the A17 CPU board assembly. Refer to “Removing and Replacing
the Lithium Battery” on page 7-64 for an illustration.

Figure 6-4 Top Assemblies, All Options

Top Cables, All Cables—All Options

Reference
Designator Typea Part Number Qty Description
A4 13.5 GHz (source 1) synthesizer board J1207
W1 SR N5242-20109 1
to A5 26.5 GHz source (1) board P1
A13 13.5 GHz (source 2) synthesizer board J1207
W2 SR N5242-20124 1
to A8 26.5 GHz source (2) board P1
A11 13.5 GHz (LO) synthesizer board J1207
W41 SR N5242-20110 1
to A21 HMA26.5
A20 IF multiplexer board P3
W59 F N5242-60012 1
to A12 SPAM board J1
W60 F N5242-60013 1
W61 F N5242-60014 1
W62 F N5242-60015 1
W63 F N5242-60016 1
A10 frequency reference board J4
W64 F N5242-60027 1
W65 F N5242-60028 1
to A11 13.5 GHz (LO) synthesizer board J5
W66 F N5242-60029 1
to A4 13.5 GHz (source 1) synthesizer board J5
W67 F N5242-60030 1
to A13 13.5 GHz (source 2) synthesizer board J5
W68
to rear-panel 10 MHz REF OUT
F 8120-5063 2
Rear-panel 10 MHz REF IN
W69
to A10 frequency reference board J2
A55 noise downconverter
W141 SR N5242-20129 1
to A7 noise receiver board LO
A55 noise downconverter J4
W142 F N5242-60041 1
to A7 noise receiver board LO
A55 noise downconverter
W143 SR N5242-20130 1
to A7 noise receiver board P2
a. SR = semirigid coaxial cable; F = flexible coaxial cable; nR = n wires in a ribbon (flat) cable; nW = n wires in a wire harness

Figure 6-5 Top Cables, All Cables—All Options

Bottom Assemblies, Standard 2-Port Configuration, Option 200

Reference
Designator Part Numbera Qty Description
A19 N5240-60043 1 Test set motherboard
A20 N5240-60045 1 IF multiplexer board
A21 5087-7711 1 LO Multiplier/amplifier 26.5 (HMA26.5)
5087-7308
A23 1 Mixer brick
5087-6308
A25 5087-7729 Test port 1 bridge
2
A28 Was 5087-7315 Test port 2 bridge
A29 Test port 1 coupler
5087-7710 2
A33 N5240-60048 1 Reference mixer switch
N5240-60051 2 Front panel LED board
a. Part numbers in italic typeface are for rebuilt exchange assemblies. Refer to “Rebuilt-Exchange Assemblies” on page 6-4.

Figure 6-6 Bottom Assemblies, Standard 2-Port Configuration, Option 200

Bottom RF Cables, Standard 2-Port Configuration, Option 200

Reference
W3 SR N5242-20091 1 A5 source (1) to W4
W4 SR N5242-20050 1 W3 to A25 port 1 bridge
W9 SR N5242-20092 1 A5 source (1) to W10
W11 SR N5242-20054 1 A25 port 1 bridge to front-panel Port 1 SOURCE OUT
W13 SR N5242-20011 1 A25 port 1 bridge to A33 reference mixer switch
W27 SR N5242-20079 1 A28 port 2 bridge to front-panel REF 2 SOURCE OUT
W30 SR E8356-20072 6 Front panel jumper
W31 SR N5242-20056 1 Port 1 RCVR A IN to A23 mixer brick (A)
W34 SR N5242-20062 1 Port 2 RCVR B IN to A23 mixer brick (B)
W35 SR N5242-20043 1 A33 reference mixer switch to front-panel REF 1 SOURCE OUT
W36 SR N5242-20042 1 REF 1 RCVR R1 IN to A33 reference mixer switch
W40 SR N5242-20049 1 REF 2 RCVR R2 IN to A23 mixer brick (R2)
W41 SR N5242-20110 1 A11 13.5 GHz synthesizer to A21 HMA26.5
W45 SR N5242-20093 1 A8 source (1) to W46
W46 SR N5242-20090 1 W46 to rear-panel EXT TSET DRIVE RF OUT (J6)
W47 SR N5242-20089 1 A23 mixer brick to EXT TSET DRIVE LO OUT (J5)
W48 SR N5242-20076 1 A33 reference mixer switch to A23 mixer brick (R1)
W51 F N5242-60017 1 A23 mixer brick (A) to A20 IF multiplexer (P1)
W54 F N5242-60018 1 A23 mixer brick (B) to A20 IF multiplexer (P201)
W59 F N5242-60012 1 A20 IF multiplexer (P3) to A12 SPAM (J1)
W64 F N5242-60025 1 A23 mixer brick (R1) to A20 IF multiplexer (P601)
W70 SR N5242-20123 1 A21 HMA26.5 to A23 mixer brick
W114 SR N5242-20111 1 Port 1 CPLR THRU to A29 port 1 coupler
W115 SR N5242-20113 1 A29 port 1 coupler to front-panel Port 1 CPLR ARM
a. SR = semirigid coaxial cable; F = flexible coaxial cable

Figure 6-7 Bottom RF Cables, Standard 2-Port Configuration, Option 200

Bottom Ribbon Cables and Wire Harnesses, Standard 2-Port

Configuration, Option 200
Reference
Designator Typea Part Number Description
4W N5242-60002 A19 test set motherboard J3 to A33 reference mixer switch
3W N5242-60009 A19 test set motherboard J221 to port 1 LED board J1
10R N5242-60005 Rear-panel PWR I/O to A19 test set motherboard J301
16R N5242-60006 A19 test set motherboard J212 to A23 mixer brick (1)
24R N5242-60011 A19 test set motherboard J209 to A21 HMA26.5

A14 system motherboard J1 to A19 test set motherboard J1 to
100R N5242-60004
A20 IF multiplexer board J1
36R 8121-0834 Rear-panel HANDLER I/O to A19 test set motherboard J400
a. nR = n wires in a ribbon (flat) cable; nW = n wires in a wire harness

Figure 6-8 Bottom Ribbon Cables and Wire Harnesses, Standard 2-Port

Bottom Assemblies, 2-Port, Option 219 (including Option 029)

Reference
5087-7139
A22 1 Splitter (Option 029 only)
5087-6139
5087-7308
A23 1 Mixer brick
5087-6308
2
5087-7710 2
A34 Test port 1 source attenuator
33321-60070 2
A38 Test port 1 bias tee (includes wire harness)
5087-7239 2
A42 Port 1 receiver attenuator
33321-60066 2
A52 N1811-60008 1 Test port 1 switch (Option 029 only)
5087-7729
A54 1 Test port 2 bridge (Option 029 only)
Was 5087-7315
A55 5087-7316 1 Noise downconverter (Option 029 only)

Figure 6-9 Bottom Assemblies, 2-Port, Option 219 (including Option 029)

Bottom RF Cables, 2-Port, Option 219 without Option 029

Reference
W3 SR N5242-20091 1 A5 source (1) to W4
W9 SR N5242-20092 1 A5 source (1) to W10
W36 SR N5242-20042 1 Front-panel REF 1 RCVR R1 IN to A33 reference mixer switch
W40 SR N5242-20049 1 Front-panel REF 2 RCVR R2 IN to A23 mixer brick (R2)
W45 SR N5242-20093 1 A8 source (1) to W46
W47 SR N5242-20089 1 A23 mixer brick to rear-panel EXT TSET DRIVE LO OUT (J5)
W71 SR N5242-20005 1 A25 port 1 bridge to A34 port 1 source attenuator
W72 SR N5242-20038 1 A34 port 1 source attenuator to front-panel Port 1 SOURCE OUT
W73 SR N5242-20039 1 Front-panel Port 1 CPLR THRU to A38 port 1 bias tee
W87 SR N5242-20041 1 Front-panel Port 1 RCVR A IN to A42 port 1 receiver attenuator
W88 SR N5242-20010 1 A42 port 1 receiver attenuator to A23 mixer brick (A)
W93 SR N5242-20047 1 Front-panel Port 2 RCVR B IN to A45 port 2 receiver attenuator
W94 SR N5242-20016 1 A45 port 2 receiver attenuator to A23 mixer brick (B)
W119 SR N5242-20115 1 A38 port 1 bias tee to A29 port 1 coupler

Figure 6-10 Bottom RF Cables, 2-Port, Option 219 without Option 029

Bottom RF Cables, 2-Port, Option 219 with Option 029

Reference
W3 SR N5242-20091 1 A5 source (1) to W4
W9 SR N5242-20092 1 A5 source (1) to W10
W42 SR N5242-20015 1 A21 HMA26.5 to A22 splitter
W43 SR N5242-20013 1 A22 splitter to A23 mixer brick
W45 SR N5242-20093 1 A8 source (1) to W46
W122 SR N5242-20128 1 A34 port 1 source attenuator to A52 port 1 bypass switch
W123 SR N5242-20127 1 A52 port 1 bypass switch to front-panel Port 1 SOURCE OUT
W124 SR N5242-20125 1 Front-panel Port 1 CPLR THRU to A52 port 1 bypass switch
W125 SR N5242-20126 1 A52 port 1 bypass switch to A38 port 1 bypass tee
W129 SR N5242-20117 1 A53 port 2 bypass switch to A54 port 2 bridge
W131 SR 1250-3576 1 Adapter, coax, straight, m-m, 50 ohm
W139 SR N5242-20131 1 A22 splitter to A55 noise downconverter

Reference
W141 SR N5242-20129 1 A55 noise downconverter to A7 noise receiver board LO
W142 F N5242-20041 1 A55 noise downconverter J4 to A7 noise receiver board P2
W143 SR N5242-20130 1 A55 noise downconverter to A7 noise receiver board RF
Figure 6-11 Bottom RF Cables, 2-Port, Option 219 with Option 029

Bottom Ribbon Cables and Wire Harnesses, 2-Port, Option 219

(including Option 029)
Reference
14R N5242-60008 A19 test set motherboard J201 to A34 port 1 source attenuator
10R N5242-60007 A19 test set motherboard J205 to A42 port 1 receiver attenuator
2W 8121-0836 A19 test set motherboard J541 to A38 port 1 bias tee
11 14R N5242-60008 A19 test set motherboard J204 to A37 port 2 source attenuator
12 24R N5242-60011 A19 test set motherboard J209 to A21 HMA26.5

13 100R N5242-60004
14 36R 8121-0834 Rear-panel HANDLER I/O to A19 test set motherboard J400
A19 test set motherboard J548
15 30R N5242-60033
to A55 noise downconverter J1
P/O A52 port 1 bypass switch. Refer to“Bottom Assemblies, 2-Port, Option 219 (including Option
16
029)” on page 6-24.
17
029)” on page 6-24.

Figure 6-12 Bottom Ribbon Cables and Wire Harnesses, 2-Port, Option 219


Reference
5087-7139
A22 1 Splitter (Option 029 only)
5087-6139
5087-7308
A23 1 Mixer brick
5087-6308
2
5087-7710 2
33321-60070 2
5087-7239 2
33321-60066 2
A47 N1811-60006 3 SRC 2 OUT 1 source bypass switch
A50 5087-7729 1 Combiner
5087-7729
Was 5087-7315


Bottom RF Cables, 2-Port, Option 224 without Option 029

Reference
W3 SR N5242-20091 1 A5 source (1) to W95
W5 SR N5242-20091 1 A8 source (2) to W101
W7 SR N5242-20092 1 A8 source (2) to W115
W9 SR N5242-20092 1 A5 source (1) to W109
W45 SR N5242-20093 1 A8 source (1) to W46
W67 SR N5242-20106 1 A47 SRC 2 OUT 1 switch to front-panel SRC 2 OUT 1
W68 SR N5242-20107 1 W7 to SRC 2 OUT 2
W73 SR N5242-20039 1 Port 1 CPLR THRU to A38 port 1 bias tee
W87 SR N5242-20041 1 Port 1 RCVR A IN to A42 port 1 receiver attenuator
W93 SR N5242-20047 1 Port 2 RCVR B IN to A45 port 2 receiver attenuator
W95 SR N5242-20020 1 W3 to A46 port 1 source bypass switch
W96 SR N5242-20007 1 A46 port 1 source bypass switch to A25 port 1 bridge
W97 SR N5242-20086 1 A46 port 1 source bypass switch to PORT 1 SW SRC OUT (J11)
W98 SR N5242-20087 1 Rear-panel PORT 1 COMB THRU IN (J10) to A50 combiner
W99 SR N5242-20088 1 Rear-panel PORT 1 COMB ARM IN (J9) to A50 combiner
W100 SR N5242-20008 1 A50 combiner to A46 port 1 source bypass switch
W101 SR N5242-20017 1 W5 to A47 SRC 2 source bypass switch
W103 SR N5242-20081 1 A47 SRC 2 source bypass switch to SRC 2 SW SRC OUT (J8)
W104 SR N5242-20080 1 Rear-panel PORT 3 SW TSET IN (J7) to A47 SRC 2 source bypass switch
W112 SR N5242-20085 1 Rear-panel PORT 2 SW TSET IN (J1) to A49 port 2 source bypass switch
W113 SR E8356-20072 3 Rear panel jumper

Reference
Figure 6-14 Bottom RF Cables, 2-Port, Option 224 without Option 029

Bottom RF Cables, 2-Port, Option 224 with Option 029

Reference
W3 SR N5242-20091 1 A5 source (1) to W95
W5 SR N5242-20091 1 A8 source (2) to W101
W7 SR N5242-20092 1 A8 source (2) to W115
W9 SR N5242-20092 1 A5 source (1) to W109
W45 SR N5242-20093 1 A8 source (1) to W46
W67 SR N5242-20106 1 A47 SRC 2 OUT 1 switch to front-panel SRC 2 OUT 1
W68 SR N5242-20107 1 W7 to SRC 2 OUT 2
W101 SR N5242-20017 1 W5 to A47 SRC 2 source bypass switch
W103 SR N5242-20081 1 A47 SRC 2 source bypass switch to SRC 2 SW SRC OUT (J8)
W104 SR N5242-20080 1 Rear-panel PORT 3 SW TSET IN (J7) to A47 SRC 2 source bypass switch

Reference
W139 SR N5242-20131 1 A22 splitter to A55 noise downconverter
Figure 6-15 Bottom RF Cables, 2-Port, Option 224 with Option 029


Reference
A19 test set motherboard J102 to A47 SRC 2 OUT 1 source bypass
4W N5242-60003
switch
4W N5242-60003 A19 test set motherboard J101 to A46 port 1 source bypass switch
11 2W 8121-0836 A19 test set motherboard J544 to A41 port 2 bias tee
12 10R N5242-60007 A19 test set motherboard J208 to A45 port 2 receiver attenuator
14 4W N5242-60003 A19 test set motherboard J104 to A49 port 2 source bypass switch
15 24R N5242-60011 A19 test set motherboard J209 to A21HMA26.5

16 100R N5242-60004
18 30R N5242-60033
19
029)” on page 6-32.
20
029)” on page 6-32.


Bottom Assemblies, Standard 4-Port Configuration, Option 400

Reference
5087-7139
A22 1 Splitter
5087-6139
A23 5087-7308
2 Mixer brick
A24 5087-6308
A25 Test port 1 bridge
4
5087-7710 4

Figure 6-17 Bottom Assemblies, Standard 4-Port Configuration, Option 400

Bottom RF Cables, Standard 4-Port Configuration, Option 400

Reference
W3 SR N5242-20091 1 A5 source (1) to W4
W5 SR N5242-20091 1 A8 source (2) to W6
W7 SR N5242-20092 1 A8 source (2) to W8
W9 SR N5242-20092 1 A5 source (1) to W10
W31 SR N5242-20056 1 Port 1 RCVR A IN to A23 mixer brick (A)
W32 SR N5242-20058 1 Port 3 RCVR C IN to A24 mixer brick (C)
W33 SR N5242-20065 1 Port 4 RCVR D IN to A24 mixer brick (D)
W34 SR N5242-20062 1 Port 2 RCVR B IN to A23 mixer brick (B)
W45 SR N5242-20093 1 A8 source (1) to W46
W55 F N5242-60024 1 A24 mixer brick (D) to A20 IF multiplexer (P801)
W58 F N5242-60023 1 A24 mixer brick (C) to A20 IF multiplexer (P601)

Reference
Figure 6-18 Bottom RF Cables, Standard 4-Port Configuration, Option 400

Bottom Ribbon Cables and Wire Harnesses, Standard 4-Port

Reference
3W N5242-60009 A19 test set motherboard J221 to ports 1/3 LED board J1
24R N5242-60011 A19 test set motherboard J209 to A21 HMA26.5

100R N5242-60004
36R 8121-0834 Rear-panel HANDLER I/O to A19 test set motherboard J400

Figure 6-19 Bottom Ribbon Cables and Wire Harnesses, Standard 4-Port


Reference
A21 5087-7711 1 LO Multiplier/amplifier 26.5 HMA26.5)
5087-7139
A22 1 Splitter
5087-6139
A23 5087-7308
2 Mixer brick
A24 5087-6308
4
5087-7710 4
33321-60070 4
5087-7239 4
33321-60066 4
5087-7729
Was 5087-7315


Bottom RF Cables, 4-Port, Option 419 without Option 029 (Ports 1 and 2)
Reference
W3 SR N5242-20091 1 A5 source (1) to W4
W9 SR N5242-20092 1 A5 source (1) to W10
W45 SR N5242-20093 1 A8 source (1) to W46

Figure 6-21 Bottom RF Cables, 4-Port, Option 419 without Option 029 (Ports 1 and 2)

Bottom RF Cables, 4-Port, Option 419 with Option 029 (Ports 1 and 2)
Reference
W3 SR N5242-20091 1 A5 source (1) to W4
W9 SR N5242-20092 1 A5 source (1) to W10
W45 SR N5242-20093 1 A8 source (1) to W46
W140 SR N5242-20118 1 A24 mixer brick to A55 noise downconverter

Reference
Figure 6-22 Bottom RF Cables, 4-Port, Option 419 with Option 029 (Ports 1 and 2)

Reference
W5 SR N5242-20091 1 A8 source (2) to W6
W7 SR N5242-20092 1 A8 source (2) to W8
W89 SR N5242-20031 1 Port 3 RCVR C IN to A43 port 3 receiver attenuator
W90 SR N5242-20012 1 A43 port 3 receiver attenuator to A24 mixer brick (C)
W91 SR N5242-20032 1 Port 4 RCVR D IN to A44 port 4 receiver attenuator
W92 SR N5242-20036 1 A44 port 4 receiver attenuator to A24 mixer brick (D)


Reference
W5 SR N5242-20091 1 A8 source (2) to W6
W7 SR N5242-20092 1 A8 source (2) to W8



Reference
13 3W N5242-60009 A19 test set motherboard J222 to ports 2/4 LED board J1

20 100R N5242-60004
22 30R N5242-60033
23
029)” on page 6-46.
24
029)” on page 6-46.



Reference
5087-7139
A22 1 Splitter
5087-6139
A23 5087-7308
2 Mixer brick
A24 5087-6308
4
5087-7710 4
33321-60070 4
5087-7239 4
33321-60066 4
N1811-60006 4
A50 5087-7729 1 Combiner
5087-7729
Was 5087-7315



Reference
W3 SR N5242-20091 1 A5 source (1) to W95
W9 SR N5242-20092 1 A5 source (1) to W109
W45 SR N5242-20093 1 A8 source (1) to W46


Reference
W3 SR N5242-20091 1 A5 source (1) to W95
W9 SR N5242-20092 1 A5 source (1) to W109
W45 SR N5242-20093 1 A8 source (1) to W46

Reference

Reference
W5 SR N5242-20091 1 A8source (2) to W101
W7 SR N5242-20092 1 A8 source (2) to W105
W106 SR N5242-20003 1 A48 port4 source bypass switch to A27 port 4 bridge


Reference
W5 SR N5242-20091 1 A8source (2) to W101
W7 SR N5242-20092 1 A8 source (2) to W105
W106 SR N5242-20003 1 A48 port4 source bypass switch to A27 port 4 bridge



Reference
11 16R N5242-60006 A19 test set motherboard J213 to A24 mixer brick (2)
15 3W N5242-60009 A19 test set motherboard J222 to ports 2/4 LED board J1

24 100R N5242-60004
26 30R N5242-60033
27
029)” on page 6-58.
28
029)” on page 6-58.


Top Hardware and Miscellaneous Parts, All Options

Reference
B1 3160-4199 3 Fan
3160-4198 3 Fan guard
0361-1272 12 Fan rivet
N5242-00015 1 Fan bracket
Machine screw, M3.0 x 8, pan head (5 to attach fan bracket to chassis, 4 to

0515-0372 12 attach power supply bracket to inner panels, left side bracket, and fan
bracket, and 3 to attach A14 system motherboard to the chassis.)
Chassis (Refer to “Internal Hardware and Miscellaneous Parts, All Options” on page 6-76.)
Machine screw, M3.0 x 6, flat head (To attach power supply bracket to
0515-1227 3
power supply.)
W1312-00062 1 Power supply bracket
Machine screw, M3.0 x 16, pan head (To attach midplane board to
0515-0375 6
midplane bracket.)
0400-0353 5 Midplane board grommets
5041-7250 2 Wire loom
Machine screw, M4.0 x 10, pan head (To attach A5 and A8 source boards
11 0515-0380 4
to inner panels.)
Figure 6-32 Top Hardware and Miscellaneous Parts, Side View, All Options

Figure 6-33 Top Hardware and Miscellaneous Parts, Top View, All Options

Bottom Hardware and Miscellaneous Parts, All Options Except 029

Reference Part
Designator Number Qty Description
Machine screw, M3.0 x 8, pan head (4 to attach A19 test set motherboard to
test set deck, 6 to attach A19 test set motherboard to stabilizer bracket, 4 to
attach stabilizer bracket to A20 IF mux board, 17 to attach test set deck to
chassis, 4 to attach A23–A24 mixer bricks to bottom of mixer brick
0515-0372 66 mounting block, 4 to attach A21 HMA26.5 to its mounting bracket, 8 to
attach A34–A37 source attenuators to their brackets, 8 to attach A42–A45
receiver attenuators to their brackets, 4 to attach A33 reference mixer switch
to its bracket, 3 to attach reference mixer switch bracket to test set deck, and
4 to attach test set front sub panel to test set deck front.)
Machine screw M3.0 x 14 (2 to attach splitter to top of mixer brick mounting
0515-0665 10
block and 8 to attach A38–A41 bias tees to their brackets.)
Machine screw M3.0 x 20 pan head (6 to attach mixer bricks to sides of
0515-1410 16 mixer brick mounting block, 8 to attach A25–A28 bridges to their mounting
brackets, and 2 to attach A50 combiner to its bracket.)
0515-0374 4 Machine screw M3.0 x 10 pan head (To attach mixer brick mounting block.)
N5242-20103 1 Mounting block (For A23 and A24 mixer bricks.)
Bracket (For A34–A37 source attenuators, A39–A41 bias tees, and A42–A45
N5242-00007 1
receiver attenuators.)
Machine screw M3.0 x 6 pan head (8 to attach bridge brackets to test set
0515-0430 30 deck, 12 to attach attenuator brackets to test set deck, 8 to attach switch
brackets to test set deck, and 2 to attach HMA26.5 bracket to test set deck.)
N5242-00006 4 Bracket (For A25–A28 bridges.)
N5242-00011 1 Bracket (For A33 reference mixer switch.)
0515-1227 4 Machine screw, M3.0 x 6, flat head (To attach test set front sub panel)
11 0460-2725 2 Vibration mount (4-port only; between couplers 1 and 3, and 2 and 4)
12 5022-1087 4 Test port coupler dress nut (One for each coupler.)
E4403-20033 4 Gap pad; 4-port (Between each coupler and test set front sub panel.)
13
0403-0285 2 Coupler bumper; 2-port (Between each coupler and test set front sub panel.)
14 0960-0055 2 Termination, male SMA short circuit
15 0515-1521 4 Machine screw, M3.0 x 5, flat head (To attach front panel LED boards.)
16 N5242-00002 1 Test set deck
N5242-00018 1 Test set front sub panel, 2-port
17
N5242-00003 1 Test set front sub panel, 4-port
18 0515-1992 8 Machine screw, M2.5 x 20, pan head (To attach A46–A49 bypass switches.)
19 N5242-00009 1 Bracket (For A46–A49 bypass switches and A50 combiner.)
20 N5242-00005 1 Bracket (For A21 HMA26.5.)
21 N5242-00019 1 Stabilizer bracket (Between A19 test set motherboard and A20 IF mux board.)
22 1810-0118 2 Termination, 50-ohm load (For J6 and J7.)
23 08673-60040 2 Bulkhead connector (2-port models only.)
24 2950-0001 2 Hex nut (For bulkhead connector.) (2-port models only.)
25 2190-0016 2 Lock washer (For bulkhead connector.) (2-port models only.)

Figure 6-34 Bottom Hardware and Miscellaneous Parts, All Options Except 029

Bottom Hardware and Miscellaneous Parts, Option 029

Reference Part
Designator Number Qty Description
Bracket (For A34 port 1 and A37 port 2 source attenuators, A42 port 1 and
N5242-00031 2
A45 port 2 receiver attenuators, and A52 port 1 and A53 port 2 switches.)
Machine screw M3.0 x 6 pan head (To attach attenuator/switch brackets
0515-0430 6
(item ) to the test set deck.)
Machine screw M3.0 x 8 pan head (To attach A34 port 1 and A37 port 2
0515-0372 8 source attenuators and A42 port 1 and A45 port 2 receiver attenuators to their
brackets.)
0515-0666 4
switches to their brackets.)
Machine screw M3.0 x 6 pan head (To attach port 1 and port 2 bias tee
0515-0430 4
brackets to the port 1 and port 2 switches.)
0515-0665 4
bias tees to their brackets.)
N5242-00032 2 Bracket (For A38 port 1 and A41 port 2 bias tees.)
Machine screw M3.0 x 10 pan head (To attach A55 noise downconverter to
0515-0374 3
side frame.)
0515-1410 1 Machine screw M3.0 x 20 pan head (To attach A54 bridge to side frame.)
Hex nut with lock washer (For screw (item ) to attach A54 bridge to side
0535-0031 4
frame.)

Figure 6-35 Bottom Hardware and Miscellaneous Parts, Option 029

Internal Hardware and Miscellaneous Parts, All Options

Reference
Part Number Qty Description
Designator
W1312-00051 1 Left side inner bracket
W1312-00048 1 Midplane bracket
N5242-00033 1 Right side inner bracket
N5242-00001 1 Chassis
Machine screw, M3.0 x 8, pan head (4 to attach midplane bracket to
left and right side inner brackets, 6 to attach front bracket to left and
0515-0372 39 right side inner brackets, 2 to attach side bracket to front bracket, 5 to
attach side bracket to chassis, 22 to attach chassis to left and right side
inner brackets, midplane bracket, and front bracket.)
N5242-00017 1 Front bracket
N5242-40002 16 PC board guides
N5242-00016 1 Side bracket (left)

Figure 6-36 Internal Hardware and Miscellaneous Parts, All Options

External Hardware and Miscellaneous Parts, All Options

Reference
N5242-00014 1 Outer cover
5041-9611 4 Rear foot
0515-1619 4 Machine screw M4.0 x 25, pan head (To attach rear foot.)
E4400-60026 2 Strap handle assembly (Includes item .)
0515-0710 4 Machine screw M5.0 x 18, flat head (To attach strap handle.)
5041-9183 4 Key lock (for bottom foot)
5041-9167 4 Bottom foot

W1312-40032 4 Hole plug (When analyzer is rack mounted.)
0515-0372 12 Machine screw, M3.0 x 8, pan head (To attach inner cover.)
N5242-40007 4 Vibration mount (foam pad)
N5242-00036 1 Inner cover (retaining shield)
11 0515-1227 9 Machine screw, M3.0 x 6, flat head (To attach inner cover.)

Figure 6-37 External Hardware and Miscellaneous Parts, All Options

Rear Panel Assembly, All Options

Item Part
Number Number Qty Description
CPU board. The 2.0 GHz CPU board is shown. Refer to “Top Assemblies, All Options” on
A17
page 6-14 for part number.
Hard disk drive assembly (HDDA) for 2.0 GHz A17 CPU board. Refer to “Top Assemblies, All
A51
Options” on page 6-14 for A51 part numbers.
N5242-00022 Power supply rear panel (when 1.6 GHz CPU is installed)
1
N5245-00028 Power supply rear panel (when 2.0 GHz CPU is installed)
0515-0372 28 Machine screw, M3.0 x 8, pan head
Rear foot and screw (Refer to “External Hardware and Miscellaneous Parts, All Options” on
page 6-78.)
6960-0149 1 Hole plug
N5242-00010 1 Rear panel
2190-0034 2 Lock washer
0380-0644 2 Jack screw
2190-0584 6 Lock washer
1251-7812 6 Jack screw
N5242-60005 1 PWR I/O cable assembly
11 1810-0118 3 Termination, 50 ohm load
12 8121-0834 1 HANDLER I/O cable assembly
13 2190-0068 11 Lock washer
14 2950-0054 11 Hex nut
15 Bottom foot (Refer to “External Hardware and Miscellaneous Parts, All Options” on page 6-78.)
Rear panel jumper (Refer to “Bottom RF Cables, 4-Port, Option 423 without Option 029 (Ports 1
16 and 2)” on page 6-60 or “Bottom RF Cables, 2-Port, Option 224 without Option 029” on
page 6-34.)
17 2190-0102 2 Lock washer
18 2950-0035 2 Hex nut
19 6960-0076 2 Hole plug (For 2-port models only.)

Figure 6-38 Rear Panel Assembly, All Options

Miscellaneous Part Numbers

Table 6-3 Part Numbers for Miscellaneous Parts and Accessories
Model or Part
Description
Numbera
Service Tools
1/4 inch and 5/16 inch open-end wrench, thin profile 8710-0510
5/16 inch (8 mm), open-end torque wrench; 0.9 N-m (8 in-lb) 8710-1765
20 mm open-end torque wrench; 0.9 N-m (8 in-lb) 8710-1764
Spanner wrench 08513-20014
Documentation
Installation and Quick Start Guide (for all PNA series analyzers) (Cannot be ordered. Part
number is for reference only. Must be printed from the Agilent Web site. Refer to “Printing E8356-90001
Copies of Documentation from the Web” on page iv.)
Service Guide. (Not available in printed form. Part number is for reference only. Must be
printed from the Agilent Web site. Refer to “Printing Copies of Documentation from the N5242-90001
Web” on page iv.)
GPIB Cables/GPIB Adapter
GPIB cable, 0.5 meter (1.6 feet) 10833D
GPIB cable, 1 meter (3.3 feet) 10833A

GPIB cable, 2 meter (6.6 feet) 10833B
GPIB cable, 4 meter (13.2 feet) 10833C

GPIB cable to GPIB cable adapter 10834A
Fuses
Rear Panel Bias Input Fuse; Ports 1, 2, 3, and 4 (0.5 A, 125 V) 2110-0046
Memory Modules
1 GB module, DDR SDRAM, 166 MHz, 184-pin 1819-0329
Battery
Battery, lithium manganese dioxide, 3V, 0.22A-hr. (located on A17 CPU board assembly) 1420-0356
Upgrade Kits orderable by Part Number
Bias Tees and Source and Receiver Attenuators for 2-Port Models (Option 200 to 219) N5242-60101
2nd Internal Source, Combiner, and Source Switches for 2-Port Models (Option 219 to 224) N5242-60102
Bias Tees and Source and Receiver Attenuators for 4-Port Models (Option 400 to 419) N5242-60103
Combiner and Source Switches for 4-Port Models (Option 419 to 423) N5242-60104

Table 6-3 Part Numbers for Miscellaneous Parts and Accessories (Continued)
Model or Part
Description
Numbera
Upgrade Kits orderable by Model Number

Time Domain (Option 010) N5241A/42AU-010
Frequency Offset Measurements (Option 080) N5241A/42AU-080
Scalar Calibrated Converter Measurements (Option 082) N5241A/42AU-082
Vector and Scalar Calibrated Converter Measurements (Option 083) N5241A/42AU-083
Bias Tees and Source and Receiver Attenuators for 2-Port Models (Option 200 to 219) N5241A/42AU-921
2nd Internal Source, Combiner, and Source Switches for 2-Port Models (Option 219 to 224) N5241A/42AU-922
Noise Figure Measurements for 2-port models (Option 029) N5241A/42AU-924
Bias Tees and Source and Receiver Attenuators for 4-Port Models (Option 400 to 419) N5241A/42AU-926
Combiner and Source Switches for 4-Port Models (Option 419 to 423) N5241A/42AU-927
Noise Figure Measurements for 4-port models (Option 029) N5241A/42AU-929
N-Port Calibrated Measurements (Option 551) N5241A/42AU-551
USB Accessories
Mouse 1150-7799
Keyboard (U.S. style) 1150-7896
USB to GPIB adapter 82357B
ESD Supplies
Adjustable antistatic wrist strap 9300-1367
Antistatic wrist strap grounding cord (5 foot length) 9300-0980
Static control table mat and earth ground wire 9300-0797
ESD heel strap 9300-1126
Rack Mount Kits and Handle Kits
Rack mount kit for analyzers without handles (Option 1CM) N5241A/42A-1CM
Option 1CM includes the following separately orderable items:
Rack mount flange kit (for analyzers not equipped with handles) 5063-9217
Rack mount flange for use without front handles (two included in 5063-9217) 5022-2802
Rack mount kit for analyzers with handles (Option 1CP) N5241A/42A-1CP
Option 1CP includes the following separately orderable items:
Rack mount flange kit (for analyzers not equipped with handles) 5063-9237
Rack mount flange for use without front handles (two included in 5063-9237) 5022-2809
Front handle kit (two handles and hardware) 5063-9230
Front handle (two included in 5063-9230) 5063-9205
Rack mount rail set E3663AC

Table 6-3 Part Numbers for Miscellaneous Parts and Accessories (Continued)
Model or Part
Description
Numbera
Touch-up Paint
Dove gray (for use on frame around front panel and painted portion of handles) 6010-1146
French gray (for use on cover) 6010-1147
Parchment white (for use on rack mount flanges, rack support flanges, and front panels) 6010-1148
a. For Model numbers indicated N5241A/42AU-xxx, you must order either N5241AU-xxx or
N5242AU-xxx, where xxx is the option number, for example, 010, 080, etc.

7 Repair and Replacement Procedures

Repair and Replacement Procedures PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers

This chapter contains procedures for removing and replacing the major assemblies of your
Agilent Technologies PNA series microwave network analyzer.
Chapter Seven at-a-Glance
Personal Safety Warnings Warnings and cautions pertaining to personal Page 7-3
safety.
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Information pertaining to ESD protection. Page 7-3

Protection
Table of Removal and A table of removal and replacement Page 7-4

Replacement Procedures procedures and the corresponding page
number where they are located.
Removal and Replacement The actual procedures for removing and See Table 7-1
Procedures replacing the major assemblies in your on page 7-4
analyzer. for specific
procedures.
The procedures occur in assembly reference
designator numerical order.
Post-Repair Procedures A table for the proper tests, verifications, and Page 7-68
adjustments to perform on your analyzer after
repair.

PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers Repair and Replacement Procedures
N5241A/42A Personal Safety Warnings
Personal Safety Warnings
WARNING These servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only.
To avoid electrical shock, do not perform any servicing unless you
are qualified to do so.
WARNING The opening of covers or removal of parts is likely to expose

dangerous voltages. Disconnect the analyzer from all voltage sources
while it is being opened.
WARNING Procedures described in this document may be performed with

injury.
WARNING The power cord is connected to internal capacitors that may remain
live for 10 seconds after disconnecting the plug from its power
supply assembly. Wait at least 10 seconds, after disconnecting the
plug, before removing the covers.
WARNING The detachable power cord is the instrument disconnecting device.

It disconnects the mains circuits from the mains supply before other
parts of the instrument. The front panel switch is only a standby
switch and is not a LINE switch (disconnecting device).
WARNING Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only

with the same or equivalent type recommended. Discard used
batteries according to manufacturer’s instructions.
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Protection
CAUTION Many of the assemblies in this instrument are very susceptible to damage
from electrostatic discharge (ESD). Perform the following procedures only at
a static-safe workstation and wear a grounded wrist strap.
This is important. If not properly protected against, electrostatic discharge
can seriously damage your analyzer, resulting in costly repair.
To reduce the chance of electrostatic discharge, follow all of the
recommendations outlined in “Electrostatic Discharge Protection” on page
1-6, for all of the procedures in this chapter.

Removal and Replacement Procedures N5241A/42A
Removal and Replacement Procedures

Table 7-1 List of Procedures
Reference
Designator Assembly Description Location
N/A Covers, outer and inner Page 7-6
N/A Fan bracket and fans Page 7-62
N/A Front panel assembly Page 7-8
N/A Front panel LED boards Page 7-60
A1 Front panel display board

A2 USB board Page 7-10
A3 Display assembly
A4, A13, A11 13.5 GHz synthesizer boards

A5, A8 26.5 GHz source boards
A7 Noise receiver board Page 7-14
A10 Frequency reference board
A12 Signal processing ADC module (SPAM) board
A14 System motherboard Page 7-16
A15 Midplane board Page 7-18
A16 Power supply Page 7-20
A17 CPU board Page 7-22
A18 GPIB board Page 7-24
A19 Test set motherboard Page 7-26
A20 IF multiplexer board Page 7-28
A21 Multiplier/amplifier 26.5 (HMA26.5) Page 7-30
A22 Splitter Page 7-32
A23, A24 Mixer bricks Page 7-34
A25 Port 1 bridge

A26 Port 3 bridge
Page 7-36
A27 Port 4 bridge
A28 Port 2 bridge

N5241A/42A Removal and Replacement Procedures
Table 7-1 List of Procedures (Continued)
Reference
Designator Assembly Description Location
A29 Port 1 test port coupler

Page 7-38
A33 Reference mixer switch Page 7-40
A34 Port 1 source step attenuator (Optional)

Page 7-42
A38 Port 1 bias tee (Optional)

A39 Port 3 bias tee (Optional) Page 7-42
A40 Port 4 bias tee (Optional) Page 7-44
A41 Port 2 bias tee (Optional)
A42 Port 1 receiver step attenuator (Optional)

Page 7-42
A46 Port 1 source bypass switch (Optional)

Page 7-46
A50 Combiner (Optional) Page 7-46
A51 Hard disk drive Page 7-48
A52 Test port 1 switch (Option 029 only)

A53 Page 7-54
Test port 2 switch (Option 029 only)
A54 Test port 2 bridge (Option 029 only)

Page 7-56
A55 Noise downconverter (Option 029 only)

Removing the Covers N5241A/42A
Removing the Covers
Tools Required
• T-10 TORX driver (set to 9 in-lb)
Removing the Outer Cover
CAUTION This procedure is best performed with the analyzer resting on its front
handles in the vertical position. Do not place the analyzer on its front panel
without the handles. This will damage the front panel assemblies.
Refer to Figure 7-1 for this procedure.

1. Disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove the strap handles (item ) by loosening the screws (item ), with a T-20 TORX
driver, on both ends until the handle is free of the analyzer.
3. Remove the foot locks (item ) from the four bottom feet (item ) and then remove the
four bottom feet from the outer cover.
4. Remove the four rear panel feet (item ) by removing the center screws (item with a
T-20 TORX driver,.
5. Slide the outer cover toward the rear of the analyzer and remove it.
Removing the Inner Cover

1. With a T-10 TORX driver, remove the 12 pan head screws (item ).
2. With a T-10 TORX driver, remove the 9 flat head screws (item ).
3. Lift off the cover.
Replacement Procedure
Reverse the order of the removal procedures.

N5241A/42A Removing the Covers
Figure 7-1 Outer and Inner Cover Removal

Removing and Replacing the Front Panel Assembly N5241A/42A
Removing and Replacing the Front Panel Assembly
Tools Required
• 5/16 inch open-end torque wrench (set to 10 in-lb)
• ESD grounding wrist strap
Removal Procedure
2. Remove the outer cover. Refer to “Removing the Covers” on page 7-6.
3. With a 5/16 inch torque wrench, remove all the semirigid jumpers (item ) from the
front panel.
4. With a T-10 TORX driver, remove the 12 screws (item ) from the sides of the frame.
CAUTION Before removing the front panel from the analyzer, lift and support the front
of the analyzer frame.
5. Slide the front panel over the test port connectors.

6. Disconnect the ribbon cable (item ) from the A1 front panel interface board.
IMPORTANT When reconnecting the front-panel jumpers, torque the connectors to 10 in-lb.
1. Reverse the order of the removal procedure.

2. Perform the post-repair adjustments, verifications, and performance tests that pertain
to this removal procedure. Refer to Table 7-2 on page 7-68.

N5241A/42A Removing and Replacing the Front Panel Assembly
Figure 7-2 Front Panel Assembly Removal

Removing and Replacing the A1–A3 and Other Front Panel Subassemblies N5241A/42A
Removing and Replacing the A1–A3 and Other Front Panel

Subassemblies
Tools Required
Refer to Figure 7-3, Figure 7-4, and Figure 7-5 for the following procedures.
Pre-removal Procedure
2. Remove the front panel assembly. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the Front Panel
Removing the A2 USB Board

1. Remove the four retaining screws (item ) from the USB board and unplug it from the
A1 front panel interface board.
Removing the A1 Front Panel Interface Board and Keypad Assembly

1. Remove the A2 USB board as outlined above.
2. Remove the round knob (RPG) from the front panel by gently pulling the knob forward.
3. Disconnect the following cables from the A1 front panel interface board: display cable
(item ), inverter board cable (item ), USB controller board cable (item ), and
power switch cable (item ).
4. Remove the nine screws (item ) from the A1 front panel interface board and remove it
from the front panel assembly.
5. The keypad assembly can now be removed from the A1 front panel interface board by
gently pulling each of the rubber tabs through the PC board.
Removing the Inverter Board

1. Disconnect the inverter board cable (item ) and the LCD cable (item ) from the
inverter board.
2. Remove two screws (item ) and remove the inverter board.

N5241A/42A Removing and Replacing the A1–A3 and Other Front Panel Subassemblies
Removing the USB Controller Board

1. Disconnect the USB controller board cable (item ) from the USB controller board.
2. Remove two screws (item ) and remove the USB controller board.
Removing the Power Switch Board and Power Button Keypad

1. Disconnect the power switch cable (item ) from the power switch board.
2. Remove two screws (item ) and remove the power switch board.
3. The power button keypad can now be removed from the power switch board by gently
pulling each of the rubber tabs through the PC board.
Figure 7-3 Front Panel Subassemblies Removal

Removing and Replacing the A1–A3 and Other Front Panel Subassemblies N5241A/42A
Removing the A3 Display Assembly and the Touchscreen

1. Disconnect the following cables from the A1 front panel interface board: display cable
(item ), inverter board cable (item ), USB controller board cable (item ), and
power switch cable (item ).
2. Remove six screws (item ) from the A3 display assembly and remove the A3 display
assembly from the front panel assembly.
3. The touch screen can now be removed from the front panel assembly. Note the
orientation of the touch screen in the front panel assembly for installation of the new
touch screen.
To replace the touch screen, note the orientation of the rubber boot on the old touch
screen and then remove it and install it on the new one in the same orientation.
Figure 7-4 A3 Display Assembly and Touch Screen Removal-1

N5241A/42A Removing and Replacing the A1–A3 and Other Front Panel Subassemblies
4. The display cable (item ) can be removed by removing the three screws (item ) that
attach it to the LCD display hold down bracket (item ).
5. The LCD display can be removed by disconnecting the LCD cable from the inverter
board and then removing the four screws (item ) that attach it to the LCD display
hold down bracket (item ). Note the location of the four spacers (item ) before
separating the LCD display from the hold down bracket.
Figure 7-5 A3 Display Assembly and Touch Screen Removal-2

Removing and Replacing the A4–A13 Boards N5241A/42A
Removing and Replacing the A4–A13 Boards
Tools Required
Removal Procedure
2. Remove the outer and inner covers. Refer to “Removing the Covers” on page 7-6.
3. A5 and A8 source boards:
a. Removal of the source boards is best done with the analyzer placed on its left side, as
shown in Figure 7-6, so that both the bottom and top of the analyzer are accessible.
b. On the bottom side of the analyzer, on the source board to be removed, disconnect the
long cables (item ) from the short cables attached to the source board. The short
cables will remain attached to the source board as it is removed from the analyzer.
c. On the top side of the analyzer, remove two screws (item ), one at each end of the
board, from the source board to be removed.
d. Lift the two extractors (item ), one at each end of the board, and lift the board out
of the chassis.
4. A4, A7, A10, A11, A12, and A13 boards:
a. Remove all cables connected to the top of the board to be removed. Note the location
of each cable for reinstallation.
b. Lift the two extractors (item ), one at each end of the board, and lift the board.
c. Before removing the board completely, check the bottom of the board for any
attached cables.
Remember to connect any necessary cables to the bottom of the board before
reinstalling it.
When replacing the A5 or A8 source board, remove the semirigid cables attached to the
bottom of the old board and attach them to the bottom of the new board. Be sure to
orient these cables the same as they were on the old board.

N5241A/42A Removing and Replacing the A4–A13 Boards
Figure 7-6 A4, A5, A7, A8, A10, A11, A12, and A13 Boards Removal

Removing and Replacing the A14 System Motherboard N5241A/42A
Removing and Replacing the A14 System Motherboard

Tools Required
Removal Procedure
4. Remove the A18 GPIB board. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the A18 GPIB Board”
on page 7-24.
5. Remove the A15 midplane board. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the A15 Midplane
Board” on page 7-18.
6. Remove the A4–A13 boards. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the A4–A13 Boards” on
page 7-14.
7. Remove the fan bracket and fans. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the Fans” on page
7-62.
8. Turn the analyzer over so that the bottom side is up and remove four screws (item ),
that secure the bottom of the midplane bracket to the chassis.
9. Turn the analyzer back over so that the top side is up. Remove seven screws (item )
that secure the left side bracket to the chassis left inner panel.
10. Remove two screws (item ) from each side that secure the midplane bracket to the
chassis left and right inner panels. Lift the midplane bracket out of the analyzer.
11. Remove three screws (item ) that secure the A14 system motherboard to the chassis.
12. Slide the A14 system motherboard toward the rear of the analyzer to release it from
the 15 keyhole standoffs (item ) on the chassis.
13. Lift the A14 system motherboard just enough to unplug the ribbon cable from the
bottom side, then lift it out of the analyzer.

N5241A/42A Removing and Replacing the A14 System Motherboard
Figure 7-7 A14 System Motherboard Removal

Removing and Replacing the A15 Midplane Board N5241A/42A
Removing and Replacing the A15 Midplane Board

Tools Required
Removal Procedure
3. Remove the A16 power supply assembly. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the A16
Power Supply Assembly” on page 7-20.
4. Remove the A17 CPU board assembly. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the A17 CPU
Board Assembly” on page 7-22.
5. Remove six screws (item ) from the A15 midplane board.
6. Lift the board ejectors (item ) to the upright position to disengage the A15 midplane
board from the A14 system motherboard.
7. Note the positions of the five rubber grommets (item ) on the bottom three A15
midplane board alignment pins. Remove these rubber grommets and retain them for
reinstallation on the new A15 midplane board.
8. Lift the A15 midplane board out of the analyzer.
Be careful to align the guide pins on the A15 midplane board connectors with the slots
on the A14 system motherboard connectors.
The board ejectors should be in the upright position when installing the A15 midplane
board. Align these ejectors with the slots in the chassis inner panels as the board is
lowered into position and then push them down flat.
Remember to install the five rubber grommets on the bottom three alignment pins: one
on the alignment pin closest to the fans and two each on the other two alignment pins.

N5241A/42A Removing and Replacing the A15 Midplane Board
Figure 7-8 A15 Midplane Board Removal

Removing and Replacing the A16 Power Supply Assembly N5241A/42A
Removing and Replacing the A16 Power Supply Assembly
Tools Required
Removal Procedure
3. Remove the three flat head screws (item ) from the power supply bracket.
4. Remove the seven pan head screws (item ) from the power supply rear panel.
5. Slide the A16 power supply assembly out the rear of the analyzer.

N5241A/42A Removing and Replacing the A16 Power Supply Assembly
Figure 7-9 A16 Power Supply Assembly Removal

Removing and Replacing the A17 CPU Board Assembly N5241A/42A
Removing and Replacing the A17 CPU Board Assembly
Tools Required
Removal Procedure
2. It is not necessary to remove the instrument cover(s) to remove the A17 CPU board
assembly.
3. Remove six screws (item ) from the A17 CPU board assembly; four from the CPU
assembly rear panel and two from the ejector handles.
4. Grasp the two ejector handles and rotate them outward toward the sides of the analyzer
as shown in the illustration. This will disengage the A17 CPU board assembly from the
A15 midplane board.
5. Slide the A17 CPU board assembly out the rear of the analyzer.
6. If the older 1.6 GHz CPU board is being replaced with the new 2.0 GHz CPU board, a
new A51 hard disk drive assembly must also be installed. Refer to “Removing and
Replacing the A51 Hard Disk Drive (HDDA)” on page 7-48.
If the N5241/42A already had a 2.0 GHz CPU board installed, remove the A51 hard disk
drive assembly from the old CPU board and install it in the new CPU board. Refer to
“Removing and Replacing the A51 Hard Disk Drive (HDDA)” on page 7-48.
2. If a new Certificate of Authenticity (license) label is supplied with your new A17 CPU
board assembly, adhere it to the outer cover in the location specified in Figure 7-1 on
page 7-7.

N5241A/42A Removing and Replacing the A17 CPU Board Assembly
Figure 7-10 A17 CPU Board Assembly Removal

Removing and Replacing the A18 GPIB Board N5241A/42A
Removing and Replacing the A18 GPIB Board
Tools Required
Removal Procedure
5. Remove the rear panel. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the Rear Panel” on page
7-58.
6. Slide the A18 GPIB board out the rear of the analyzer.

N5241A/42A Removing and Replacing the A18 GPIB Board
Figure 7-11 A18 GPIB Board Removal

Removing and Replacing the A19 Test Set Motherboard N5241A/42A
Removing and Replacing the A19 Test Set Motherboard
Tools Required
Removal Procedure
3. Position the analyzer bottom side up.
4. Disconnect ALL ribbon cables (item ) and ALL wire harnesses (item ) from the
A19 test set motherboard.
5. Remove connector hardware (item ) from 11 rear panel BNC connectors.
6. Remove connector hardware (item ) from the rear panel TEST SET I/O connector.
7. Remove 10 screws (item ) from the A19 test set motherboard.

8. Slide the A19 test set motherboard toward the front of the instrument until the rear
panel BNC connectors are free of the rear panel, then lift the motherboard and remove
it from the analyzer.

N5241A/42A Removing and Replacing the A19 Test Set Motherboard
Figure 7-12 A19 Test Set Motherboard Removal

Removing and Replacing the A20 IF Multiplexer Board N5241A/42A
Removing and Replacing the A20 IF Multiplexer Board
Tools Required
Removal Procedure
4. Remove the A19 test set motherboard. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the A19 Test
Set Motherboard” on page 7-26.
5. Disconnect the ribbon cable (item ) from the A20 IF multiplexer board.
6. Disconnect ALL gray flexible RF cables (item ) from the A20 IF multiplexer board.
7. Remove connector hardware (item ) from five rear panel RF connectors.
8. Remove connector hardware (item ) from the rear panel PULSE I/O connector.
9. Remove four screws (item ) from the stabilizer bracket and remove the stabilizer
bracket.
10. Remove four screws (item ) from the A20 IF multiplexer board.
11. Slide the A20 IF multiplexer board toward the front of the instrument until the rear
panel connectors are free of the rear panel, then lift the motherboard and remove it
from the analyzer.
Attach the stabilizer bracket to the new A20 IF multiplexer board using the screws
removed from the old one.
Torque rear panel RF connector nuts to 21 in-lbs and PULSE I/O connector screws to
6 in-lbs.

N5241A/42A Removing and Replacing the A20 IF Multiplexer Board
Figure 7-13 A20 IF Multiplexer Board Removal

Removing and Replacing the A21 HMA26.5 N5241A/42A
Removing and Replacing the A21 HMA26.5
Tools Required
Removal Procedure
CAUTION Be careful not to damage the center pins of the semirigid cables. Some flexing
of the cables is necessary to remove the assembly. However, do not over-bend
the semirigid cables.

4. Disconnect the ribbon cable (item ) from the A21 HMA26.5 assembly.
5. Disconnect cable W41 from the A21 HMA26.5.
6. Remove cable W42 from between the A21 HMA26.5 and the A22 splitter.
7. Remove two screws (item ) from the A21 HMA26.5 mounting bracket.
8. Remove the mounting bracket, with the A21 HMA26.5 attached, from the analyzer.
9. Remove four screws (item ) that attach the A21 HMA26.5 to the mounting bracket.
Torque all RF cable connectors to 10 in-lbs.

N5241A/42A Removing and Replacing the A21 HMA26.5
Figure 7-14 A21 HMA26.5 Removal

Removing and Replacing the A22 Splitter N5241A/42A
Removing and Replacing the A22 Splitter
Tools Required
Removal Procedure

4. Disconnect cable W42 at the A22 splitter connection.
5. Remove cable W43 from between the A22 splitter and the A23 mixer brick.
6. Remove cable W44 from between the A22 splitter and the A24 mixer brick.
7. Remove two screws (item ) from the A22 splitter and lift the splitter out of the
analyzer.
Torque all RF cable connections to 10 in-lbs.

N5241A/42A Removing and Replacing the A22 Splitter
Figure 7-15 A22 Splitter Removal

Removing and Replacing the A23 and A24 Mixer Bricks N5241A/42A
Removing and Replacing the A23 and A24 Mixer Bricks
Tools Required
Removal Procedure

4. Remove cable W42 from between the A21 HMA26.5 and the A22 splitter.
5. Disconnect all semirigid cables (item ) from each of the mixer bricks.
6. Disconnect the ribbon cables (item ) from each of the mixer bricks.
7. Remove two screws (item ) from each end of the mixer brick bracket.
8. Move the disconnected semirigid cables out of the way and lift the mixer brick
mounting block out of the analyzer just enough to allow the gray flexible RF cables
(item ) to be disconnected. It may be necessary to loosen the connector at the other
end of some of the semirigid cables to allow them to be moved enough.
Note the locations of each of the gray flexible cables for reconnection later. Disconnect
these cables and remove the mixer brick mounting block, with the mixer brick(s) and
A22 splitter attached, from the analyzer.
9. If the A23 mixer brick is to be replaced, disconnect cable W43 from the A23 mixer
brick.
If the A24 mixer brick is to be replaced, disconnect cable W44 and remove the short
circuit termination (item ) from the A24 mixer brick. Retain the short circuit
termination for installation on the new mixer brick.
10. Remove three screws that attach the mixer brick to be replaced to the mixer brick
mounting block, and remove the mixer brick from the mounting block.

N5241A/42A Removing and Replacing the A23 and A24 Mixer Bricks
If replacing the A24 mixer brick, remember to install the short circuit termination
(item ), removed from the old mixer brick, onto the new mixer brick in the same
location.
Torque all RF cable connections to 10 in-lbs.
Figure 7-16 A23 and A24 Mixer Bricks Removal

Removing and Replacing the A25–A28 Bridges and Bridge Mounting Brackets N5241A/42A
Removing and Replacing the A25–A28 Bridges and Bridge

Mounting Brackets
Tools Required
Removal Procedure

4. Disconnect three semirigid cables (item ) from the bridge to be replaced.
5. Remove two screws (item ) from the mounting bracket of the bridge to be replaced.
6. Move the disconnected semirigid cables out of the way and lift the bridge mounting
bracket, with the bridge attached, out of the analyzer. It may be necessary to loosen the
connector at the other end of some of the semirigid cables to allow them to be moved
enough.
7. Remove two screws that attach the bridge to be replaced to the bridge mounting
bracket, and remove the bridge from the bracket.
Torque all RF connectors to 10 in-lbs.

N5241A/42A Removing and Replacing the A25–A28 Bridges and Bridge Mounting Brackets
Figure 7-17 A25 through A28 Bridges Removal

Removing and Replacing the A29–A32 Test Port Couplers N5241A/42A
Removing and Replacing the A29–A32 Test Port Couplers
Tools Required
• 1 inch open-end torque wrench (set to 72 in-lb)
Removal Procedure

4. On 4-port models, it is necessary to remove the couplers in pairs: ports 1/3 and 2/4.
5. Disconnect two semirigid cables (item ) from each coupler to be removed.
6. Disconnect the wire harness (item ) from the corresponding front panel LED board
and place it out of the way.
7. Remove the coupler nut (item ) from each coupler to be removed.
8. Move the disconnected semirigid cables out of the way and remove the coupler(s) from
the analyzer. On 4-port models, separate the coupler pair.
Adhere a new gap pad (4-port) or coupler bumper (2-port) (item ) to the new coupler in
the same location as on the old one. Replace the vibration mount (item ) if necessary.
Refer to “Bottom Hardware and Miscellaneous Parts, All Options Except 029” on page
6-72 for replacement part numbers.
Torque all connectors to 10 in-lbs. Torque coupler nuts to 72 in-lbs.

N5241A/42A Removing and Replacing the A29–A32 Test Port Couplers
Figure 7-18 A29 through A32 Test Port Couplers Removal

Removing and Replacing the A33 Reference Mixer Switch N5241A/42A
Removing and Replacing the A33 Reference Mixer Switch
Tools Required
Removal Procedure

4. Disconnect four semirigid cables (item ) from the A33 reference mixer switch.
5. Remove three screws (item ) that secure the A33 reference mixer switch to the side of
the test set deck.
6. Move the disconnected semirigid cables out of the way and lift the A33 reference mixer
switch and mounting bracket out of the analyzer.
7. Disconnect the wire harness cable (item ) from the A33 reference mixer switch.
8. Remove four screws (item ) that attach the A33 reference mixer switch to its
mounting bracket.
When reinstalling the A33 reference mixer switch into the analyzer, loosely install the
three mounting screws (item ). Connect the four semirigid cables (item ) and torque
the connectors to 10 in-lbs, then tighten the three mounting screws.

N5241A/42A Removing and Replacing the A33 Reference Mixer Switch
Figure 7-19 A33 Reference Mixer Switch Removal

Removing and Replacing the A34–A37 Source Attenuators, the A38–A41 Bias Tees, and the A42–A45 Receiver Attenuators
N5241A/42A
Removing and Replacing the A34–A37 Source Attenuators,

the A38–A41 Bias Tees, and the A42–A45 Receiver Attenuators
Tools Required
• 5/16-inch open-end torque wrench (set to 10 in-lb)
Removal Procedure
of the cables is necessary, but do not over-bend the semirigid cables.

5. The source and receiver attenuator pair, the associated bias tee, and the bracket to
which they are attached, must be removed as a complete assembly.
6. Disconnect the ribbon cable (item ) from the attenuators to be removed.
7. Disconnect the wire harness cable (item ), for the bias tee to be removed, from the
A19 test set motherboard.
8. Disconnect two semirigid cables (item ) from each step attenuator and the bias tee to
be removed. It may be necessary to remove additional cables to remove the attenuator
bracket. If so, note the location and orientation of each for reinstallation later.
9. Remove three screws (item ) that secure the attenuator bracket to the test set deck.
10. Move the disconnected semirigid cables out of the way and lift the attenuator bracket
out of the analyzer, with the attenuators and bias tee attached.
11. Remove two screws (item ) to remove the attenuator or bias tee to be replaced, from
the mounting bracket.
Torque all cable connections to 10 in-lbs.

N5241A/42A Removing and Replacing the A34–A37 Source Attenuators, the A38–A41 Bias Tees, and the A42–A45 Receiver
Attenuators
Figure 7-20 Source and Receiver Step Attenuators and Bias Tees Removal

Removing and Replacing the A38–A41 Bias Tees N5241A/42A
Removing and Replacing the A38–A41 Bias Tees
Tools Required
Removal Procedure

5. On some 4-port models, it may be necessary to remove the attenuator bracket to which
the bias tee is attached to facilitate replacing the bias tee. If this is the case, refer to
6. Disconnect two semirigid cables (item ) from the bias tee to be removed.
7. Remove two screws (item ) from the bias tee to be removed. Make note of the location
of the wire harness cable ground wire for reinstallation later.
8. Disconnect the wire harness cable (item ) from the bias tee.
9. Move the disconnected semirigid cables out of the way and remove the bias tee from the
analyzer
Torque all cable connections to 10 in-lbs.
Remember to place the wire harness cable ground lug on the proper mounting screw.

N5241A/42A Removing and Replacing the A38–A41 Bias Tees
Figure 7-21 A38 through A41 Bias Tees Removal

Removing and Replacing the A46–A49 Bypass Switches and the A50 Combiner N5241A/42A
Removing and Replacing the A46–A49 Bypass Switches and

the A50 Combiner
Tools Required
Removal Procedure

4. The bypass switches and the brackets to which they are attached, must be removed as
a complete assembly. The A50 combiner is removed with the A46 bypass switch.
5. Disconnect four semirigid cables (item ) from the bypass switch to be removed.
If removing the A46 bypass switch or the A50 combiner, disconnect three semirigid
cables (item ) from the A50 combiner.
6. Remove two screws (item ) that secure the switch bracket to the test set deck.
7. Move the disconnected semirigid cables out of the way and remove the switch bracket,
with the bypass switch attached, from the analyzer
8. Disconnect the wire harness cable from the bypass switch to be removed.
9. Remove two screws that attach the bypass switch or the A50 combiner to the switch
bracket.
Torque all cable connectors to 10 in-lbs.

N5241A/42A Removing and Replacing the A46–A49 Bypass Switches and the A50 Combiner
Figure 7-22 A46 through A49 Bypass Switches and A50 Combiner Removal

Removing and Replacing the A51 Hard Disk Drive (HDDA) N5241A/42A
Removing and Replacing the A51 Hard Disk Drive (HDDA)

Certain unique files exist on the hard disk drive (HDD) that are necessary for proper
operation of your analyzer. These files must be copied to another location to allow them to
be installed onto the new HDD after it has been installed.
If you are replacing the HDD, the following procedure must be performed first.
Copy Unique Files from the Hard Disk

If the user has loaded unique calibration kit information, navigate to C:\Program
Files\Agilent\Network Analyzer and copy USER_CALKITFILE to a USB flash
memory drive. Also copy any personal user files that you wish to preserve.
Tools Required
• T-10 TORX driver (set to 7 in-lb; for hard disk drive replacement)
• T-10 TORX driver (set to 9 in-lb; for all other T-10 applications)
HDDA Removal and Replacement Procedure (2.0 GHz CPU Board)

Removal
1. Disconnect the analyzer power cord.
2. Loosen the knurled nut (item ) and pull the A51 HDDA out of the A17 CPU board.
Replacement
1. Slide the A51 HDDA into the A17 CPU board and tighten the knurled nut (item ).

N5241A/42A Removing and Replacing the A51 Hard Disk Drive (HDDA)
Figure 7-23 Hard Disk Drive Assembly Replacement (2.0 GHz CPU Board)

HDDA Removal and Replacement Procedure (1.6 GHz CPU Board)

Removal
1. Disconnect the analyzer power cord.
3. Remove 15 screws (item ) from the CPU board assembly top cover.
4. Lift the top cover enough to disconnect the A51 hard disk drive ribbon cable (item ) at
the CPU board and remove the top cover (with the A51 hard disk drive attached) from
the A17 CPU board assembly.
5. Remove four screws (item ) that secure the A51 hard disk drive to the CPU board
assembly top cover. Remove the ribbon cable from the A51 hard disk drive.
Replacement
1. Reinstall the A51 hard disk drive into the analyzer:
a. Connect the ribbon cable (item ) to the new A51 hard disk drive assembly.
b. Place the CPU board assembly top cover on the A51 hard disk drive assembly and
install the four mounting screws (item ).
c. Position the top cover (with the A51 hard disk drive assembly attached) over the A17
CPU board assembly and reconnect the ribbon cable (item ) to the CPU board.
d. Align the top cover and install the fifteen attachment screws (item ).

Figure 7-24 Hard Disk Drive Assembly Replacement (1.6 GHz CPU Board)

Set Up the Agilent Administrator Password

If the hard disk has been replaced, it is necessary to set up the Agilent administrator
password for the analyzer. This requires obtaining a password from Agilent:
Obtaining a Password
• If this procedure is being performed by Agilent personnel, go to the following Internet
site and follow the instructions under “Agilent Administrator Password”.
http://mktwww.soco.agilent.com/field/service/network/pna/support.htm
• If this procedure is being performed by non-Agilent personnel, contact Agilent for a
password before beginning this procedure. Refer to “Contacting Agilent” on page 2-13.
Entering Your Agilent Administrator Password

The network analyzer must be powered up and operating for this procedure.
1. On the Windows Desktop, right-click on My Computer, and then click Manage.
2. In the Computer Management window, navigate to System Tools, Local Users and
Groups, Users.
3. Right-click on Agilent, and then click on Set Password.
a. Type the password obtained from Agilent as the Password. Refer to “Obtaining a
Password” in this procedure for information if you have not yet obtained this
password.
b. Type the password again in the Confirm password block.
c. Click OK.
4. Right-click on Agilent, and then click on Properties.
a. Unselect User must change password at next logon (if not already unselected).
b. Unselect User cannot change password (if not already unselected).
c. Select Password never expires (if not already selected).
d. Click OK.
5. Close the Computer Management window.

Install Backup Files onto the New Hard Disk Drive

The files that were previously saved onto a USB flash memory drive must now be installed
onto the new HDD. The network analyzer must be powered up and operating.
Post-Repair Procedures
1. Adhere the new Certificate of Authenticity (license) label to the outer cover in the
location specified in Figure 7-1 on page 7-7.

Removing and Replacing the A52 and A53 Option 029 Test Port Switches N5241A/42A
Removing and Replacing the A52 and A53 Option 029

Test Port Switches
Tools Required
Removal Procedure

5. The test port switch, the associated source and receiver attenuator pair, the associated
bias tee, and the bracket to which they are attached, must be removed as a complete
assembly.
6. Disconnect the ribbon cables (item ) from the attenuators to be removed.
7. Disconnect the wire harness cable (item ), for the test port switch to be removed,
from the A55 noise downconverter.
8. Disconnect the semirigid cables (item ) from the test port switch, each associated
step attenuator, and the bias tee to be removed.
9. Disconnect two screws (item ) from the bias tee to be removed. Lift the bias tee, with
its wire harness attached, and place it aside.
10. Remove three screws (item ) that secure the attenuator bracket to the test set deck.
11. Move the disconnected semirigid cables out of the way and lift the attenuator bracket
out of the analyzer, with the attenuators and bias tee attached. It may be necessary to
remove additional cables, or to remove some disconnected cables completely, to remove
the attenuator bracket. If so, note the location and orientation of each for reinstallation
later.
12. Remove two screws to remove the bias tee bracket from the switch to be replaced.
13. Remove two screws to remove the test port switch to be replaced, from the mounting
bracket.

N5241A/42A Removing and Replacing the A52 and A53 Option 029 Test Port Switches
• Be sure to install the bias tee bracket on the new switch and reinstall the bias tee
once the bracket has been reinstalled in the analyzer.
• Torque all cable connections to 10 in-lbs.
Figure 7-25 A52 and A53 Option 029 Test Port Switches Removal

Removing and Replacing the A54 Option 029 Test Port 2 Bridge and the A55 Option 029 Noise Downconverter N5241A/42A
Removing and Replacing the A54 Option 029 Test Port 2

Bridge and the A55 Option 029 Noise Downconverter
Tools Required
Removal Procedure

5. The A54 test port 2 bridge, the A55 noise downconverter, and the cable connecting
these two assemblies, must be removed as a complete assembly.
6. Disconnect the ribbon cable (item ) from the A55 noise downconverter.
7. Disconnect the wire harness cables (item ), from the A55 noise downconverter.
8. Disconnect three semirigid cables (item ) and one flexible RF cable (item ) from the
A55 noise downconverter.
9. Disconnect two semirigid cables (item ) from the A54 test port 2 bridge.
10. Remove the hex nut (item ) and the screw (item ) that secure the A54 test port 2
bridge to the side frame.
11. Remove three screws (item ) that secure the A55 noise downconverter to the side
frame.
12. Move the disconnected cables out of the way and lift out the A54/A55 assembly.
13. Remove the assembly to be replaced.

N5241A/42A Removing and Replacing the A54 Option 029 Test Port 2 Bridge and the A55 Option 029 Noise Downconverter
• When reassembling the A54/A55 assembly, lay the assemblies on a flat surface while
installing and tightening the interconnecting cable (adapter) to ensure that these
assemblies will be flush with the side frame when installed.
• Torque all cable connections to 10 in-lbs.
Figure 7-26 A54 Option 029 Test Port Bridge and A55 Noise Downconverter Removal

Removing and Replacing the Rear Panel N5241A/42A
Removing and Replacing the Rear Panel
Tools Required
Removal Procedure
5. Remove all jumper cables (item ) from the rear panel.
6. Remove the short (item ) and the 50 ohm load(s) (item ).
7. Remove the connector hardware (item ) from each of the five multi-pin connectors.
The hardware is not the same on each connector so note which hardware goes with
which connector.
8. Remove the connector hardware (item ) from each of the RF connectors. The
hardware is not the same on each connector so note which hardware goes with which
connector.
9. Remove the 13 screws (item ) that attach the rear panel to the chassis.
10. Slide the rear panel over the cable connectors and off of the analyzer.

N5241A/42A Removing and Replacing the Rear Panel
Figure 7-27 Rear Panel Removal

Removing and Replacing the Front Panel LED Boards N5241A/42A
Removing and Replacing the Front Panel LED Boards
Tools Required
Removal Procedure

2. Remove the test port couplers. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the A29–A32 Test
Port Couplers” on page 7-38.
3. Remove two screws (item ) from the LED board to be removed and remove the LED
board from the analyzer.

N5241A/42A Removing and Replacing the Front Panel LED Boards
Figure 7-28 Front Panel LED Boards Removal

Removing and Replacing the Fans N5241A/42A
Removing and Replacing the Fans
Tools Required
• Pozidriv screw driver
Removal Procedure
4. Remove the power supply bracket. It is not necessary to remove the entire power
supply, just the power supply bracket. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the A16 Power
Supply Assembly” on page 7-20.
5. Remove five screws (item ) that attach the fan bracket to the chassis.
6. Remove three screws (item ) that attach the rear panel to the fan bracket.
7. Raise the fan bracket out of the analyzer just enough to access the fan cables.
Disconnect the fan cables from the A14 system motherboard connectors (item ).
8. Remove the fan bracket and fans from the analyzer.
9. To remove a fan or fan guard from the fan bracket:
a. Before removing a fan or fan guard, note the orientation of each fan and fan guard
for reinstallation.
b. Pull up the center pin of each of the fan rivets as shown by (item ) in the
illustration.
c. Pull out the rivet completely (as shown by (item ) in the illustration) to release the
fan and fan guard.

N5241A/42A Removing and Replacing the Fans
Figure 7-29 B1 Fan Removal

Removing and Replacing the Lithium Battery N5241A/42A
Removing and Replacing the Lithium Battery
Tools Required
Removal Procedure (2.0 GHz CPU Board)

3. Remove the A17 CPU board. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the A17 CPU Board
4. Remove top cover attachment screws (item ) and (item ).
5. Lift the top cover off of the CPU board assembly.
6. Remove the battery from the battery holder by lifting it at the open end of the holder
and then sliding it from under the clip (item ).
7. DO NOT THROW AWAY THE BATTERY. COLLECT IT AS SMALL CHEMICAL
WASTE. Refer to “Lithium Battery Disposal” on page 1-8 for additional information on
battery disposal.

N5241A/42A Removing and Replacing the Lithium Battery
Figure 7-30 Lithium Battery Removal (2.0 GHz CPU Board)

Removing and Replacing the Lithium Battery N5241A/42A
Removal Procedure (1.6 GHz CPU Board)

Refer to Figure 7-31. for this procedure.
3. Remove the A17 CPU board. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the A17 CPU Board
4. Remove 15 top cover attachment screws (item ).
5. Lift the top cover enough to disconnect the hard disk drive cable (item ) from the
CPU board, then remove the top cover (with the hard disk drive attached) from the A17
CPU board assembly.
6. Remove the battery from the battery holder by lifting it at the open end of the holder
and then sliding it from under the clip (item ).
7. DO NOT THROW AWAY THE BATTERY. COLLECT IT AS SMALL CHEMICAL
WASTE. Refer to “Lithium Battery Disposal” on page 1-8 for additional information on
battery disposal.
1. Reverse the order of the removal procedure following all instructions included with the
new battery.

N5241A/42A Removing and Replacing the Lithium Battery
Figure 7-31. Lithium Battery Removal (1.6 GHz CPU Board)

Post-Repair Procedures N5241A/42A
Post-Repair Procedures
After the replacement of an assembly, you must perform the service procedures in the
order listed in Table 7-2.
Procedures referenced in this table are located in Chapter 3, “Tests and
Adjustments,” unless specified otherwise.
Table 7-2 Related Service Procedures
Adjustments Verification, Performance,

Replaced Assembly and Other Procedures and Other Tests and Procedures

A1 front panel display board No adjustment needed
and A3 Display Test in Chapter 4
A2 USB board No adjustment needed Check for proper operation
A3 display assembly No adjustment needed A3 Display Test in Chapter 4

Source Adjustment
Receiver Adjustment Frequency Accuracy Test
Synthesizer Bandwidth Source Power Accuracy Test
A4 13.5 GHz source 1
Adjustment Source Maximum Power Output Test
synthesizer board
EE Default Adjustment Source Power Linearity Test
IF Gain Adjustment The Operator’s Check
Source Adjustment
A5 26.5 GHz source board Source Maximum Power Output Test
Receiver Adjustment Source Power Linearity Test

Source Adjustment
A8 26.5 GHz source board Source Maximum Power Output Test
Receiver Adjustment
Source Power Linearity Test
10 MHz Frequency Reference

Adjustment
A10 frequency reference board Restore option data (Refer to Frequency Accuracy Test
“Repairing and Recovering
Option Data” in Chapter 8.)
Source Adjustment
Synthesizer Bandwidth Source Power Accuracy Test
A11 13.5 GHz LO synthesizer
Adjustment Source Maximum Power Output Test
board
EE Default Adjustment Source Power Linearity Test
Noise Floor Test
A12 SPAM board No adjustment needed
Trace Noise Test

N5241A/42A Post-Repair Procedures
Table 7-2 Related Service Procedures (Continued)

Source Adjustment
A13 13.5 GHz source 2 Synthesizer Bandwidth Adjustment
Source Maximum Power Output Test
synthesizer board EE Default Adjustment Source Power Linearity Test
A14 system motherboard No adjustment needed and A3 Display Test in Chapter 4
A15 midplane board No adjustment needed None needed
A16 power supply assembly No adjustment needed None needed
A17 CPU board No adjustment needed The Operator’s Check
A18 GPIB board No adjustment needed None needed

Run Eeprom backup.exe at directory
C:/program file/agilent/network
analyzer/service/Eeprom backup.exe.
Save EEPROM backup; Restore
TSMB from EEPROM backup.
A19 test set motherboard Reinstall the serial number. (Refer to The Operator’s Check
“Installing or Changing a Serial
Number” in Chapter 8.)
Re-enable all hardware options.
(Refer to “Option Entitlement
Certificate” in Chapter 8.)
A20 IF multiplexer board IF Gain Adjustment The Operator’s Check
Source Adjustment Frequency Accuracy Test

Receiver Adjustment Source Power Accuracy Test
A21 HMA26.5 EE Default Adjustment Source Maximum Power Output Test
IF Gain Adjustment Source Power Linearity Test
Receiver Characterization The Operator’s Check

Source Adjustment
A22 splitter Source Maximum Power Output Test
Receiver Adjustment Source Power Linearity Test

Post-Repair Procedures N5241A/42A
Table 7-2 Related Service Procedures (Continued)

Receiver Compression Test

Noise Floor Test
A23 and A24 mixer bricks Receiver Adjustment
Calibration Coefficients Test
Dynamic Accuracy Test
Source Adjustment Source Maximum Power Output Test
A25–A28 bridges
Receiver Adjustment Calibration Coefficients Test
A29–A32 test port couplers
A33 reference mixer switch No adjustment needed The Operator’s Check
A34–A37 source step Source Adjustment Source Maximum Power Output Test
attenuators Receiver Adjustment Calibration Coefficients Test

A38–A41 bias tees
A42–A45 receiver step Source Adjustment Source Maximum Power Output Test
attenuators Receiver Adjustment Calibration Coefficients Test
A46–A49 source bypass Source Adjustment Source Maximum Power Output Test
switches Receiver Adjustment Calibration Coefficients Test

A50 combiner
Restore previously saved receiver

A51 hard disk drive calibration dataa Read and write to the drive
(or perform Receiver Adjustment)
B1 fan No adjustment needed Check for fan operation
Battery No adjustment needed None
a. If a backup copy of receiver calibration data from the faulty disk drive is available, it can be copied to
the new disk drive. If not, new data must be generated by performing the “Receiver Adjustment.”

8 General Purpose Maintenance
Procedures

General Purpose Maintenance Procedures PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
Chapter Eight at-a-Glance
Error Terms How to use error terms as a preventive page 8-3

maintenance and troubleshooting tool.
Option Enable Utility How to use the option enable utility to: page 8-13
• enable options that have been added to
your analyzer,
• repair lost or damaged option data,
• install or change a serial number.
Firmware Upgrades How to check your analyzer’s current page 8-17

firmware revision and where to locate
firmware upgrades.
Operating System Recovery Where to find the information on recovering page 8-18
from a damaged operating system.
Correction Constants How to store correction constants after page 8-19

making adjustments to your analyzer.


Hardkey
on the instrument.

PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers General Purpose Maintenance Procedures
N5241A/42A Error Terms
Error Terms
Using Error Terms as a Diagnostic Tool

By examining error terms, you can monitor system performance for preventive
maintenance and troubleshooting purposes.
The magnitude and shape of the error terms are affected by:
• calibration kit devices
• cables
• adapters and accessories
• the assemblies from the signal separation group of the analyzer
Calibration kit devices, cables, and adapters and accessories are the most common cause of
error term anomalies. Make sure of the following:
• Connectors must be clean, gaged, and within specification.
• Use proper connection technique during measurement and calibration. For information
on connection technique and on cleaning and gaging connectors, refer to “Review the
Principles of Connector Care” on page 3-5 or to the calibration kit’s user’s and service
guide.
Preventive Maintenance
If you print or plot the error terms at set intervals (weekly, monthly and so forth), you can
compare current error terms to these records. A stable system should generate repeatable
error terms over long intervals, (for example, six months). Look for the following:
• A long-term trend often reflects drift, connector and cable wear, or gradual degradation,
indicating the need for further investigation and preventive maintenance. Yet, the
system may still conform to specifications. The cure is often as simple as cleaning and
gaging connectors and cables.
• A sudden shift in error terms may indicate the need for troubleshooting.
Troubleshooting
You can use the error terms as a tool to isolate faulty assemblies in the signal separation
group of your analyzer. You can compare the current values to preventive maintenance
records or to the typical values listed in Table 8-5 on page 8-10.
To find assemblies related to error term failures, refer to error term descriptions in “Error
Term Data” on page 8-10. Each description lists common assemblies related to each error
term. Identify the assembly and refer to Chapter 4, “Troubleshooting.”
NOTE Always suspect calibration devices, cables, or improper connector

maintenance as the primary cause of an error term anomaly.

Error Terms N5241A/42A
Performing Measurement Calibration

A calibration must be performed to allow the analyzer to calculate the error terms before
they can be used as a tool:
CAUTION Perform the following procedure only at a static-safe workstation, and wear a
grounded wrist strap.
To reduce the chance of electrostatic discharge, follow all of the
page 1-6, when performing the following calibration.
1. Connect a type-N cable to Port 2.

2. Perform a full 2-port calibration, FULL SOLT 2-Port. Refer to embedded help in the
analyzer if necessary.
Using Flowgraphs to Identify Error Terms

Flowgraphs are a graphical representation of signal flow through the measurement path.
The flowgraphs in Figure 8-1, Figure 8-2, Figure 8-3, and Figure 8-4 illustrate the error
terms associated with measurement calibration for 1-port, 2-port, 3-port, and 4-port
configurations respectively.
Figure 8-1 Flowgraph of One-Port Error Terms for Port 1
where:
E = Error term
Subscript:
D = Directivity
S = Source Match
R = Reflection Tracking
The error terms are the same for a one port measurement on Port 2 (S22).

Figure 8-2 Flowgraph of Two-Port Error Terms
where:
E = error term
1st Subscript:
D = Directivity
S = Source Match
R = Reflection Tracking
X = Crosstalk (Isolation)
L = Load Match
T = Transmission Tracking
2nd Subscript:
F = forward measurement (Ports 1 to Port 2)
R = reverse measurement (Ports 2 to Port 1)

Figure 8-3 Flowgraph of Three-Port Error Terms
where:
E = error term
DIR = Directivity
MAT = Forward Source Match and Reverse Load Match
TRK = Forward Reflection Tracking and Reverse Transmission Tracking
For the case of a full 3-port calibration, port 1 has

three Match error terms:
S11 source match
S12 load match
S13 load match
and three Tracking error terms:
S11 reflection tracking
S12 transmission tracking
There are six isolation terms not shown.

Figure 8-4 Flowgraph of Four-Port Error Terms
where:
E = error term
DIR = Directivity
MAT = Forward Source Match and Reverse Load Match
TRK = Forward Reflection Tracking and Reverse Transmission Tracking
For the case of a full 4-port calibration, port 1 has

four Match error terms:
S11 source match
S12 load match
S13 load match
S14 load match
and four Tracking error terms:
S11 reflection tracking
There are eight isolation (crosstalk) terms not shown.

Accessing Error Terms

Error terms can be accessed either manually or programmatically:
Manually
• “Front Panel Access to Error Terms” on page 8-8
Programmatically
• “GPIB Access to Error Terms” on page 8-9
• “COM/DCOM Access to Error Terms” on page 8-9
Manual Access to Error Terms
Front Panel Access to Error Terms
NOTE Ensure that calibration correction is active by pressing RESPONSE Cal and
verifying that the softkey label reads Correction ON/off. If not, press the
Correction on/OFF key and it will toggle to read Correction ON/off .
To access the error terms from the front panel, perform the following steps:
1. Press RESPONSE Cal , then Manage Cals . Verify that Cal Set Viewer ON/off is ON. If
not, press the softkey to toggle it ON.
The Cal Set Viewer toolbar appears directly above the trace window.
2. In the Cal Set list, select the desired cal set.
3. Click the Standards or Error Terms button to view the raw measurement data from the
standard or the corrected error term data.
4. In the Standard or Error Terms list, select the standard or error terms to view. Click the
Enable check box to enable the selection.
5. Compare the displayed measurement trace to previously measured data or to the
uncorrected performance specifications listed in Table 8-5 on page 8-10.
6. Print numerical data or print a plot of the measurement results.

Programmatic Access to Error Terms

GPIB Access to Error Terms You can access error terms by way of GPIB with Standard
Commands for Programmable Instruments (SCPI).
For more information on GPIB and SCPI, refer to the embedded help in the analyzer. Type
in keyword “errors, systematic” in the index.
COM/DCOM Access to Error Terms You can access error terms by way of Component
Object Model (COM) or Distributed Component Object Model (DCOM) software
architecture.
For more information on COM and DCOM, refer to the embedded help in the analyzer.
Type in keyword “errors, systematic” in the index.

Error Term Data

The error term descriptions in this section include the following information:
• a table of the error terms
• description and significance of each error term
• measurements affected by each error term
• typical cause of failure for each error term
The same description applies to both the forward (F) and reverse (R) terms.
IMPORTANT Data are listed here as a convenience only. Detailed instrument specifications
are listed in the embedded help in the network analyzer.
If Error Terms Seem Worse than Expected

To verify that the system still conforms to specifications, perform a system verification.
Refer to Chapter 3, “Tests and Adjustments”.
Figure 8-5 Error Term Dataa

Frequency Range
Parameter
(All options, 10 MHz 50 MHz 3.2 GHz 10 GHz 16 GHz 24 GHz
all ports) to to to to to to
50 MHz 3.2 GHz 10 GHz 16 GHz 24 GHz 26.5 GHz
Directivity 16 dBm 24 dBm 23 dBm 16 dBm 16 dBm 16 dBm
Source
11 dBm 18 dBm 14 dBm 12 dBm 10 dBm 8 dBm
Match
Load
11 dBm 17 dBm 13 dBm 10 dBm 9 dBm 8 dBm
Match
10 MHz 50 MHz 100 MHz 500 MHz 3.2 GHz 20 GHz

to to to to to to
50 MHz 100 MHz 500 MHz 3.2 GHz 20 GHz 26.5 GHz
Crosstalkb -84 dBm -90 dBm -110 dBm -120 dBm -122 dBm -117 dBm
a. The data in this table are uncorrected system performance. The values apply over an
environmental temperature range of 25 °C ±5 °C, with less than 1 °C deviation from the
calibration temperature.
b. All crosstalk values are typical. Measurement conditions: normalized to a thru, measured
with two shorts, 10 Hz IF bandwidth, averaging factor of 8, alternate mode, source power
set to the lesser of the maximum power out or the maximum receiver power.

Directivity (EDF and EDR)

EDF and EDR are the uncorrected forward and reverse directivity error terms of the
system. The directivity error of the test port is determined by measuring the S11 and S22
reflection of the calibration kit load. The load has a much better return loss specification
than does the uncorrected test port. Therefore, any power detected from this measurement
is assumed to be from directivity error.
The measurements most affected by directivity errors are measurements of low reflection
devices.
Typical Cause of Failure The calibration kit load is the most common cause of
directivity specification failure.
If the load has been gaged and its performance independently verified, suspect the
analyzer test port coupler.
To troubleshoot, refer to “Checking the Signal Separation Group” on page 4-33.
Source Match (ESF and ESR)

ESF and ESR are the forward and reverse uncorrected source match terms of the driven
port. They are obtained by measuring the reflection (S11, S22) of an open, and a short that
are connected directly to the ports. Source match is a measure of the match of the coupler,
as well as the match between all components from the source to the output port.
The measurements most affected by source match errors are reflection and transmission
measurements of highly reflective DUTs.
Typical Cause of Failure The calibration kit open or short is the most common cause of
source match specification failure.
If the open or short performance has been independently verified, then suspect the
analyzer switch splitter, step attenuator, or coupler.
To troubleshoot, refer to “Checking the Signal Separation Group” on page 4-33.
Load Match (ELF and ELR)

Load match is a measure of the impedance match of the test port that terminates the
output of a 2-port device. The match of test port cables is included in this response. Load
match error terms are characterized by measuring the S11 and S22 responses of a “thru”
configuration during the calibration procedure.
The measurements most affected by load match errors are all transmission measurements,
and reflection measurements of a low insertion loss two-port device, such as an airline.
Typical Cause of Failure The calibration kit load or a bad “thru” cable is the most
common cause of load match specification failure.
If the load and cable performance are independently verified, then suspect the analyzer
test port coupler, step attenuator, or the test receiver at the bad port.
To troubleshoot, refer to “Checking the Receiver Group” on page 4-37 or to “Checking the

Isolation (Crosstalk) (EXF and EXR)

Isolation, or crosstalk, is the uncorrected forward and reverse isolation error terms that
represent leakage between the test ports and the signal paths. The isolation error terms
are characterized by measuring transmission (S21, S12) with loads attached to both ports
during the measurement calibration.isolation errors affect transmission measurements
primarily where the measured signal level is very low.
The measurements most affected by isolation error terms are DUTs with large insertion
loss. Since these terms are low in magnitude, they are usually noisy (not very repeatable).
Typical Cause of Failure A loose cable connection or leakage between components in the
test set are the most likely cause of isolation problems.
After verifying the cable and its connections, suspect the analyzer switch splitter, step
attenuator, coupler, or receivers, and associated cabling.
To troubleshoot, refer to “Checking the Receiver Group” on page 4-37 or to “Checking the

N5241A/42A Option Enable Utility
Option Enable Utility
Accessing the Option Enable Utility

To start the option enable utility:
• Press UTILITY System , then Service , then Option Enable .
• A dialog box similar to the one illustrated in Figure 8-6 is displayed.
Figure 8-6 Option Enable Dialog Box
Option Entitlement Certificate

If you have received an “Option Entitlement Certificate”, follow the instructions on the
certificate, under “HOW TO USE THIS CERTIFICATE:”, to obtain license key(s) for the
option(s) listed on the certificate. See the important note below.
NOTE When upgrading from one model number to another, a new option
entitlement certificate will be issued. When this certificate is redeemed for a
license key, the automated system will ask for the instrument's Host ID. Be
sure to use the new Host ID that is associated with the new model number.
Using the current Host ID will cause a license to be generated that will not
work with the instrument. To determine the new Host ID, use the utility at
the below listed web site with the new model number.
http://na.tm.agilent.com/pna/upgrades.html

Option Enable Utility N5241A/42A
Enabling or Removing Options

There are two types of options:
• Hardware: Hardware options involve adding additional hardware to the analyzer. After
the proper hardware has been installed in the analyzer, the option can be enabled using
the option enable utility.
It is necessary to re-enable all installed hardware options if the test set motherboard is
replaced.
• Software: Software options add features or functionality to the analyzer without the
need for additional hardware. These options are enabled using the option enable utility
and require a special license key.
NOTE Some applications require a license key that is provided by Agilent. If you do
not have the required license key, contact Agilent for assistance. Refer to
It is necessary to backup all installed software options if the frequency reference board
is replaced.
To enable or remove an option:
1. Start the option enable utility. Refer to “Accessing the Option Enable Utility” on
page 8-13.
2. Click the arrow in the Select Desired Option box. A list of available options, similar to the
list below, will appear.
020 - Add IF inputs
021 - Pulse Modulator on Source 1
022 - Pulse Modulator on Source 2
025 - 4-Channel Pulse Generator
029 - Full Noise Measurements
086 - Gain Compression Application
087- IMD Measurements
219 - Src/Rcvr Atten & Bias Ts 2-Port
419 - Src/Rcvr Atten & Bias Ts 4-Port
224 - 2nd Src w/Combiner & Switches
423 - Combiner & Switches
??? - Enter Unlisted Option
3. Click on the option that you wish to either enable or remove, and then click Enable or
Remove, whichever is appropriate.
4. If the desired option is not available in the list, select: “??? - Enter Unlisted Option”. A
dialog box appears that will allow you to enter the option number. Enter the option
number and follow the instructions on the display.

N5241A/42A Option Enable Utility
Repairing and Recovering Option Data

License, option, and model number data are stored in an EEPROM on the frequency
reference board and written into the gen.lic file on the hard disk drive. If the data stored in
either of these items is lost, it can be recovered from the other item.
If the data on both the hard disk drive and the frequency reference board is lost, it can not
be recovered. Contact Agilent for assistance. Refer to “Contacting Agilent” on page 2-13.
Recovery of Data After Repair

• If the frequency reference board is replaced, use the Repair selection to recover data that
has been lost as a result of the repair:
1. Select Repair from the Option Enable menu bar (see Figure 8-6 on page 8-13).
2. Click the Freq Ref board has been replaced check box.
3. Click Begin Repair. The data is written from the gen.lic file into the EEPROM.
• If the hard disk drive is replaced, a new gen.lic file is automatically created when the
Network Analyzer application starts, by retrieving the data from the EEPROM.
Recovery of Data if Option or Model Numbers are Incorrect

If the analyzer option or model numbers are not listed correctly on the analyzer display, in
either the Option Enable Dialog Box or the About Network Analyzer display, you should
regenerate the options license file, gen.lic:
1. Exit the Network Analyzer application.
2. Remove (or rename) the existing gen.lic file:
a. Open Windows Explorer and navigate to C:\Program Files\Agilent\Network
Analyzer.
b. Delete (or rename) gen.lic.
3. Exit the Windows Explorer application.
4. Open the Network Analyzer application. The application will generate a new gen.lic file
when it starts.
5. Check the option listing:
a. Press UTILITY System , then Service , then Option Enable or
b. Press UTILITY System , then Help , then About NA... .
6. If the options are still not listed correctly, contact Agilent for assistance. Refer to

Option Enable Utility N5241A/42A
Installing or Changing a Serial Number

It is necessary to reinstall the instrument serial number if the test set motherboard is
replaced.
IMPORTANT Use extreme care when entering the serial number, as only one attempt is
allowed.
1. To change a serial number, select Change Serial from the Option Enable menu bar (see
Figure 8-6 on page 8-13). The current serial number is displayed. If no serial number
has previously been entered, the word “NONE” will be displayed.
2. VERY CAREFULLY, type the new serial number into the space provided and then click
Change.
3. If an error is made in entering the serial number, obtain a clear code from Agilent, enter
the clear code in the space provided and click CLEAR. The correct serial number can
then be entered.
NOTE To change an incorrect serial number, a clear-code password is required.

Contact Agilent to obtain the clear-code. Refer to “Contacting Agilent” on
page 2-13.

N5241A/42A Firmware Upgrades
Firmware Upgrades
How to Check the Current Firmware Version

1. Press UTILITY System , then Help , then About NA... .
A dialog box showing the current installed Application Code Version is displayed.
2. To determine if a firmware update is available, proceed to “Downloading from the
Internet.”
Downloading from the Internet

If your network analyzer is connected to the Internet, there are two methods available for
checking the availability of, and downloading, new firmware:
• Download directly from: http://www.agilent.com/find/pna. (Select your analyzer’s
model number in this web site to view available upgrades.)
• Press UTILITY System , then Service , then AgileUpdate .
AgileUpdate compares the firmware revision currently installed in your network

analyzer to the latest version available and assists you in downloading and installing
the most recent version.

Operating System Recovery N5241A/42A
Operating System Recovery
Recovering from Hard Disk Drive Problems

If you suspect that you have a hard disk drive problem, go to the “Hard Drive Recovery”
link on the Agilent PNA Series: Service & Support Home Page on the Internet.
The URL for the Agilent PNA Series: Service & Support Home Page is:
http://na.tm.agilent.com/pna/
The URL for the Hard Drive Recovery page is:
http://na.tm.agilent.com/pna/hdrecovery.html

N5241A/42A Correction Constants
Correction Constants
The analyzer stores many correction constants in non-volatile EEPROM memory. These
constants enable the analyzer to produce accurate, leveled source signals and receive clean
test signals.
Storing Correction Constants

After performing any adjustment listed on page 3-36 in this manual, store the correction
constants to a backup file on the analyzer hard disk drive by performing these steps:
• Navigate to the EEPROM Backup Utility, located at:
C:\Program Files\Agilent\Network Analyzer\Service\eebackup.exe
• Run the program.
• Click Backup EEPROM.
• Click Exit when the program has finished.

Correction Constants N5241A/42A

Index
Numerics removal and replacement troubleshooting, 4-30

illustrated, 7-15 A11 13.5 GHz LO synthesizer
010, time domain option, 2-3 procedure, 7-14 board
020, IF inputs option, 2-4 illustrated, 6-15
021, source 1 pulse modulator troubleshooting, 4-32
2-port configuration with 2nd operation, 5-10
option, 2-4
022, source 2 pulse modulator source, combiner, and source part number, 6-14
option, 2-4 switches, Option 224, 2-6 removal and replacement
025, four internal pulse 2-port configuration with illustrated, 7-15
generators, 2-4 extended power and bias procedure, 7-14
029, noise figure measurement tees, Option 219, 2-5 troubleshooting, 4-30
capability, 2-4 2-port standard configuration, A12 SPAM board
080, frequency offset mode Option 200, 2-5 illustrated, 6-15
option, 2-4 400, option
description of, 2-6 operation
082, scalar calibrated converter analog, 5-24
measurements option, 2-5 419, option
description of, 2-6 digital, 5-32
083, vector and scalar calibrated
frequency converter 423, option part number, 6-14
measurements option, 2-5 description of, 2-6 removal and replacement
13.5 GHz LO synthesizer board 4-port configuration with illustrated, 7-15
operation, 5-10 combiner and source procedure, 7-14
part number, 6-14 switches, Option 423, 2-6 troubleshooting, 4-39
removal and replacement 4-port configuration with A13 13.5 GHz source 2 synthesizer
illustrated, 7-15 extended power and bias board
procedure, 7-14 tees, Option 419, 2-6 illustrated, 6-15
4-port standard configuration, operation, 5-10
troubleshooting, 4-30 Option 400, 2-6
13.5 GHz source 1 synthesizer part number, 6-14
551, option removal and replacement
board description of, 2-6
illustrated, 6-15 illustrated, 7-15
897, option
operation, 5-10 built-in tests for commercial procedure, 7-14
part number, 6-14 calibration, 2-6 troubleshooting, 4-31
removal and replacement 898, option A14 system motherboard
illustrated, 7-15 built-in tests for standards illustrated, 6-15
procedure, 7-14 compliant calibration, 2-6 operation, 5-31
troubleshooting, 4-31 part number, 6-14
13.5 GHz source 2 synthesizer removal and replacement
board A illustrated, 7-17
illustrated, 6-15 A channel procedure, 7-16
operation, 5-10 troubleshooting, 4-25 A15 midplane board
part number, 6-14 typical power output, 4-34 illustrated, 6-15
removal and replacement A trace part number, 6-14
illustrated, 7-15 troubleshooting, 4-25, 4-28 removal and replacement
procedure, 7-14 A, B, R1, and R2 traces illustrated, 7-19
troubleshooting, 4-31 troubleshooting, 4-28 procedure, 7-18
200, option A1 front panel display board A16 power supply assembly
description of, 2-5 operation, 5-31 illustrated, 6-15
219, option A1 front panel interface board operation, 5-34
description of, 2-5 illustrated, 6-13 part number, 6-14
224, option part number, 6-12 removal and replacement
description of, 2-6 removal and replacement illustrated, 7-21
26.5 GHz source 1 board illustrated, 7-11 procedure, 7-20
illustrated, 6-15 procedure, 7-10 troubleshooting, 4-7
part number, 6-14 troubleshooting, 4-12, 4-13 A17 CPU board
removal and replacement A10 frequency reference board illustrated, 6-15
illustrated, 7-15 illustrated, 6-15 operation, 5-32
procedure, 7-14 operation, 5-11 part number, 6-14
troubleshooting, 4-32 part number, 6-14 removal and replacement
26.5 GHz source 2 board removal and replacement illustrated, 7-23
illustrated, 6-15 illustrated, 7-15 procedure, 7-22
part number, 6-14 procedure, 7-14 troubleshooting, 4-17
Service Guide N5242-90001 Index-1

Index
A18 GPIB board troubleshooting, 4-38 troubleshooting, 4-12, 4-13

illustrated, 6-15 A24 mixer brick A30 test port 3 coupler
part number, 6-14 illustrated, 6-41, 6-47, 6-59 illustrated, 6-41, 6-47, 6-59
removal and replacement operation, 5-21 operation, 5-17
illustrated, 7-25 part number, 6-40, 6-46, 6-58 part number, 6-40, 6-46, 6-58
procedure, 7-24 removal and replacement removal and replacement
A19 test set motherboard illustrated, 7-35 procedure, 7-38, 7-39
illustrated, 6-19, 6-25, 6-33, procedure, 7-34 troubleshooting, 4-35
6-41, 6-47, 6-59 troubleshooting, 4-38 A31 test port 4 coupler
operation, 5-12 A25 test port 1 bridge illustrated, 6-41, 6-47, 6-59
part number, 6-18, 6-24, 6-32, illustrated, 6-19, 6-25, 6-33, operation, 5-17
6-40, 6-46, 6-58 6-41, 6-47, 6-59 part number, 6-40, 6-46, 6-58
removal and replacement part number, 6-18, 6-24, 6-32, removal and replacement
illustrated, 7-27 6-40, 6-46, 6-58 procedure, 7-38, 7-39
procedure, 7-26 removal and replacement troubleshooting, 4-35
A2 USB board illustrated, 7-37 A32 test port 2 coupler
illustrated, 6-13 procedure, 7-36 illustrated, 6-19, 6-25, 6-33,
part number, 6-12 troubleshooting, 4-35 6-41, 6-47, 6-59
removal and replacement A26 test port 3 bridge operation, 5-17
illustrated, 7-11 illustrated, 6-41, 6-47, 6-59 part number, 6-18, 6-24, 6-32,
procedure, 7-10 part number, 6-40, 6-46, 6-58 6-40, 6-46, 6-58
troubleshooting, 4-13 removal and replacement removal and replacement
A20 IF multiplexer board illustrated, 7-37 procedure, 7-38, 7-39
illustrated, 6-19, 6-25, 6-33, procedure, 7-36 troubleshooting, 4-35
6-41, 6-47, 6-59 troubleshooting, 4-35 A33 reference mixer switch
operation, 5-22 A27 test port 4 bridge illustrated, 6-19, 6-25, 6-33,
part number, 6-18, 6-24, 6-32, illustrated, 6-41, 6-47, 6-59 6-41, 6-47, 6-59
6-40, 6-46, 6-58 part number, 6-40, 6-46, 6-58 operation, 5-21
removal and replacement removal and replacement part number, 6-18, 6-24, 6-32,
illustrated, 7-29 illustrated, 7-37 6-40, 6-46, 6-58
procedure, 7-28 procedure, 7-36 removal and replacement
troubleshooting, 4-39 troubleshooting, 4-35 illustrated, 7-41
A21 HMA26.5 A28 test port 2 bridge procedure, 7-40
illustrated, 6-19, 6-25, 6-33, illustrated, 6-19, 6-25, 6-33, troubleshooting, 4-39
6-41, 6-47, 6-59 6-41, 6-47, 6-59 A34 test port 1 source step
operation, 5-11, 5-17 part number, 6-18, 6-24, 6-32, attenuator
part number, 6-18, 6-24, 6-32, 6-40, 6-46, 6-58 illustrated, 6-25, 6-33, 6-47,
6-40, 6-46, 6-58 removal and replacement 6-59
removal and replacement illustrated, 7-37 part number, 6-24, 6-32, 6-46,
illustrated, 7-31 procedure, 7-36 6-58
procedure, 7-30 troubleshooting, 4-35 removal and replacement
troubleshooting, 4-30 A29 test port 1 coupler illustrated, 7-43
A22 splitter illustrated, 6-19, 6-25, 6-33, procedure, 7-42
illustrated, 6-41, 6-47, 6-59 6-41, 6-47, 6-59 troubleshooting, 4-36
part number, 6-40, 6-46, 6-58 operation, 5-17 A35 test port 3 source step
removal and replacement part number, 6-18, 6-24, 6-32, attenuator
illustrated, 7-33 6-40, 6-46, 6-58 illustrated, 6-47, 6-59
procedure, 7-32 removal and replacement part number, 6-46, 6-58
troubleshooting, 4-31 illustrated, 7-39 removal and replacement
A23 mixer brick procedure, 7-38 illustrated, 7-43
illustrated, 6-19, 6-25, 6-33, troubleshooting, 4-35 procedure, 7-42
6-41, 6-47, 6-59 A3 display assembly troubleshooting, 4-36
operation, 5-21 illustrated, 6-13 A36 test port 4 source step
part number, 6-18, 6-24, 6-32, operation, 5-31 attenuator
6-40, 6-46, 6-58 part number, 6-12 illustrated, 6-47, 6-59
removal and replacement removal and replacement part number, 6-46, 6-58
illustrated, 7-35 illustrated, 7-12, 7-13 removal and replacement
procedure, 7-34 procedure, 7-12 illustrated, 7-43
Index-2 Service Guide N5242-90001

Index
procedure, 7-42 part number, 6-24, 6-32, 6-46, removal and replacement
troubleshooting, 4-36 6-58 illustrated, 7-47
A37 test port 2 source step removal and replacement procedure, 7-46
attenuator illustrated, 7-43 troubleshooting, 4-36
illustrated, 6-25, 6-33, 6-47, procedure, 7-42 A49 test port 2 source bypass
6-59 troubleshooting, 4-39 switch
part number, 6-24, 6-32, 6-46, A43 test port 3 receiver step illustrated, 6-33, 6-59
6-58 attenuator part number, 6-32, 6-58
removal and replacement illustrated, 6-47, 6-59 removal and replacement
illustrated, 7-43 operation, 5-21 illustrated, 7-47
procedure, 7-42 part number, 6-46, 6-58 procedure, 7-46
troubleshooting, 4-36 removal and replacement troubleshooting, 4-36
A38 test port 1 bias tee illustrated, 7-43 A5 26.5 GHz source 1 board
illustrated, 6-25, 6-33, 6-47, procedure, 7-42 illustrated, 6-15
6-59 troubleshooting, 4-39 operation, 5-10
part number, 6-24, 6-32, 6-46, A44 test port 4 receiver step part number, 6-14
6-58 attenuator removal and replacement, 7-14
removal and replacement illustrated, 6-47, 6-59 illustrated, 7-15
illustrated, 7-43, 7-45 operation, 5-21 troubleshooting, 4-32
procedure, 7-42, 7-44 part number, 6-46, 6-58 A50 combiner
troubleshooting, 4-36 removal and replacement illustrated, 6-33, 6-59
A39 test port 3 bias tee illustrated, 7-43 part number, 6-32, 6-58
illustrated, 6-47, 6-59 procedure, 7-42 removal and replacement
part number, 6-46, 6-58 troubleshooting, 4-39 illustrated, 7-47
removal and replacement A45 test port 2 receiver step procedure, 7-46
illustrated, 7-43, 7-45 attenuator A51 hard disk drive
procedure, 7-42, 7-44 illustrated, 6-25, 6-33, 6-47, illustrated, 6-15
troubleshooting, 4-36 6-59 operation, 5-33
A4 13.5 GHz source 1 synthesizer operation, 5-21 part number, 6-14
board part number, 6-24, 6-32, 6-46, removal and replacement
illustrated, 6-15 6-58 illustrated, 7-49, 7-51
operation, 5-10 removal and replacement procedure, 7-48
part number, 6-14 illustrated, 7-43 A52 test port 1 Option 029 switch
removal and replacement procedure, 7-42 illustrated, 6-25, 6-33, 6-47,
illustrated, 7-15 troubleshooting, 4-39 6-59
procedure, 7-14 A46 test port 1 source bypass operation, 5-27
troubleshooting, 4-31 switch part number, 6-24, 6-32, 6-46,
A40 test port 4 bias tee illustrated, 6-33, 6-59 6-58
illustrated, 6-47, 6-59 part number, 6-32, 6-58 removal and replacement
part number, 6-46, 6-58 removal and replacement illustrated, 7-55
removal and replacement illustrated, 7-47 procedure, 7-54
illustrated, 7-43, 7-45 procedure, 7-46 A53 test port 2 Option 029 switch
procedure, 7-42, 7-44 troubleshooting, 4-36 illustrated, 6-25, 6-33, 6-47,
troubleshooting, 4-36 A47 SRC 2 OUT 1 source bypass 6-59
A41 test port 2 bias tee switch operation, 5-27
illustrated, 6-25, 6-33, 6-47, illustrated, 6-33 part number, 6-24, 6-32, 6-46,
6-59 part number, 6-32 6-58
part number, 6-24, 6-32, 6-46, A47 test port 3 source bypass removal and replacement
6-58 switch illustrated, 7-55
removal and replacement illustrated, 6-59
procedure, 7-54
illustrated, 7-43, 7-45 part number, 6-58
A54 test port 2 Option 029 bridge
procedure, 7-42, 7-44 removal and replacement illustrated, 6-25, 6-33, 6-47,
troubleshooting, 4-36 illustrated, 7-47 6-59
A42 test port 1 receiver step procedure, 7-46 operation, 5-27
attenuator troubleshooting, 4-36 part number, 6-24, 6-32, 6-46,
illustrated, 6-25, 6-33, 6-47, A48 test port 4 source bypass 6-58
6-59 switch
illustrated, 6-59 removal and replacement
operation, 5-21 illustrated, 7-57
part number, 6-58

Index
procedure, 7-56 all traces keypad assembly, 5-31

A55 noise downconverter troubleshooting, 4-28 MA 26.5, 5-11, 5-17
illustrated, 6-25, 6-33, 6-47, analyzer main RAM, 5-32
6-59 accessories, 2-9 mixer brick, 5-21
operation, 5-27 block diagram noise measurement group,
part number, 6-24, 6-32, 6-46, digital control group, 5-30 5-27
6-58 digital processor group, 5-30 processing subgroup, 5-32
removal and replacement noise measurement group, receiver group, 5-21
illustrated, 7-57 5-28 receiver step attenuators, 5-21
procedure, 7-56 receiver group, 5-25, 5-26 reference mixer switch, 5-21
A7 noise receiver board signal separation group, 5-18, signal separation group, 5-16
illustrated, 6-15 5-19 source boards, 5-10
operation, 5-27 covers source group, 5-7
part number, 6-14 illustrated, 6-79 SPAM board–analog, 5-24
A8 26.5 GHz source 2 board part numbers, 6-78 SPAM board–digital, 5-32
illustrated, 6-15 removal and replacement, 7-6 test port couplers, 5-17
operation, 5-10 external replaceable parts test set motherboard, 5-12
part number, 6-14 illustrated, 6-79 options, 2-3
removal and replacement, 7-14 part numbers, 6-78 rear panel
illustrated, 7-15 feet interconnects, 5-11, 5-12,
troubleshooting, 4-32 illustrated, 6-79 5-22, 5-33
accessories part numbers, 6-78 rear panel replaceable parts
analyzer, 2-9 frequency range and max ouput illustrated, 6-81
CD-RW drive, 2-9 power, 5-5 part numbers, 6-80
in operator’s check, 3-11 frequency reference board strap handle
in test port cable checks, 3-13 assembly, 5-11 illustrated, 6-79
pulse I/O adapter, 2-9 front panel interconnects, 5-31 part number, 6-78
USB functional groups, 5-4 system block diagram, 5-3, 5-4
part numbers, 6-83 digital control, 5-6 system operation
USB hub, 2-9 digital processing, 5-6 theory of, 5-3
accuracy noise measurement group, 5-6 upgrades, 2-8
dynamic accuracy test, 3-35 power supply, 5-6 warmup time, 3-4
frequency test, 3-31 receiver group, 5-6 ANSI Z540 standards compliant
adapters signal separation, 5-6 calibration, Option A6J, 2-7
required for servicing, 2-11 synthesized source, 5-5 ANSI/NCSL Z540-1-1994
adding internal performance test verification, 3-9
options, 8-14 ANSI/NCSL Z540–1–1994
software, 3-29
adjustments non-type verification, 3-10
EE default, 3-43 internal replaceable parts
illustrated, 6-77 assemblies
frequency location of part numbers, 6-7
at 10 MHz, 3-37 part numbers, 6-76
miscellaneous replaceable parts rebuilt-exchange
IF gain, 3-38 procedure, 6-4
noise figure, 3-44 part numbers, 6-82
mounting in equipment rack, rebuilt-exchange program, 6-4
receiver calibration, 3-40 replacement
receiver characterization, 3-43 2-5
operation list of procedures, 7-4
source calibration, 3-39 sequence, 6-3
synthesizer bandwidth, 3-38 13.5 GHz synthesizer boards,
5-10 attenuators
system, 3-1, 3-36 required for servicing, 2-11
getting ready, 3-4 configurable test set, 5-16
administrator password CPU board, 5-32
Agilent, 7-52 data acquisition subgroup, B
agile update 5-32
digital control group, 5-29 B channel
downloading firmware from the troubleshooting, 4-25
internet, 8-17 digital processor group, 5-29
typical power output, 4-34
Agilent display assembly, 5-31
B trace
administrator password, 7-52 front panel display board, 5-31 troubleshooting, 4-25, 4-28
contacting, 2-13 front panel subgroup, 5-31
support, 2-13 hard disk drive, 5-33
IF multiplexer board, 5-22

Index
B1 fan replaceable ribbon wire replaceable ribbon wire

removal and replacement harnesses harnesses
illustrated, 7-63 illustrated, 6-31 illustrated, 6-69
procedure, 7-62 part numbers, 6-30 part numbers, 6-68
bandwidth, synthesizer bottom assembly, Option 219/029 bottom assembly, Option 423/029
adjustment, 3-38 replaceable RF cables replaceable RF cables
battery illustrated, 6-29 illustrated, 6-63, 6-67
illustrated, 6-15 part numbers, 6-28 part numbers, 6-62, 6-66
part number, 6-14, 6-82 bottom assembly, Option 224 bridge
removal and replacement replaceable RF cables removal and replacement
illustrated, 7-65, 7-67 illustrated, 6-35 illustrated, 7-37
procedure, 7-64 part numbers, 6-34 procedure, 7-36
battery disposal, 1-8 replaceable ribbon cables test port 1
before applying power, 1-3 illustrated, 6-39 illustrated, 6-19, 6-25, 6-33,
bias tee part numbers, 6-38 6-41, 6-47, 6-59
removal and replacement replaceable ribbon wire part number, 6-18, 6-24, 6-32,
illustrated, 7-43, 7-45 harnesses 6-40, 6-46, 6-58
procedure, 7-42, 7-44 illustrated, 6-39 test port 2
troubleshooting, 4-36 part numbers, 6-38 illustrated, 6-19, 6-25, 6-33,
block diagram bottom assembly, Option 224/029 6-41, 6-47, 6-59
digital control group, 5-30 replaceable RF cables part number, 6-18, 6-24, 6-32,
digital processor group, 5-30 illustrated, 6-37 6-40, 6-46, 6-58
noise measurement group, 5-28 part numbers, 6-36 test port 3
receiver group, 5-25, 5-26 bottom assembly, Option 400 illustrated, 6-41, 6-47, 6-59
signal separation group, replaceable RF cables part number, 6-40, 6-46, 6-58
passive, 5-18, 5-19 illustrated, 6-43 test port 4
bottom assembly, all options part numbers, 6-42
hardware illustrated, 6-41, 6-47, 6-59
replaceable ribbon cables part number, 6-40, 6-46, 6-58
part numbers, 6-72 troubleshooting, 4-35
part numbers, 6-44 broadband failure, 4-29
bottom assembly, Option 029 replaceable ribbon wire
hardware built-in tests
harnesses for commercial calibration,
illustrated, 6-75
illustrated, 6-45 Option 897, 2-6
part numbers, 6-74
part numbers, 6-44 for standards compliant
bottom assembly, Option 200
replaceable parts bottom assembly, Option 419 calibration, Option 898, 2-6
replaceable RF cables bypass switch, source
illustrated, 6-19, 6-41, 6-47,
illustrated, 6-49, 6-53 troubleshooting, 4-36
6-59
part numbers, 6-48, 6-52
part numbers, 6-18, 6-24,
replaceable ribbon cables
6-25, 6-32, 6-33, 6-40,
illustrated, 6-57 C
6-46, 6-58
part numbers, 6-56 C channel
bottom assembly, Option 200 troubleshooting, 4-25
replaceable RF cables replaceable ribbon wire
harnesses typical power output, 4-34
illustrated, 6-21
illustrated, 6-57 C trace
part numbers, 6-20 troubleshooting, 4-25, 4-28
replaceable ribbon cables part numbers, 6-56
bottom assembly, Option 419/029 C, D, R3, and R4 traces
illustrated, 6-23 troubleshooting, 4-28
replaceable RF cables
part numbers, 6-22 cable
illustrated, 6-51, 6-55
replaceable ribbon wire substitution, 3-24
harnesses test port
bottom assembly, Option 423
illustrated, 6-23 replaceable RF cables checks, 3-11, 3-13, 3-14, 3-15,
part numbers, 6-22 illustrated, 6-61, 6-65 3-16, 3-18
bottom assembly, Option 219 part numbers, 6-60, 6-64 connector repeatability
replaceable RF cables failure, 3-19
illustrated, 6-27 insertion loss failure, 3-15
illustrated, 6-69
part numbers, 6-26 magnitude and phase stability
part numbers, 6-68
replaceable ribbon cables failure, 3-17
illustrated, 6-31 return loss failure, 3-14
part numbers, 6-30

Index
cables part numbers, 6-56 changing

GPIB in bottom assembly, Option 423 a serial number, 8-16
part numbers, 6-82 illustrated, 6-69 channel A
required for servicing, 2-11 part numbers, 6-68 troubleshooting, 4-25, 4-33
cables, flexible in top assembly, all options typical power output, 4-34
in top assembly, all options illustrated, 6-17 channel B
illustrated, 6-17 part numbers, 6-16 troubleshooting, 4-25, 4-33
part numbers, 6-16 cables, semi-rigid typical power output, 4-34
cables, RF in top assembly, all options channel C
in bottom assembly, Option 200 illustrated, 6-17 troubleshooting, 4-25, 4-33
illustrated, 6-21 part numbers, 6-16 typical power output, 4-34
part numbers, 6-20 cables, wire harnesses channel D
in bottom assembly, Option 219 in bottom assembly, Option 200 troubleshooting, 4-25, 4-33
illustrated, 6-27 illustrated, 6-23 typical power output, 4-34
part numbers, 6-26 part numbers, 6-22 channel R
in bottom assembly, in bottom assembly, Option 219 troubleshooting, 4-25
Option 219/029 illustrated, 6-31 characterization, receiver
illustrated, 6-29 adjustment, 3-43
part numbers, 6-30
part numbers, 6-28 checks
in bottom assembly, Option 224 cable
in bottom assembly, Option 224 illustrated, 6-39 connector repeatability, failure
illustrated, 6-35 part numbers, 6-38 of, 3-19
part numbers, 6-34 in bottom assembly, Option 400 insertion loss, failure of, 3-15
in bottom assembly, illustrated, 6-45 magnitude and phase stability,
Option 224/029 part numbers, 6-44 failure of, 3-17
illustrated, 6-37 in bottom assembly, Option 419 return loss, failure of, 3-14
part numbers, 6-36 illustrated, 6-57 test port cables, 3-11, 3-13
in bottom assembly, Option 400 part numbers, 6-56 operator’s, 3-11
illustrated, 6-43 in bottom assembly, Option 423 accessories used in, 3-11
part numbers, 6-42 illustrated, 6-69 description of, 3-11
in bottom assembly, Option 419 part numbers, 6-68 dialog box, 3-12
illustrated, 6-49, 6-53 in top assembly, all options failure of, 3-12
part numbers, 6-48, 6-52 illustrated, 6-17 performing, 3-11
in bottom assembly, part numbers, 6-16 preliminary, 3-11
Option 419/029 calibrated measurements, N-port, system, 3-1
illustrated, 6-51, 6-55 Option 551, 2-6
calibration getting ready, 3-4
ANSI Z540 standards test port cable
in bottom assembly, Option 423
compliant, Option A6J, 2-7 accessories used in, 3-13
certificate of, 3-8 connector repeatability, 3-18
coefficients test, 3-34 insertion loss, 3-15
in bottom assembly,
commercial, built-in tests, magnitude and phase
Option 423/029
Option 897, 2-6 stability, 3-16
commercial, Option UK6, 2-7 performing, 3-13
ISO 17025 standards compliant, return loss, 3-14
cables, ribbon
in bottom assembly, Option 200 Option 1A7, 2-7 COM, 8-9
kits, 2-11, 3-7 combiner
illustrated, 6-23 illustrated, 6-33, 6-59
part numbers, 6-22 substitution, 3-24
part number, 6-32, 6-58
in bottom assembly, Option 219 measurement, 8-4
removal and replacement
illustrated, 6-31 options available, 2-7
illustrated, 7-47
part numbers, 6-30 receiver, 3-40
procedure, 7-46
in bottom assembly, Option 224 source, 3-39
commercial calibration
illustrated, 6-39 standards compliant, built-in built-in tests, Option 897, 2-6
part numbers, 6-38 tests, Option 898, 2-6 Option UK6, 2-7
in bottom assembly, Option 400 care of connectors, 3-5 compression test, receiver, 3-32
illustrated, 6-45 caution, 1-3 configurable test set
part numbers, 6-44 CD-RW drive, 2-9 operation, 5-16
in bottom assembly, Option 419 CE mark, 1-7
certificate of calibration, 3-8
illustrated, 6-57

Index
configuration test port 2 digital control group

2-port with extended power illustrated, 6-19, 6-25, 6-33, block diagram, 5-30
range and bias tees, 6-41, 6-47, 6-59 functional description of, 5-6
Option 219, 2-5 part number, 6-18, 6-24, 6-32, operation, 5-29
2-port with second source, 6-40, 6-46, 6-58 digital processing and control
combiner, and source test port 3 functional group, 5-4
switches, Option 224, 2-6 illustrated, 6-41, 6-47, 6-59 digital processing group
4-port with combiner and source part number, 6-40, 6-46, 6-58 block diagram, 5-30
switches, Option 423, 2-6 test port 4 functional description of, 5-6
4-port with extended power illustrated, 6-41, 6-47, 6-59 operation, 5-29
range and bias tees, part number, 6-40, 6-46, 6-58 directivity
Option 419, 2-6 cover, removing, 1-4 cause of failure, 8-11
configurable test set, 5-17 covers, analyzer definition of, 8-11
high dynamic range illustrated, 6-79 measurements affected by, 8-11
measurement, 5-17 part numbers, 6-78 disabling
normal configuration removal and replacement options, 8-14
measurement, 5-17 illustrated, 7-7 display assembly
procedure, 7-6 illustrated, 6-13
standard 2-port, Option 200, 2-5
CPU board operation, 5-31
standard 4-port, Option 400, 2-6
illustrated, 6-15 parts list, 6-12
connector
care operation, 5-32 removal and replacement
principles of, 3-5 part number, 6-14 illustrated, 7-12, 7-13
quick reference, 3-5 removal and replacement procedure, 7-12
repeatability check illustrated, 7-23 troubleshooting, 4-12, 4-13
failure of, 3-19 procedure, 7-22 display cable
troubleshooting, 4-17 removal and replacement
of test port cables, 3-18
cross-over cable, LAN, 4-21 illustrated, 7-12, 7-13
connector repeatability
check CSA mark, 1-7 procedure, 7-12
test port cables, 3-18 Display port
rear panel connector, 5-33
connectors D
care of, 3-5 display test
D channel running, 4-15
front panel, 5-31
troubleshooting, 4-25 documentation
rear panel, 5-11, 5-12, 5-22, optional, 1-iv
5-33 typical power output, 4-34
D trace part numbers, 6-82
Display, 5-33 standard, 1-iv
EXT 10 MHz REF IN, 5-11 troubleshooting, 4-25, 4-28
dangerous voltage, 1-4 dress panel
EXT 10 MHz REF OUT, 5-11 lower front panel
GPIB, 5-33 data acquisition
operation, 5-32 illustrated, 6-11
HANDLER I/O, 5-12, 5-14 part number, 6-10
data acquisition and processing
PULSE I/O, 5-23 subgroup, 5-29 dynamic range, high
PWR I/O, 5-15 data storage measurement configuration,
TEST SET I/O, 5-12, 5-13 hard disk, 5-33 5-17
USB, 5-33 IDE, 5-33
VGA, 5-33 data, option
constants recovering, 8-15 E
correction, 8-19 repairing, 8-15 earth ground, 1-3
contacting Agilent, 2-13 DCOM, 8-9 EE default
controllers default, EE adjustment, 3-43
troubleshooting with, 4-18 adjustment, 3-43 electrostatic discharge, See ESD
correction constants, 8-19 description enabling
coupler functional options, 8-14
test port 1 digital control group, 5-6 entitlement certificate, option,
illustrated, 6-19, 6-25, 6-33, digital processing group, 5-6 8-13
6-41, 6-47, 6-59 noise measurement group, 5-6 environment, operating
part number, 6-18, 6-24, 6-32, power supply group, 5-6 specifications, 3-4
6-40, 6-46, 6-58 receiver group, 5-6 verification, 3-4
signal separation group, 5-6 equipment rack
horizontal spacing, 2-5
synthesized source group, 5-5

Index
mounting analyzer in, 2-5 of return loss check, 3-14 front frame
equipment, service test of system verification, 3-26 illustrated, 6-11
required, 2-10 flowchart, 3-26 part number, 6-10
error terms, 8-3 single vs. broadband, 4-29 interconnects, 5-31
access to, 8-8 fan interface board
via COM/DCOM commands, removal and replacement illustrated, 6-13
8-9 illustrated, 7-63 part number, 6-12
via front panel, 8-8 procedure, 7-62 inverter board
via SCPI commands (using troubleshooting, 4-11 illustrated, 6-13
GPIB), 8-9 fan bracket part number, 6-12
cause of failure to, 8-3 removal and replacement keypad assembly
descriptions, 8-10 illustrated, 7-63 illustrated, 6-13
directivity, 8-11 procedure, 7-62 parts list, 6-12
flowgraph of one port, 8-4 feet knob
flowgraph of two port, 8-5, 8-6, analyzer illustrated, 6-11
8-7 illustrated, 6-79 part number, 6-10
identifying using flowgraphs, part numbers, 6-78 test, 4-15
8-4 firmware troubleshooting, 4-13
isolation, 8-12 checking current version, 8-17 LCD assembly
load match, 8-11 upgrades, 8-17 illustrated, 6-13
magnitude firmware upgrade parts list, 6-12
affected by, 8-3 downloading from the internet,
LED board
monitoring over time, 8-3 8-17
illustrated, 6-25, 6-33, 6-73,
shape affected by, 8-3 flowgraph
of one port error terms, 8-4 6-75
source match, 8-11 part number, 6-18, 6-24, 6-32,
typical data, 8-10 of two port error terms, 8-5, 8-6,
8-7 6-40, 6-46, 6-58, 6-72,
using as diagnostic tool, 8-3 6-74
using to aid troubleshooting, 8-3 using to identify error terms, 8-4
Fourier transform, 2-3 LED board, removal and
worse than typical values, 8-10 replacement
frequency accuracy
ESD test, 3-31 illustrated, 7-61
protection, 1-6, 3-4, 4-3, 7-3, 8-4 procedure, 7-60
frequency adjustment
supplies at 10 MHz, 3-37 lower dress panel
part numbers, 6-83 frequency converter illustrated, 6-11
exchange measurements part number, 6-10
module Option 083, 2-5 lower overlay
procedure, 6-4 frequency offset mode illustrated, 6-11
rebuilt assemblies Option 080, 2-4 part number, 6-10
program, 6-4 frequency range nameplate
EXT 10 MHz REF IN connector and max output power, 5-5 illustrated, 6-11
rear panel, 5-11 frequency reference board part number, 6-10
EXT 10 MHz REF OUT connector illustrated, 6-15
rear panel, 5-11 operation, 5-31
operation, 5-11 power switch board
external analyzer part number, 6-14
replaceable parts illustrated, 6-13
removal and replacement parts list, 6-12
part numbers, 6-78 power switch overlay
procedure, 7-14 illustrated, 6-11
external monitor, 4-12 troubleshooting, 4-30 part number, 6-10
front frame subassemblies, removal and
F illustrated, 6-11
replacement
part number, 6-10
failure illustrated, 7-11
front panel
broadband, 4-29 assembly, removal and procedures, 7-10
of connector repeatability check, replacement subgroup, 5-29
3-19 illustrated, 7-9 touch screen
of insertion loss check, 3-15 procedure, 7-8 illustrated, 6-13
of magnitude and phase display assembly parts list, 6-12
stability check, 3-17 illustrated, 6-13 trim strip, filler
of operator’s check, 3-12 parts list, 6-12 illustrated, 6-11

Index
part number, 6-10 H part number, 6-18, 6-24, 6-32,

troubleshooting, 4-13 6-40, 6-46, 6-58
USB board H08, pulsed RF measurements, removal and replacement
2-3
illustrated, 6-13 handle illustrated, 7-31
part number, 6-12 damaged, 1-3 procedure, 7-30
USB controller board HANDLER I/O troubleshooting, 4-30
illustrated, 6-13 connector
part number, 6-12 pin assignments, 5-14
front panel assembly I
rear panel, 5-12
replaceable parts handles IDE
illustrated, 6-11, 6-13 with rack mount, 2-5 data storage, 5-33
part numbers, 6-10, 6-12 hard disk drive IF gain
front panel display board copying files from, 7-48 adjustment, 3-38
operation, 5-31 data storage, 5-33 IF inputs, Option 020, 2-4
front panel interface board illustrated, 6-15 IF multiplexer board
removal and replacement installing backup files onto, 7-53 illustrated, 6-19, 6-25, 6-33,
illustrated, 7-11 operation, 5-33 6-41, 6-47, 6-59
procedure, 7-10 part number, 6-14 operation, 5-22
troubleshooting, 4-12, 4-13 removal and replacement part number, 6-18, 6-24, 6-32,
front panel keypad assembly illustrated, 7-49, 7-51 6-40, 6-46, 6-58
removal and replacement procedure, 7-48 removal and replacement
illustrated, 7-11 unique files located on, 7-48 illustrated, 7-29
troubleshooting, 4-13 hardware procedure, 7-28
front panel LED board in bottom assembly troubleshooting, 4-39
illustrated, 6-19, 6-41, 6-47, illustrated, 6-73 insertion loss
6-59 part numbers, 6-72 check
functional groups, 5-4 in external analyzer failure of, 3-15
fuses, 6-82 test port cables, 3-15
illustrated, 6-79
part numbers, 6-78 installing
a serial number, 8-16
G in internal analyzer
instruction documentation
gain, IF illustrated, 6-77 symbol, 1-7
adjustment, 3-38 part numbers, 6-76 instrument markings, 1-7
general safety considerations, 1-3 in rear panel assembly instrument specifications, 3-6
government illustrated, 6-81 interconnects
regulatory information, 1-7 part numbers, 6-80 front panel, 5-31
GPIB, 8-9 in top assembly HANDLER I/O
cables illustrated, 6-70, 6-71 pin assignments, 5-14
part numbers, 6-82 part numbers, 6-70 PULSE I/O
port location of part numbers, 6-9 pin assignments, 5-23
rear panel connector, 5-33 options, 2-3, 8-14 PWR I/O
GPIB board hardware, Option 029 pin assignments, 5-15
illustrated, 6-15 in bottom assembly rear panel, 5-11, 5-12, 5-22,
part number, 6-14 illustrated, 6-75 5-33
removal and replacement part numbers, 6-74 Display, 5-33
illustrated, 7-25 HDD EXT 10 MHz REF IN, 5-11
procedure, 7-24 illustrated, 6-15 EXT 10 MHz REF OUT, 5-11
GPIB CONTROLLER part number, 6-14 GPIB, 5-33
port HDDA HANDLER I/O, 5-12
running test software, 4-17 removal and replacement LAN, 5-33
troubleshooting, 4-17 illustrated, 7-49, 7-51 TEST SET I/O, 5-12
systems check, 4-17 procedure, 7-48 USB, 5-33
ground, safety earth, 1-3 high dynamic range VGA, 5-33
groups measurement configuration, TEST SET I/O
functional, 5-4 5-17 pin assignments, 5-13
HMA26.5 internal analyzer
illustrated, 6-19, 6-25, 6-33, replaceable hardware
6-41, 6-47, 6-59 illustrated, 6-77
operation, 5-11, 5-17 part numbers, 6-76

Index
replaceable parts LCD assembly test port cables, 3-16

illustrated, 6-77 illustrated, 6-13 maintenance
part numbers, 6-76 parts list, 6-12 cleaning, 2-3
internal performance test LED board preventive
software, 3-29 illustrated, 6-19, 6-25, 6-33, effect on error terms, 8-3
inverter board 6-41, 6-47, 6-59 max output power
illustrated, 6-13 part number, 6-18, 6-24, 6-32, and frequency range, 5-5
part number, 6-12 6-40, 6-46, 6-58 measurement
removal and replacement LED board, front panel calibration, 8-4
illustrated, 7-11 illustrated, 6-73, 6-75 traceability, 3-22
procedure, 7-10 part number, 6-72, 6-74 path, 3-22
troubleshooting, 4-12 removal and replacement uncertainty, 3-21
IP address, LAN, 4-19 illustrated, 7-61 measurement configuration
ISM1-A mark, 1-7 procedure, 7-60 high dynamic range, 5-17
ISO 17025 standards compliant linearity normal, 5-17
calibration, Option 1A7, 2-7 source power measurement system
isolation test, 3-30 troubleshooting, 4-23
cause of failure, 8-12 test port output power memory modules
definition of, 8-12 test, 3-30 part numbers, 6-82
measurements affected by, 8-12 lithium battery midplane board
removal and replacement illustrated, 6-15
part number, 6-14
K illustrated, 7-65, 7-67
removal and replacement
procedure, 7-64
keypad assembly lithium battery disposal, 1-8 illustrated, 7-19
illustrated, 6-13 LO synthesizer board procedure, 7-18
operation, 5-31 removal and replacement miscellaneous parts
parts list, 6-12 procedure, 7-14 location of part numbers, 6-8,
removal and replacement troubleshooting, 4-30 6-9
illustrated, 7-11 load match required for servicing, 2-12
procedure, 7-10 cause of failure, 8-11 miscellaneous replaceable parts
test, 4-14 definition of, 8-11 part numbers, 6-82
troubleshooting, 4-13 measurements affected by, 8-11 mixer brick
kits locating illustrated, 6-19, 6-25, 6-33,
calibration, 2-11, 3-7 assembly part numbers, 6-7 6-41, 6-47, 6-59
rack mount hardware part numbers, 6-9 operation, 5-21
part numbers, 6-83 miscellaneous part numbers, part number, 6-18, 6-24, 6-32,
upgrade 6-8, 6-9 6-40, 6-46, 6-58
order numbers, 6-83 replaceable part numbers removal and replacement
part numbers, 6-82 by reference designator, 6-5 illustrated, 7-35
verification, 2-11, 3-7 by type of part, 6-7 procedure, 7-34
knob troubleshooting, 4-38
front panel module
illustrated, 6-11 M exchange
part number, 6-10 machine screws procedure, 6-4
test, 4-15 in bottom assemblies monitor, external, 4-12
troubleshooting, 4-13 illustrated, 6-73 motherboard, system
part numbers, 6-72 illustrated, 6-15
in external analyzer operation, 5-31
L illustrated, 6-79 part number, 6-14
LAN part numbers, 6-78 removal and replacement
connector in Option 029 bottom assemblies illustrated, 7-17
rear panel, 5-33 illustrated, 6-75 procedure, 7-16
cross-over cable, 4-21 part numbers, 6-74 motherboard, test set
IP address, 4-19 in rear panel assembly illustrated, 6-19, 6-25, 6-33,
ping command, 4-19 illustrated, 6-81 6-41, 6-47, 6-59
ping to and from, 4-18 part numbers, 6-80 part number, 6-18, 6-24, 6-32,
subnet mask, 4-19 magnitude check 6-40, 6-46, 6-58
testing between analyzers, 4-20 failure of, 3-17
troubleshooting, 4-18

Index
N front panel, 5-31 Option 082, scaler calibrated

front panel display board, 5-31 converter measurements, 2-5
N1966A, pulse I/O adapter, 2-9 hard disk drive, 5-33 Option 083, vector and scaler
N4689A, USB hub, 2-9 calibrated frequency
nameplate HMA 26.5, 5-11
HMA26.5, 5-17 converter measurements, 2-5
front panel Option 1CM, rack mount without
illustrated, 6-11 IF multiplexer board, 5-22 handles, 2-5
part number, 6-10 keypad assembly, 5-31 Option 1CP, rack mount with
network analyzer, See analyzer main RAM, 5-32 handles, 2-5
noise downconverter mixer brick, 5-21 Option 200
illustrated, 6-25, 6-33, 6-47, noise measurement group, 5-27 description of, 2-5
6-59 power supply, 5-34 Option 219
operation, 5-27 processing subgroup, 5-32 description of, 2-5
part number, 6-24, 6-32, 6-46, receiver group, 5-21 Option 224
6-58 receiver step attenuators, 5-21 description of, 2-6
removal and replacement reference mixer switch, 5-21 Option 400
illustrated, 7-57 signal separation group, 5-16 description of, 2-6
procedure, 7-56 source group, 5-7 Option 419
SPAM board–analog, 5-24 description of, 2-6
noise figure adjustment, 3-44
noise figure measurement SPAM board–digital, 5-32 Option 423
capability, Option 029, 2-4 description of, 2-6
system motherboard, 5-31
noise floor, test, 3-33 Option 551
test port couplers, 5-17 description of, 2-6
noise measurement group test set motherboard, 5-12
block diagram, 5-28 Option 897
operator’s check, 3-11 built-in tests for commercial
defined, 4-27 accessories used in, 3-11
functional description of, 5-6 calibration, 2-6
description of, 3-11 Option 898
operation, 5-27 dialog box, 3-12
noise receiver board built-in tests for standard
failure of, 3-12 compliant calibration, 2-6
illustrated, 6-15 performing, 3-11
operation, 5-27 Option H08, pulsed RF
option measurements, 2-3
part number, 6-14 analyzer, 2-3 Option 029/219, bottom assembly
noise, trace noise test, 3-31 calibration, 2-7 replaceable RF cables
Non-ANSI/NCSL Z540-1-1994 data
verification, 3-10 illustrated, 6-29
recovering, 8-15 part numbers, 6-28
N-port calibrated measurements,
Option 551, 2-6 repairing, 8-15 Option 029/224, bottom assembly
enable utility, 8-13 replaceable RF cables
accessing, 8-13 illustrated, 6-37
O dialog box, 8-13 part numbers, 6-36
OCXO (oven-controlled crystal enabling and removing, 8-14 Option 029/419, bottom assembly
oscillator) entitlement certificate, 8-13 replaceable RF cables
frequency adjustment, 3-37 hardware, 8-14 illustrated, 6-51, 6-55
theory of operation, 5-11 service and support, 2-13 part numbers, 6-50, 6-54
operating software, 8-14 Option 029/423, bottom assembly
system Option 010, time domain, 2-3 replaceable RF cables
recovery, 8-18 Option 020, IF inputs, 2-4 illustrated, 6-63, 6-67
operating environment Option 021, source 1 pulse part numbers, 6-62, 6-66
specifications, 3-4 modulator, 2-4 Option 1A7
verification, 3-4 Option 022, source 2 pulse ISO 17025 standards compliant
operation modulator, 2-4 calibration, 2-7
13.5 GHz synthesizer boards, Option 025, four internal pulse Option 200, bottom assembly
generators, 2-4 replaceable RF cables
5-10 Option 029, noise figure
26.5 GHz source boards, 5-10 illustrated, 6-21
measurement capability, 2-4
configurable test set, 5-16 Option 029, noise measurement part numbers, 6-20
CPU board, 5-32 capability replaceable ribbon cables
data acquisition, 5-32 block diagram, 5-28 illustrated, 6-23
digital control, 5-29 functional description of, 5-6, part numbers, 6-22
digital processor, 5-29 5-27 replaceable wire harnesses
display assembly, 5-31 Option 080, frequency offset illustrated, 6-23
frequency reference board, 5-11 mode, 2-4 part numbers, 6-22

Index
Option 219, bottom assembly part numbers, 6-68 by type of part, 6-7
replaceable RF cables replaceable wire harnesses for assemblies, 6-7
illustrated, 6-27 illustrated, 6-69 for hardware, 6-9
part numbers, 6-26 part numbers, 6-68 for miscellaneous parts, 6-8,
replaceable ribbon cables Option 423/029, bottom assembly 6-9
illustrated, 6-31 replaceable RF cables Option 029 hardware
part numbers, 6-30 illustrated, 6-63, 6-67 in bottom assembly, 6-74
replaceable wire harnesses part numbers, 6-62, 6-66 paint
illustrated, 6-31 Option A6J touch-up, 6-84
part numbers, 6-30 ANSI Z540 standards compliant replaceable parts
Option 219/029, bottom assembly calibration, 2-7 analyzer covers, 6-78
replaceable RF cables Option UK6 analyzer feet, 6-78
illustrated, 6-29 commercial calibration, 2-7 analyzer strap handle, 6-78
part numbers, 6-28 ordering information in bottom assembly, all
Option 224, bottom assembly options and upgrades, 2-3, 2-8 options, 6-72
replaceable RF cables replaceable parts, 6-3 in bottom assembly, Option
illustrated, 6-35 output power, source 029, 6-74
part numbers, 6-34 accuracy test, 3-29
in bottom assembly, Option
replaceable ribbon cables linearity, 3-30
200, 6-18, 6-24, 6-25,
illustrated, 6-39 maximum test, 3-30
6-32, 6-33, 6-40, 6-46,
part numbers, 6-38 output power, test port
accuracy test, 3-29 6-58
replaceable wire harnesses in external analyzer, 6-78
illustrated, 6-39 linearity, 3-30
maximum test, 3-30 in front panel assembly, 6-10,
part numbers, 6-38 6-12
Option 224/029, bottom assembly overlay
lower front panel in internal analyzer, 6-76
replaceable RF cables in rear panel assembly, 6-80
part number, 6-10 in top assembly, all options,
part numbers, 6-36 6-14, 6-15, 6-70
Option 400, bottom assembly power switch
part number, 6-10, 6-11 miscellaneous analyzer, 6-82
illustrated, 6-43
in bottom assembly,
part numbers, 6-42 P Option 200, 6-20
pads in bottom assembly,
illustrated, 6-45
required for servicing, 2-11 Option 219, 6-26
part numbers, 6-44
paint in bottom assembly,
replaceable wire harnesses
touch-up Option 219/029, 6-28
illustrated, 6-45
part numbers, 6-84 in bottom assembly,
part numbers, 6-44
part numbers Option 224, 6-34
Option 419, bottom assembly
replaceable RF cables accessories in bottom assembly,
illustrated, 6-49, 6-53 USB, 6-83 Option 224/029, 6-36
part numbers, 6-48, 6-52 cables in bottom assembly,
replaceable ribbon cables GPIB, 6-82 Option 400, 6-42
illustrated, 6-57 cables, all in bottom assembly,
part numbers, 6-56 in top assembly, all options, Option 419, 6-48, 6-52
replaceable wire harnesses 6-16 in bottom assembly,
illustrated, 6-57 documentation, 6-82 Option 419/029, 6-50, 6-54
part numbers, 6-56 hardware in bottom assembly,
Option 419/029, bottom assembly in bottom assembly, 6-72 Option 423, 6-60, 6-64
replaceable RF cables in external analyzer, 6-78 in bottom assembly,
illustrated, 6-51, 6-55 in internal analyzer, 6-76 Option 423/029, 6-62, 6-66
part numbers, 6-50, 6-54 in rear panel assembly, 6-80 replaceable ribbon cables
Option 423, bottom assembly in top assembly, all options, in bottom assembly,
replaceable RF cables 6-70 Option 200, 6-22
illustrated, 6-61, 6-65 kits in bottom assembly,
part numbers, 6-60, 6-64 rack mount, 6-83 Option 219, 6-30
replaceable ribbon cables locating in bottom assembly,
illustrated, 6-69 by reference designator, 6-5 Option 224, 6-38

Index
in bottom assembly, replaceable pin assignments

Option 400, 6-44 listing of, 6-5 connectors
in bottom assembly, ordering information, 6-3 HANDLER I/O, 5-14
Option 419, 6-56 parts, hardware PULSE I/O, 5-23
in bottom assembly, in bottom assembly PWR I/O, 5-15
Option 423, 6-68 illustrated, 6-73 TEST SET I/O, 5-13
replaceable wire harnesses part numbers, 6-72 ping
in bottom assembly, in external analyzer, all options command, LAN, 4-19
Option 200, 6-22 illustrated, 6-79 from network, 4-20
in bottom assembly, part numbers, 6-78 to analyzer, 4-19
Option 219, 6-30 in internal analyzer, all options pixel
in bottom assembly, illustrated, 6-77 damaged, 4-15
Option 224, 6-38 part numbers, 6-76 definition, 4-15
in bottom assembly, in rear panel assembly, all Port 1
Option 400, 6-44 options typical power output, 4-34
in bottom assembly, illustrated, 6-81 Port 2
part numbers, 6-80 typical power output, 4-34
Option 419, 6-56
in top assembly, all options Port 3
in bottom assembly, typical power output, 4-34
Option 423, 6-68 illustrated, 6-70, 6-71
Port 4
supplies part numbers, 6-70 typical power output, 4-34
battery, 6-82 parts, Option 029 post-repair procedures, 7-68
ESD, 6-83 in bottom assembly power button keypad
memory modules, 6-82 illustrated, 6-75 removal and replacement
tools part numbers, 6-74 illustrated, 7-11
service, 6-82 parts, Option 029 hardware procedure, 7-11
upgrade kits, 6-82, 6-83 in bottom assembly power supply
parts illustrated, 6-75 check, 4-7
in bottom assembly part numbers, 6-74 functional description of, 5-6
illustrated, 6-73 password functional group, 5-4
part numbers, 6-72 Agilent administrator, 7-52 operation, 5-34
in bottom assembly, Option 200 performance power supply assembly
illustrated, 6-19, 6-41, 6-47, tests, 3-29 illustrated, 6-15
6-59 calibration coefficients, 3-34 part number, 6-14
part numbers, 6-18, 6-24, description of, 3-7 removal and replacement
6-25, 6-32, 6-33, 6-40, dynamic accuracy, 3-35 illustrated, 7-21
6-46, 6-58 frequency accuracy, 3-31 procedure, 7-20
in external analyzer noise floor, 3-33 troubleshooting, 4-7
illustrated, 6-79 receiver compression, 3-32 power switch board
part numbers, 6-78 source maximum power illustrated, 6-13
in front panel assembly output, 3-30 parts list, 6-12
illustrated, 6-11, 6-13 source power accuracy, 3-29 removal and replacement
part numbers, 6-10, 6-12 source power linearity, 3-30 illustrated, 7-11
in internal analyzer test port output maximum procedure, 7-11
illustrated, 6-77 power, 3-30 power switch overlay
part numbers, 6-76 test port output power part number, 6-10, 6-11
in rear panel assembly accuracy, 3-29 power up
illustrated, 6-81 test port output power troubleshooting, 4-6
part numbers, 6-80 linearity, 3-30 power, source
in top assembly, all options trace noise, 3-31 accuracy test, 3-29
illustrated, 6-70, 6-71 verification linearity test, 3-30
part numbers, 6-14, 6-15, 6-70 ANSI/NCSL Z540-1-1994, 3-9 power, source output
non-ANSI/NCSL Z540-1-1994, maximum test, 3-30
locating
3-10 power, test port output
by reference designator, 6-5 accuracy test, 3-29
by type of part, 6-7 performance test software,
internal, 3-29 linearity test, 3-30
miscellaneous phase stability check maximum test, 3-30
part numbers, 6-82 failure of, 3-17
required for servicing, 2-12 test port cables, 3-16

Index
pre-repair troubleshooting, 4-17 warnings about, 7-3

procedures USB repairing
caution about, 7-3 troubleshooting, 4-17 option data, 8-15
warnings about, 7-3 rebuilt-exchange assemblies replaceable cables, flexible
preventive maintenance program, 6-4 in top assembly, all options
effect on error terms, 8-3 receiver illustrated, 6-17
procedure, 7-14 accuracy part numbers, 6-16
processing subgroup dynamic accuracy test, 3-35 replaceable cables, ribbon
operation, 5-32 adjustment, 3-40 in top assembly, all options
protection calibration, 3-40 illustrated, 6-17
against ESD, 1-6, 3-4, 4-3, 7-3, compression test, 3-32 part numbers, 6-16
8-4 dynamic accuracy test, 3-35 replaceable cables, semi-rigid
pulse generators-internal, functional description of, 5-6 in top assembly, all options
Option 025, 2-4 functional group, 5-4 illustrated, 6-17
PULSE I/O part numbers, 6-16
connector linearity
dynamic accuracy test, 3-35 replaceable cables, wire
pin assignments, 5-23 harnesses
pulse I/O adapter, accessory, 2-9 outputs
troubleshooting, 4-38 in top assembly, all options
pulse modulator-source 1, illustrated, 6-17
Option 021, 2-4 receiver characterization
adjustment, 3-43 part numbers, 6-16
pulse modulator-source 2,
Option 022, 2-4 receiver display replaceable hardware
pulsed RF measurements, running the test, 4-25 in bottom assembly
Option H08, 2-3 receiver group illustrated, 6-73
PWR I/O block diagram, 5-25, 5-26 part numbers, 6-72
connector defined, 4-27 in external analyzer
pin assignments, 5-15 operation, 5-21 illustrated, 6-79
troubleshooting, 4-37 part numbers, 6-78
receiver step attenuator in internal analyzer
R operation, 5-21 illustrated, 6-77
R channel removal and replacement part numbers, 6-76
troubleshooting, 4-25 illustrated, 7-43 in rear panel assembly
R trace procedure, 7-42 illustrated, 6-81
troubleshooting, 4-25, 4-28 troubleshooting, 4-39 part numbers, 6-80
rack mount kits recovery in top assembly
part numbers, 6-83 operating system, 8-18 illustrated, 6-70, 6-71
with handles, Option 1CP, 2-5 option data, 8-15 part numbers, 6-70
without handles, Option 1CM, reference channel, See R replaceable hardware, Option 029
2-5 channel in bottom assembly
RAM, main reference mixer switch illustrated, 6-75
operation, 5-32 illustrated, 6-19, 6-25, 6-33, part numbers, 6-74
rear panel 6-41, 6-47, 6-59 replaceable parts
connectors operation, 5-21 hardware, in bottom assembly
Display, 5-33 part number, 6-18, 6-24, 6-32, illustrated, 6-73
EXT 10 MHz REF IN, 5-11 6-40, 6-46, 6-58 part numbers, 6-72
GPIB, 5-33 removal and replacement in bottom assembly, Option 200
HANDLER I/O, 5-12 illustrated, 7-41 illustrated, 6-19, 6-41, 6-47,
LAN, 5-33 procedure, 7-40 6-59
TEST SET I/O, 5-12 troubleshooting, 4-39 part numbers, 6-18, 6-24,
USB, 5-33 regulatory information, 1-7 6-25, 6-32, 6-33, 6-40,
VGA, 5-33 removing 6-46, 6-58
interconnects, 5-11, 5-12, 5-22, assemblies, See specific in external analyzer
5-33 assembly. illustrated, 6-79
removal and replacement options, 8-14 part numbers, 6-78
illustrated, 7-59 parts, See specific part. in front panel assembly
procedure, 7-58 removing the cover, 1-4 illustrated, 6-11, 6-13
replaceable parts repair part numbers, 6-10, 6-12
illustrated, 6-81 post-repair procedures, 7-68
in internal analyzer
part numbers, 6-80 procedures
illustrated, 6-77
caution about, 7-3

Index
part numbers, 6-76 in bottom assembly, Option 219 A16 power supply assembly
in rear panel assembly illustrated, 6-31 illustrated, 7-21
illustrated, 6-81 part numbers, 6-30 procedure, 7-20
part numbers, 6-80 in bottom assembly, Option 224 A17 CPU board
in top assembly, all options, illustrated, 6-39 illustrated, 7-23
6-14, 6-15 part numbers, 6-38 procedure, 7-22
illustrated, 6-70, 6-71 in bottom assembly, Option 400 A18 GPIB board
part numbers, 6-70 illustrated, 6-45 illustrated, 7-25
listing of, 6-5 part numbers, 6-44 procedure, 7-24
locating in bottom assembly, Option 419 A19 test set motherboard
by reference designator, 6-5 illustrated, 6-57 illustrated, 7-27
by type of part, 6-7 part numbers, 6-56 procedure, 7-26
miscellaneous analyzer in bottom assembly, Option 423 A2 USB board
part numbers, 6-82 illustrated, 6-69 illustrated, 7-11
ordering information, 6-3 part numbers, 6-68 procedure, 7-10
replaceable parts, Option 029 replaceable wire harnesses A20 IF multiplexer board
hardware, in bottom assembly in bottom assembly, Option 200 illustrated, 7-29
part numbers, 6-74 part numbers, 6-22 A21 HMA26.5
replaceable RF cables in bottom assembly, Option 219 illustrated, 7-31
in bottom assembly, Option 200 illustrated, 6-31 procedure, 7-30
illustrated, 6-21 part numbers, 6-30 A22 splitter
part numbers, 6-20 in bottom assembly, Option 224 illustrated, 7-33
in bottom assembly, Option 219 illustrated, 6-39 procedure, 7-32
illustrated, 6-27 part numbers, 6-38 A23 mixer brick
part numbers, 6-26 in bottom assembly, Option 400 illustrated, 7-35
in bottom assembly, illustrated, 6-45 procedure, 7-34
Option 219/029 part numbers, 6-44 A24 mixer brick
illustrated, 6-29 in bottom assembly, Option 419 illustrated, 7-35
part numbers, 6-28 illustrated, 6-57 procedure, 7-34
in bottom assembly, Option 224 part numbers, 6-56 A25 test port 1 bridge
illustrated, 6-35 in bottom assembly, Option 423 illustrated, 7-37
part numbers, 6-34 illustrated, 6-69 procedure, 7-36
in bottom assembly, part numbers, 6-68 A26 test port 3 bridge
Option 224/029 replacement illustrated, 7-37
illustrated, 6-37 A1 front panel interface board procedure, 7-36
part numbers, 6-36 illustrated, 7-11 A27 test port 4 bridge
in bottom assembly, Option 400 procedure, 7-10 illustrated, 7-37
illustrated, 6-43 A10 frequency reference board procedure, 7-36
part numbers, 6-42 illustrated, 7-15 A28 test port 2 bridge
in bottom assembly, Option 419 procedure, 7-14 illustrated, 7-37
illustrated, 6-49, 6-53 A11 13.5 GHz LO synthesizer procedure, 7-36
part numbers, 6-48, 6-52 board A29 test port 1 coupler
in bottom assembly, illustrated, 7-15 procedure, 7-38, 7-39
Option 419/029 procedure, 7-14 A3 display assembly
illustrated, 6-51, 6-55 A12 SPAM board illustrated, 7-12, 7-13
part numbers, 6-50, 6-54 illustrated, 7-15 procedure, 7-12
in bottom assembly, Option 423 procedure, 7-14 A30 test port 3 coupler
illustrated, 6-61, 6-65 A13 13.5 GHz source 2 procedure, 7-38, 7-39
part numbers, 6-60, 6-64 synthesizer board A31 test port 4 coupler
in bottom assembly, illustrated, 7-15 procedure, 7-38, 7-39
Option 423/029 procedure, 7-14 A32 test port 2 coupler
illustrated, 6-63, 6-67 A14 motherboard illustrated, 7-39
part numbers, 6-62, 6-66 illustrated, 7-17 procedure, 7-38
replaceable ribbon cables procedure, 7-16 A33 reference mixer switch
in bottom assembly, Option 200 A15 midplane board illustrated, 7-41
part numbers, 6-22 procedure, 7-18

Index
A34 test port 1 source step A48 test port 4 source bypass procedure, 7-60
attenuator switch front panel subassemblies
procedure, 7-42 procedure, 7-46 procedures, 7-10
A35 test port 3 source step A49 test port 2 source bypass inverter board
attenuator switch illustrated, 7-11
procedure, 7-42 procedure, 7-46 keypad assembly
A36 test port 4 source step A5 26.5 GHz source 1 board illustrated, 7-11
attenuator illustrated, 7-15 procedure, 7-10
illustrated, 7-43 procedure, 7-14 power button keypad
procedure, 7-42 A50 combiner illustrated, 7-11
A37 test port 2 source step illustrated, 7-47 procedure, 7-11
attenuator procedure, 7-46 power switch board
illustrated, 7-43 A51 hard disk drive illustrated, 7-11
procedure, 7-42 illustrated, 7-49, 7-51 procedure, 7-11
A38 test port 1 bias tee procedure, 7-48 rear panel
illustrated, 7-43, 7-45 A52 test port 1 Option 029 illustrated, 7-59
procedure, 7-42, 7-44 switch procedure, 7-58
A39 test port 3 bias tee illustrated, 7-55 touch screen
illustrated, 7-43, 7-45 procedure, 7-54 illustrated, 7-12, 7-13
procedure, 7-42, 7-44 A53 test port 2 Option 029 procedure, 7-12
A4 13.5 GHz source 1 switch USB controller board
synthesizer board illustrated, 7-55 illustrated, 7-11
illustrated, 7-15 A54 test port 2 Option 029 procedure, 7-11
procedure, 7-14 bridge replacement sequence, 4-3
A40 test port 4 bias tee illustrated, 7-57 return loss check
illustrated, 7-43, 7-45 procedure, 7-56 failure of, 3-14
procedure, 7-42, 7-44 A55 noise downconverter test port cables, 3-14
A41 test port 2 bias tee illustrated, 7-57 RF cables
illustrated, 7-43, 7-45 procedure, 7-56 in bottom assembly, Option 200
procedure, 7-42, 7-44 A8 26.5 GHz source 2 board illustrated, 6-21
A42 test port 1 receiver step illustrated, 7-15 part numbers, 6-20
attenuator procedure, 7-14 in bottom assembly, Option 219
illustrated, 7-43 analyzer covers illustrated, 6-27
procedure, 7-42 illustrated, 7-7 part numbers, 6-26
A43 test port 3 receiver step procedure, 7-6 in bottom assembly,
attenuator assembly Option 219/029
illustrated, 7-43 list of procedures, 7-4 illustrated, 6-29
procedure, 7-42 sequence, 6-3 part numbers, 6-28
A44 test port 4 receiver step battery in bottom assembly, Option 224
attenuator illustrated, 7-65, 7-67 illustrated, 6-35
illustrated, 7-43 procedure, 7-64 part numbers, 6-34
procedure, 7-42 display cable in bottom assembly,
A45 test port 2 receiver step illustrated, 7-12, 7-13 Option 224/029
attenuator procedure, 7-12 illustrated, 6-37
illustrated, 7-43 fan part numbers, 6-36
procedure, 7-42 illustrated, 7-63 in bottom assembly, Option 400
A46 test port 1 source bypass procedure, 7-62 illustrated, 6-43
switch fan bracket part numbers, 6-42
illustrated, 7-47 illustrated, 7-63 in bottom assembly, Option 419
procedure, 7-46 procedure, 7-62 illustrated, 6-49, 6-53
A47 test port 3 source bypass front panel assembly part numbers, 6-48, 6-52
switch illustrated, 7-9 in bottom assembly,
illustrated, 7-47 procedure, 7-8 Option 419/029
procedure, 7-46 front panel LED board illustrated, 6-51, 6-55
illustrated, 7-61 part numbers, 6-50, 6-54

Index
in bottom assembly, Option 423 serial number procedure, 7-14

illustrated, 6-61, 6-65 changing, 8-16 troubleshooting, 4-32
part numbers, 6-60, 6-64 installing, 8-16 source 1 pulse modulator,
in bottom assembly, service Option 021, 2-4
Option 423/029 battery source 1 synthesizer board
illustrated, 6-63, 6-67 part numbers, 6-82 removal and replacement
part numbers, 6-62, 6-66 contacting Agilent, 2-13 procedure, 7-14
ribbon cables memory modules troubleshooting, 4-31
in bottom assembly, Option 200 part numbers, 6-82 source 2 board
illustrated, 6-23 miscellaneous parts illustrated, 6-15
part numbers, 6-22 required, 2-12 part number, 6-14
in bottom assembly, Option 219 options, 2-13 removal and replacement
illustrated, 6-31 procedures illustrated, 7-15
part numbers, 6-30 caution about, 7-3 procedure, 7-14
in bottom assembly, Option 224 post-repair, 7-68 troubleshooting, 4-32
illustrated, 6-39 warnings about, 7-3 source 2 pulse modulator,
part numbers, 6-38 static safety parts Option 022, 2-4
part numbers, 6-83 source 2 synthesizer board
in bottom assembly, Option 400 removal and replacement
illustrated, 6-45 required, 2-12
procedure, 7-14
part numbers, 6-44 test equipment
in bottom assembly, Option 419 required, 2-10
source board
illustrated, 6-57 tools operation, 5-10
part numbers, 6-56 part numbers, 6-82 source bypass switch
in bottom assembly, Option 423 required, 2-12 troubleshooting, 4-36
illustrated, 6-69 warnings, 1-4 source group
part numbers, 6-68 warranty defined, 4-27
rotary pulse generator (RPG) standard, 2-13 operation, 5-7
test, 4-15 three-year return to Agilent, troubleshooting, 4-29
troubleshooting, 4-13 2-13 source match
rotary pulse generator (RPG) shipment for service or repair, cause of failure, 8-11
knob 2-13 definition of, 8-11
illustrated, 6-11 signal processing ADC module measurements affected by, 8-11
part number, 6-10 (SPAM) board source step attenuator
part number, 6-14 illustrated, 7-43
S signal separation procedure, 7-42
safety functional description of, 5-6
considerations, 1-3 functional group, 5-4
SPAM board
earth ground, 1-3 signal separation group illustrated, 6-15
symbols, 1-3 block diagram, 5-18, 5-19
operation
scalar calibrated converter defined, 4-27
analog, 5-24
measurements operation, 5-16
digital, 5-32
Option 082, 2-5 troubleshooting, 4-33, 4-34
part number, 6-14
SCPI, 8-9 single band failure, 4-29
software removal and replacement
screws
for bottom assemblies options, 8-14 illustrated, 7-15
illustrated, 6-73 source procedure, 7-14
part numbers, 6-72 adjustment, 3-39 troubleshooting, 4-39
for Option 029 bottom calibration, 3-39 speaker
functional group, 5-4 troubleshooting, 4-13
assemblies
maximum output power test, specifications
illustrated, 6-75 instrument, 3-6
part numbers, 6-74 3-30
power accuracy test, 3-29 stabilization, warm up time, 3-4
in external analyzer system, 3-6
illustrated, 6-79 power linearity test, 3-30
source 1 board splitter
part numbers, 6-78 illustrated, 6-41, 6-47, 6-59
in rear panel assembly illustrated, 6-15
part number, 6-14 part number, 6-40, 6-46, 6-58
part numbers, 6-80 removal and replacement

Index
procedure, 7-32 synthesized source test port output power linearity,

troubleshooting, 4-31 functional description of, 5-5 3-30
SRC 2 OUT 1 source bypass synthesized source group trace noise, 3-31
switch operation, 5-7 test equipment
illustrated, 6-33 synthesizer bandwidth required for service, 2-10
part number, 6-32 adjustment, 3-38 required for servicing, 2-10
stabilization system test port
warm up time, 3-4 adjustments, 3-1, 3-36 cable checks
standard 2-port configuration, EE default, 3-43 connector repeatability
Option 200, 2-5 frequency at 10 MHz, 3-37 failure, 3-19
standard 4-port configuration, getting ready, 3-4 dynamic accuracy test, 3-35
Option 400, 2-6 IF gain, 3-38 maximum output power test,
standards compliant calibration noise figure, 3-44
ANSI Z540, Option A6J, 2-7 3-30
receiver calibration, 3-40 noise floor test, 3-33
built-in tests, Option 898, 2-6 receiver characterization, 3-43
ISO 17025, Option 1A7, 2-7 output power accuracy test, 3-29
source calibration, 3-39 output power linearity test, 3-30
static safety parts synthesizer bandwidth, 3-38
required for servicing, 2-12 test port 1 bias tee
checks, 3-1 illustrated, 6-25, 6-33, 6-47,
step attenuator, receiver
removal and replacement getting ready, 3-4 6-59
illustrated, 7-43 specifications, 3-6 part number, 6-24, 6-32, 6-46,
procedure, 7-42 verification, 3-1, 3-7, 3-20 6-58
troubleshooting, 4-39 dialog box, 3-24 removal and replacement
step attenuator, source example of results, 3-27, 3-28 illustrated, 7-43, 7-45
removal and replacement failure flowchart, 3-26 procedure, 7-42, 7-44
illustrated, 7-43 failure of, 3-26 troubleshooting, 4-36
procedure, 7-42 getting ready, 3-4 test port 1 bridge
troubleshooting, 4-36 interpreting results, 3-27 illustrated, 6-19, 6-25, 6-33,
storage data performing, 3-23 6-41, 6-47, 6-59
IDE, 5-33 procedure, 3-24 part number, 6-18, 6-24, 6-32,
strap handle what it verifies, 3-20 6-40, 6-46, 6-58
analyzer system motherboard removal and replacement
part number, 6-78 operation, 5-31 procedure, 7-36
subgroup part number, 6-14 troubleshooting, 4-35
data acquisition and processing, removal and replacement test port 1 coupler
5-29 illustrated, 7-17 illustrated, 6-19, 6-25, 6-33,
front panel, 5-29 procedure, 7-16 6-41, 6-47, 6-59
subnet mask, LAN, 4-19 system, operating operation, 5-17
substitution recovery, 8-18 part number, 6-18, 6-24, 6-32,
cable, 3-24 6-40, 6-46, 6-58
calibration kits, 3-24 removal and replacement
verification kits, 3-24 T procedure, 7-38, 7-39
supplies test troubleshooting, 4-35
battery calibration coefficients, 3-34 test port 1 Option 029 switch
part number, 6-82 dynamic accuracy, 3-35 illustrated, 6-25, 6-33, 6-47,
ESD frequency accuracy, 3-31 6-59
part numbers, 6-83 noise floor, 3-33 operation, 5-27
memory modules performance part number, 6-24, 6-32, 6-46,
part numbers, 6-82 frequency accuracy, 3-31 6-58
support source maximum power removal and replacement
contacting Agilent, 2-13 output, 3-30 illustrated, 7-55
options, 2-13 source power accuracy, 3-29 procedure, 7-54
organization, 2-13 test port maximum power test port 1 receiver step
switch, reference mixer output, 3-30 attenuator
illustrated, 6-19, 6-25, 6-33, test port power accuracy, 3-29 illustrated, 6-25, 6-33, 6-47,
6-41, 6-47, 6-59 receiver compression, 3-32 6-59
part number, 6-18, 6-24, 6-32, source power linearity, 3-30 part number, 6-24, 6-32, 6-46,
6-40, 6-46, 6-58 6-58

Index
removal and replacement test port 2 Option 029 switch test port 3 receiver step
illustrated, 7-43 illustrated, 6-25, 6-33, 6-47, attenuator
procedure, 7-42 6-59 illustrated, 6-47, 6-59
troubleshooting, 4-39 operation, 5-27 part number, 6-46, 6-58
test port 1 source bypass switch part number, 6-24, 6-32, 6-46, removal and replacement
illustrated, 6-33, 6-59 6-58 illustrated, 7-43
part number, 6-32, 6-58 removal and replacement procedure, 7-42
removal and replacement illustrated, 7-55 troubleshooting, 4-39
illustrated, 7-47 procedure, 7-54 test port 3 source bypass switch
procedure, 7-46 test port 2 receiver step illustrated, 6-59
troubleshooting, 4-36 attenuator part number, 6-58
test port 1 source step attenuator illustrated, 6-25, 6-33, 6-47, removal and replacement
illustrated, 6-25, 6-33, 6-47, 6-59 illustrated, 7-47
6-59 part number, 6-24, 6-32, 6-46, procedure, 7-46
part number, 6-24, 6-32, 6-46, 6-58 troubleshooting, 4-36
6-58 removal and replacement test port 3 source step attenuator
removal and replacement illustrated, 7-43 illustrated, 6-47, 6-59
illustrated, 7-43 procedure, 7-42 part number, 6-46, 6-58
procedure, 7-42 troubleshooting, 4-39 removal and replacement
troubleshooting, 4-36 test port 2 source bypass switch illustrated, 7-43
test port 2 bias tee illustrated, 6-33, 6-59 procedure, 7-42
illustrated, 6-25, 6-33, 6-47, part number, 6-32, 6-58 troubleshooting, 4-36
6-59 removal and replacement test port 4 bias tee
part number, 6-24, 6-32, 6-46, illustrated, 7-47 illustrated, 6-47, 6-59
6-58 procedure, 7-46 part number, 6-46, 6-58
removal and replacement troubleshooting, 4-36 removal and replacement
illustrated, 7-43, 7-45 test port 2 source step attenuator illustrated, 7-43, 7-45
procedure, 7-42, 7-44 illustrated, 6-25, 6-33, 6-47, procedure, 7-42, 7-44
troubleshooting, 4-36 6-59 troubleshooting, 4-36
test port 2 bridge part number, 6-24, 6-32, 6-46, test port 4 bridge
illustrated, 6-19, 6-25, 6-33, 6-58 illustrated, 6-41, 6-47, 6-59
6-41, 6-47, 6-59 removal and replacement part number, 6-40, 6-46, 6-58
part number, 6-18, 6-24, 6-32, illustrated, 7-43 removal and replacement
6-40, 6-46, 6-58 procedure, 7-42 illustrated, 7-37
removal and replacement troubleshooting, 4-36 procedure, 7-36
illustrated, 7-37 test port 3 bias tee troubleshooting, 4-35
procedure, 7-36 illustrated, 6-47, 6-59 test port 4 coupler
troubleshooting, 4-35 part number, 6-46, 6-58 illustrated, 6-41, 6-47, 6-59
test port 2 coupler removal and replacement operation, 5-17
illustrated, 6-19, 6-25, 6-33, illustrated, 7-43, 7-45 part number, 6-40, 6-46, 6-58
6-41, 6-47, 6-59 procedure, 7-42, 7-44 removal and replacement
operation, 5-17 troubleshooting, 4-36 procedure, 7-38, 7-39
part number, 6-18, 6-24, 6-32, test port 3 bridge troubleshooting, 4-35
6-40, 6-46, 6-58 illustrated, 6-41, 6-47, 6-59 test port 4 receiver step
removal and replacement part number, 6-40, 6-46, 6-58 attenuator
procedure, 7-38, 7-39 removal and replacement illustrated, 6-47, 6-59
troubleshooting, 4-35 illustrated, 7-37 part number, 6-46, 6-58
test port 2 Option 029 bridge procedure, 7-36 removal and replacement
illustrated, 6-25, 6-33, 6-47, troubleshooting, 4-35 illustrated, 7-43
6-59 test port 3 coupler procedure, 7-42
operation, 5-27 illustrated, 6-41, 6-47, 6-59 troubleshooting, 4-39
part number, 6-24, 6-32, 6-46, operation, 5-17 test port 4 source bypass switch
6-58 part number, 6-40, 6-46, 6-58 illustrated, 6-59
removal and replacement removal and replacement part number, 6-58
illustrated, 7-57 procedure, 7-38, 7-39 removal and replacement
procedure, 7-56 troubleshooting, 4-35 illustrated, 7-47
procedure, 7-46

Index
test port 4 source step attenuator touch-up A33 reference mixer switch,
illustrated, 6-47, 6-59 paint 4-39
part number, 6-46, 6-58 part numbers, 6-84 A34 test port 1 source step
removal and replacement trace attenuator, 4-36
illustrated, 7-43 troubleshooting A35 test port 3 source step
procedure, 7-42 all traces, 4-28 attenuator, 4-36
troubleshooting, 4-36 troubleshooting all, 4-25 A36 test port 4 source step
test port cable trace A attenuator, 4-36
checks, 3-11 troubleshooting, 4-25, 4-28 A37 test port 2 source step
accessories used in, 3-13 trace B attenuator, 4-36
connector repeatability, 3-18 troubleshooting, 4-25, 4-28 A38 test port 1 bias tee, 4-36
insertion loss, 3-15 trace C A39 test port 3 bias tee, 4-36
insertion loss failure, 3-15 troubleshooting, 4-25, 4-28
A4 13.5 GHz source 1
magnitude and phase trace D
troubleshooting, 4-25, 4-28 synthesizer board, 4-31
stability, 3-16 A40 test port 4 bias tee, 4-36
magnitude and phase stability trace noise
test, 3-31 A41 test port 2 bias tee, 4-36
failure, 3-17 A42 test port 1 receiver step
trace R
performing, 3-13 troubleshooting, 4-25, 4-28 attenuator, 4-39
return loss, 3-14 trace, all A43 test port 3 receiver step
return loss failure, 3-14 troubleshooting, 4-28 attenuator, 4-39
test port coupler traceability A44 test port 4 receiver step
troubleshooting, 4-35 measurement, 3-22 attenuator, 4-39
TEST SET I/O path, 3-22 A45 test port 2 receiver step
connector traces A, B, R1, and R2 attenuator, 4-39
pin assignments, 5-13 troubleshooting, 4-28 A46 test port 1 source bypass
rear panel, 5-12 traces C, D, R3, and R4 switch, 4-36
test set motherboard troubleshooting, 4-28 A47 test port 3 source bypass
illustrated, 6-19, 6-25, 6-33, trim strip, filler switch, 4-36
6-41, 6-47, 6-59 front panel A48 test port 4 source bypass
operation, 5-12 illustrated, 6-11 switch, 4-36
part number, 6-18, 6-24, 6-32, part number, 6-10 A49 test port 2 source bypass
6-40, 6-46, 6-58 troubleshooting switch, 4-36
removal and replacement A1 front panel interface board, A5 26.5 GHz source 1 board,
illustrated, 7-27 4-12, 4-13 4-32
procedure, 7-26 A10 frequency reference board, A8 26.5 GHz source 2 board,
tests 4-30
adjustments, 3-36 4-32
A11 13.5 GHz LO synthesizer all traces, 4-28
performance, 3-7, 3-29 board, 4-30
source group, 4-29 channel A, 4-25, 4-33
A12 SPAM board, 4-39 channel B, 4-25, 4-33
time domain, Option 010, 2-3 A13 13.5 GHz source 2
tools channel C, 4-25, 4-33
synthesizer board, 4-31 channel D, 4-25, 4-33
required for servicing, 2-12 A16 power supply assembly, 4-7
service, part numbers, 6-82 channel R, 4-25
A17 CPU board, 4-17 check the basics, 4-4
top assembly A20 IF multiplexer board, 4-39
replaceable parts error term failure
A21 HMA26.5, 4-30 suspect devices, 8-3
A22 splitter, 4-31 fans, 4-11
part numbers, 6-14, 6-15, 6-70
A23 mixer brick, 4-38 front panel, 4-13
top assembly, all options
replaceable cables, all A24 mixer brick, 4-38 front panel keypad, 4-13
illustrated, 6-17 A25 test port 1 bridge, 4-35 front panel knob, 4-13
part numbers, 6-16 A26 test port 3 bridge, 4-35 front-panel USB, 4-13
touch screen A27 test port 4 bridge, 4-35 GPIB CONTROLLER port, 4-17
illustrated, 6-13 A28 test port 2 bridge, 4-35 inverter board, 4-12
parts list, 6-12 A29 test port 1 coupler, 4-35 LAN, 4-18
removal and replacement A3 display assembly, 4-12, 4-13 measurement system, 4-23
illustrated, 7-12, 7-13 A30 test port 3 coupler, 4-35 receiver group, 4-37
procedure, 7-12 A31 test port 4 coupler, 4-35 running the receiver display,
A32 test port 2 coupler, 4-35 4-25

Index
signal separation group, 4-33 source 2 pulse modulator, of operating specifications, 3-4
source group, 4-29 Option 022, 2-4 system, 3-1, 3-7, 3-20
traces A, B, C, D, R, 4-25 time domain, Option 010, 2-3 dialog box, 3-24
where to begin, 4-27 vector and scalar calibrated example of results, 3-27, 3-28
ping command, 4-19 frequency converter failure flowchart, 3-26
power output of channel A, 4-33 measurements failure of, 3-26
power output of channel B, 4-33 Option 083, 2-5 getting ready, 3-4
power output of channel C, 4-33 upgrade kits interpreting results, 3-27
power output of channel D, 4-33 order numbers, 6-83 performing, 3-23
power up, 4-6 part numbers, 6-82 procedure, 3-24
power supply check, 4-7 upgrades what it verifies, 3-20
rear panel, 4-17 analyzer, 2-8 VGA monitor, 4-12
rear-panel USB, 4-17 firmware, 8-17 VGA port
receiver outputs, 4-38 USB rear panel connector, 5-33
RPG, 4-13 accessories
signal separation group, 4-34 CD-RW drive, 2-9
hub, 2-9 W
source group
single vs. broadband, 4-29 part numbers, 6-83 warm up
speaker, 4-13 port analyzer, 3-4
trace A, 4-25 rear panel connector, 5-33 warning, 1-3
trace B, 4-25 rear panel warnings
troubleshooting, 4-17 for servicing, 1-4
trace C, 4-25
USB board warranty
trace D, 4-25 service
trace R, 4-25 removal and replacement
illustrated, 7-11 standard, 2-13
typical power output three-year return to Agilent,
Port 1, 4-34 procedure, 7-10
troubleshooting, 4-13 2-13
Port 2, 4-34 Windows, 2-10
Port 3, 4-34 USB board, front panel
illustrated, 6-13 wire harnesses
Port 4, 4-34 in bottom assembly, Option 200
part number, 6-12
using controllers to system illustrated, 6-23
USB controller board
troubleshoot, 4-18 removal and replacement part numbers, 6-22
using error terms, 8-3 illustrated, 7-11 in bottom assembly, Option 219
where to begin, 4-4 procedure, 7-11 illustrated, 6-31
USB controller board, front panel part numbers, 6-30
U illustrated, 6-13 in bottom assembly, Option 224
part number, 6-12 illustrated, 6-39
uncertainty USB hub, accessory, 2-9 part numbers, 6-38
measurement, 3-21 utility in bottom assembly, Option 400
upgrade option enable, 8-13 illustrated, 6-45
firmware accessing, 8-13 part numbers, 6-44
downloading from the dialog box, 8-13 in bottom assembly, Option 419
internet, 8-17 illustrated, 6-57
four internal pulse generators, part numbers, 6-56
Option 025, 2-4 V in bottom assembly, Option 423
frequency offset mode VCO (voltage-controlled illustrated, 6-69
Option 080, 2-4 oscillator) part numbers, 6-68
how to order, 2-3, 2-8 defined, 5-7
IF inputs, Option 020, 2-4 vector and scalar calibrated
noise figure measurement converter measurements
capability, Option 029, 2-4 Option 083, 2-5
pulsed RF measurements, ventilation requirements, 1-3
Option H08, 2-3 verification
scalar calibrated converter ANSI/NCSL Z540-1-1994, 3-9
measurements kits, 2-11, 3-7
Option 082, 2-5 substitution, 3-24
source 1 pulse modulator, non-ANSI/NCSL Z540-1-1994,
Option 021, 2-4 3-10
of operating environment, 3-4

Index

PNA-X Service Manual N5242-90001

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PNA-X Service Manual N5242-90001

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

PNA-X Service Manual N5242-90001

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Guide

Part Number N5242-90001

© Agilent Technologies, Inc. 2007-2009

DFARS/Restricted Rights Notice

ii Service Guide N5242-90001

Safety and Regulatory Information

WARNING Warning denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure which, if

CAUTION Caution denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure that, if not

Service Guide N5242-90001 iii

The Installation and Quick Start Guide helps you to quickly

Printing Copies of Documentation from the Web

iv Service Guide N5242-90001

1 Safety and Regulatory Information

2 General Product Information

Service Guide N5242-90001 Contents-1

Agilent Support, Services, and Assistance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

3 Tests and Adjustments

Contents-2 Service Guide N5242-90001

Service Guide N5242-90001 Contents-3

A29–A32 Test Port Couplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Contents-4 Service Guide N5242-90001

7 Repair and Replacement Procedures

Service Guide N5242-90001 Contents-5

Removing and Replacing the Front Panel LED Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-60

8 General Purpose Maintenance Procedures

Contents-6 Service Guide N5242-90001

Service Guide N5242-90001 1-1

Information in This Chapter

Chapter One at-a-Glance

Section Title Summary of Content Start Page

Descriptions of CAUTION and WARNING

A list of safety points to consider when

A discussion of electrostatic discharge (ESD)

Definitions of instrument markings.

1-2 Service Guide N5242-90001

CAUTION Caution denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure that, if not

WARNING Warning denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure which, if

General Safety Considerations

Safety Earth Ground

WARNING This is a Safety Class I product (provided with a protective earthing

WARNING If this product is not used as specified, the protection provided by

WARNING If an instrument handle is damaged, you should replace it

Service Guide N5242-90001 1-3

CAUTION Ventilation Requirements: When installing the product in a cabinet, the

WARNING Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only

WARNING Procedures described in this document may be performed with

1-4 Service Guide N5242-90001

WARNING No operator serviceable parts inside. Refer servicing to qualified

WARNING The opening of covers or removal of parts may expose dangerous

WARNING The detachable power cord is the instrument disconnecting device.

Service Guide N5242-90001 1-5

Electrostatic Discharge Protection

Figure 1-1 ESD Protection Setup

1-6 Service Guide N5242-90001

This symbol indicates that the power line switch is ON.

This symbol is used to identify a terminal which is internally connected to the

The CE mark is a registered trademark of the European Community. (If

This is a symbol of an Industrial Scientific and Medical Group 1 Class A product.

This is a marking to indicate product compliance with the Canadian

China RoHS regulations include requirements related to packaging, and require